JP6732307B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins at the starting opening, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and when the symbol for informing the determination result is variably displayed, the player Various effects that make a big hit are expected (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP, 2016-163824, A

By the way, the production performed by the conventional gaming machine is not necessarily a production with a high degree of interest, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a symbol display control unit that causes the symbol that indicates the result of the determination to be stopped and displayed after the symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display unit,
Special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
A holding means capable of holding the right of judgment to a predetermined number,
And a production control means for controlling execution of production,
The effect control means,
As an effect for notifying the determination result of the determination means, during the variable display of the symbols, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed, or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed Run and
Reach effects that can be executed by the effect control unit during the variable display of the symbols include a first reach effect and a second reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect.
The effect control means,
When the losing notification effect by the second reach demonstration is executed, the condition that is being held by the judgment on the right is the holding means so that the contact notification effect is performed, the special game is executed On the other hand, while the expected effect that is expected to be performed is executed, the expected effect is not executed when the loss notification effect is executed by the first reach effect .

The gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention,
The effect control means,
During the variable display of the symbols, it is possible to further execute the third reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect,
Even when the loss notification effect is executed by the third reach effect, the expected effect is executed,
When the expected effect is executed after the loss notification effect is executed by the second reach effect, the hit notification effect is always executed after that,
If the expected effect after the loss notification effect is performed by the third reach demonstration is executed, then, as when executing the per notification effect, there Ru and when executing the loss notification effect It is characterized by that.

Further, the gaming machine of the third invention,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a symbol display control unit that causes the symbol that indicates the result of the determination to be stopped and displayed after the symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display unit,
Special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
A holding means capable of holding the right of judgment to a predetermined number,
And a production control means for controlling execution of production,
The effect control means,
As an effect for notifying the determination result of the determination means, during the variable display of the symbols, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed, or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed Run and
Reach effects that can be executed by the effect control unit during the variable display of the symbols include a first reach effect and a second reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect.
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute suggestive effect suggesting that the special game is relatively likely to be executed during variable display of the symbol,
When the losing notification effect by the second reach demonstration is executed on condition that the determination of the suggested effect a determination is made is to be executed right is held by the holding means, On the other hand, while performing an expected effect that expects the special game to be executed, the expected effect is not executed when the loss notification effect is executed by the first reach effect .

The gaming machine of the fourth invention is the gaming machine of the third invention,
The effect control means,
During the variable display of the symbols, it is possible to further execute the third reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect,
Even when the loss notification effect is executed by the third reach effect, the expected effect is executed,
When the expected effect is executed after the loss notification effect is executed by the third reach effect, the hit notification effect is always executed after that,
If the expected effect after the loss notification effect is performed by the second reach demonstration is executed, then, as when executing the per notification effect, there Ru and when executing the loss notification effect It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining effect.

It is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the game machine concerning the example of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display unit shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display units included in the same gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. It is a table showing various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a big hit judgment table, (B) is a big hit type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, (E) is a normal symbol fluctuation It is a pattern selection table. It is a table showing a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flow chart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of an interrupt process. It is a flow chart of starting opening sensor detection processing. It is a flow chart of processing at the time of starting entry. It is a flowchart of a general operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of a normal symbol hit/miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of processing during normal symbol variation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric auditors product processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 hit/miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 during the process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 success/failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 during the process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors product processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting processing 1. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting processing 2. It is a flow chart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flow chart of power failure monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flow chart of 2ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart of variation production start processing. It is the table which shows the design kind of production design. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of state A. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of state B. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of production mode C, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of production mode D. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of production mode C. It is the explanation drawing which shows the flow of the production design game production of production mode D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit change in production mode D, and (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit game in production mode D. It is a flowchart of a small hit prefetching effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect|action when a specific period is started. It is a figure showing an example of a mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen from before the start of a mode selection period in a big hit game to after it starts. (A) is a table showing the type of the second effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode C), (b) is a table showing the type of the third effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode D). It is the figure which shows the indicatory example of the announcement image in production mode D. It is a display pattern determination table of a notice image. It is the figure which shows one example of the contents of the display of the production design game production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a 1st specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a 1st specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a 2nd specific effect. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 2nd specific production A. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific effect B. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific effect C. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of (a) 1st notice production (production reservation notice), and (b) is a production reservation notice determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 3rd notice production (fireworks notice). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 4th notice production (chance zone notice). It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 5th notice production (preliminary notice of all rotations) and all rotations. It is a figure showing an execution mode of a specific reach production. It is a figure showing an execution mode of a specific reach production. It is a table showing an example of a notice production. It is a figure showing an execution mode of notice production. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the earned profit display production. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the earned profit display production. It is a figure which shows the transition state of a game state and a big hit game. It is the table which shows the game production in each production mode. It is the figure which shows the execution feature of each production mode. It is a figure showing the production mode of confrontation reach. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an earned profit display production. It is a figure which shows the 1st firing direction notification production. It is a figure which shows the 1st firing direction notification production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd firing direction notification production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd firing direction notification production. It is a figure which shows the 3rd firing direction notification production. It is a figure which shows the 3rd firing direction notification production. It is a diagram showing a fourth firing direction notification effect. It is a diagram showing a fourth firing direction notification effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the number of times of change. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the number of times of change. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the number of times of change. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the production performed in the low certainty low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution condition of a precursor effect. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of a sign production. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of a precursor production. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of RAM913 for production control. It is a flow chart which illustrates a precursor effect pattern setting process.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed due to the end of the variable display of the symbol, a pachinko game machine capable of executing a winning game in which a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be given to the player An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 is configured to have a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko gaming machine 1 on an island facility of a hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported at one side end side in the vertical direction (left side in FIG. 1), and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

Further, in the front frame 51, a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity according to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, a game ball that stores and stores the game ball can be supplied to the launcher side. A ball hitting tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as "operable by the player during the execution of the game effect that is executed as the game progresses". And is also simply referred to as “effect button 63”). For the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be selectively used according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example, an input detecting means for detecting an input from the player or a player directly contacting the button portion to input) can be used. , A retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects when a part of the player's body approaches and inputs. Good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a frame lamp 66 for decoration, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to project toward and is inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similar to the image display device 7 described later, according to the execution/non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game effects (characters and effect patterns, etc.), demonstration effects, information about games (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive holidays, remaining game period, game mode, reliability of game effect, explanation, etc.) Information relating to the settings of the gaming machine (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information among these pieces of information, and may display the same information. The image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. In some cases Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as “image display device”.

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game region 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game region 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge part). Has been. Therefore, the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 can be pivoted in the left-right direction. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project in front of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as an axis, is a pachinko machine. This is a structure for preventing the game machine 1 from being damaged by colliding with a hall facility (ball lending machine, inter-unit equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (the left side of the drawing in FIG. 1). .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and is not rotatable.

On the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball shot by operating the launch handle 60 flows down is formed surrounded by a rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 that guide the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launcher side.

Further, near the center of the game area 3, an image display device 7 including a liquid crystal display device is provided. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit") is displayed. ) Is provided, and the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in accordance with the game state (low-probability low base state, high-probability low base state, low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state) The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game. The effect design 8L is also referred to as "left design", the effect design 8C is also referred to as "middle design", and the effect design 8R is also referred to as "right design".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (a low accurate low base state, state A described later). As will be described later in detail, in this low accurate low base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting opening (second starting opening 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether or not the special symbol is valid Judgment probability (first special symbol hit determination and second special symbol hit determination) is a low probability (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol (2 times or more) is set (out-of-range variation is all 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, the right game area 3B (second game area) shoots a game ball, enters the second starting opening 21 and causes the second special symbol to variably be displayed, rather than the left game area 3A (second It is considered to be advantageous for the player to perform a game in which a game ball is shot in one game area) to enter the first starting opening 20 and the first special symbol is variably displayed. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that it is a gaming state in which the first special symbol (effect symbol) is mainly displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are supposed to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Moreover, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) that represent numbers “1” to “9”, for example. By the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stop-displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display device 41a (see "First") described later (see FIG. 4) The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display section"), and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as "second special symbol display section") The result of the variable display of the symbols (the result of the special symbol winning/absence determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and any (or all) of the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. Further, the special symbol win/loss determination is also simply referred to as "win/win determination" or "first win/loss determination". In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol win/loss determination is also referred to as “win/win determination execution unit” or “first win/loss determination execution unit”.

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (doublet) such as "777" (also as "big hit symbol"). Say). In the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a chance design such as "135" or a small hit exclusive design such as "3★3" (also called "small hit design") The symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, when it is a small hit, it may be changed to a mode in which the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbols in the same mode may be stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol and the off symbol design. In addition, as a small hit, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.), different small hit patterns (first small hit pattern, second small hit pattern) can be distinguished. ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

Further, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is out, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is displayed as a stop symbol of the production symbol ("off symbol"). Also called). Thereby, the player can easily understand the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning/absence determination) by looking at the effect symbol which is stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b. The presentation symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b is grasped by looking at it. In addition, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbols, for example, a mode in which scroll display is performed vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc., a mode in which effect display is performed using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, or a first effect symbol display unit 7b. In addition to this, it has a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display portion 71a and the third effect symbol display portion 72a. In addition to this, you may have the aspect which performs an effect display using only the 2nd effect symbol display part 71a or the 3rd effect symbol display part 72a.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect pattern as described above, it is executed along with the winning game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (a big hit game effect, a small hit game effect), a customer waiting demonstration effect, etc. are displayed. In the effect design game effect, the winning game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect patterns such as numbers, effect images other than effect patterns such as background images and character images are also displayed. Further, as will be described later in detail, a game state (state A, state B or state C) or a state in which a game ball is shot in the left game area 3A to perform a game, or a game ball is shot in the right game area 3B. The display pattern on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether or not the game is played. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously), and such a type of game. The machine is also called "simultaneous fluctuation machine (parallel fluctuation machine)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display section) that displays a first effect hold 9a according to the number of memories of a first special figure hold described later, There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of stored second special figure hold described later. Depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold displayed by the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. And the number of memories of the second special figure reservation displayed by the second special figure reservation indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player. The display position of the first effect hold display section and the display position of the second effect hold display section may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect to be executed (reach effect, etc.). In addition, only one of the first effect hold display section and the second effect hold display section (for example, only the effect hold display section corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center ornament 10 is provided so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center ornament 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center ornament 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit, and guides it to the stage section 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11 and can enter the first starting opening 20 described later. Further, on the upper part of the center decoration body 10, there is an electric decoration member such as an LED (board surface lamp 5) which can be turned on in accordance with the game state, and a decoration member 13 in the shape of characters or figures is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined when the game effect with a relatively high probability of being hit is executed). The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest of the game and the expectation of winning.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first starting opening 20 in which the ease of entering a game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, a random number for determining the special symbol win/loss, etc., is acquired, and if the predetermined condition (variation start condition) set in advance is satisfied, the win/loss determination for the first special symbol ( (1st special symbol hit determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Above the right side area of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3 (right game area 3B), a gate 28 through which a game ball can pass (can enter) (universal figure starting port, passing port, entrance port, specific start) (Also called the mouth) is provided. The game ball entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also called a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is both the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When the game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, and the random number for determining the symbol success/failure is normally acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, it is normal. Along with executing the symbol hit determination (also referred to as "second hit determination"), the normal symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit determination. When the hit ordinary pattern is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opening operation) and the second starting opening 21 is opened. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the ordinary symbol winning/decising determination of whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) and the second starting port 21 is opened is a "winning/absence determination executing unit" or It is also referred to as "second hit/miss determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

In addition, as will be described later in detail, when passing through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), the function as the starting gate 29 is exerted when the condition for executing the big hit game is satisfied (the big hit execution). It is also called a possible state or a big hit standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, control processing relating to a normal symbol is performed, and big hit start processing is not executed. Also, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the big hit waiting state), the big hit game on standby is started and a predetermined big winning opening ( The round game in which the first big winning opening 30) is in an open state (state in which a ball can be entered) starts.

In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) the gate 28 (starting gate 29), the first special winning opening 30 is provided. A special winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening/closing member 32, and operates the opening/closing member 32 to open/close the first big winning opening 30. The opening/closing member 32 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the upper surface. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side of the drawing). As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down to the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 pass through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 without entering the first big winning opening 30. And flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 32 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first special winning opening 30 will enter the first special winning opening 30. In this way, the opening/closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 is a retractable opening/closing member, and when the open state (when open), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large size. While entering the winning opening 30, in the closed state (when closed), the game ball that has flowed down can be guided in any direction (the second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. The first special winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entrance), by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 32, the game ball cannot enter the ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It is possible to change to a ball possible state (open state).

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game balls does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting opening 26, a random number for determining the special symbol hit/miss, etc. is acquired, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) set in advance is satisfied, the hit/nozzle determination relating to the second special symbol ( (2nd special symbol hit determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination after a lapse of a predetermined time. In addition, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 (upper and lower), the upper-side game ball passage provided with the third starting opening 26, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31. The lower game ball passage, where the two major winning openings 35 are provided, is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper stage game ball passage enters the third starting port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third starting port 26. Alternatively, it does not enter the third starting port 26 but flows down to the out port 34. Further, since the third starting opening 26 is a fixed type winning device that can always enter the ball, it becomes a big hit in the left hitting game (so-called first hit), and when the first big hitting game is executed in the right hitting game. , It is possible to enter (hold) a game ball into the third starting port 26 during the big hit game, and execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, the easiness of entering a game ball is variable. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port” or a “variable starting port”) having a second starting port 21 of a formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game sphere into the second starting opening 21, random numbers for special symbol hit determination, etc. are acquired, and if the predetermined condition (variation start condition) that has been set in advance is met, the hit determination of the second special symbol (the (2 special symbol winning judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the winning judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening/closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by operating the movable member 23. By this opening/closing operation, the second starting opening 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (opened state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting opening 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and cannot enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the opened state. It does not have to be impossible to enter.

Further, the movable member 23, like the opening/closing member 32, is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the upper surface. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). With this, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting opening solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (direction perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 will enter the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting opening 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32. While smoothly entering the second starting port 21, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be moved in any direction by the inclined upper surface passage (the second big winning port 35 described later). Induce to.

In addition, in the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) the second starting opening 21, the second special winning opening 35 is provided. A special winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second special winning device 36 includes an opening/closing member 37, and the opening/closing member 37 is operated to open/close the second special winning opening 35. Like the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 has a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular upper surface (long plate shape), and in the closed state, closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 and opens/closes the opening. A game ball can pass on the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 pass through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 without entering the second special winning opening 35. And flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second special winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 37 is retracted in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening/closing member 37 that has been used is removed from the entrance of the second special winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 will enter the second special winning opening 35. In this way, the opening/closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when open). Smoothly into the second big winning opening 35, and guide the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. The second special winning opening 35 allows game balls to enter only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entrance), by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 37, the game ball can not enter the ball can not enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It can be changed to a ball-able state (open state).

Further, a plurality of (three) general entrances 27 are provided in the game area below the left area (left game area 3A) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The batting method that shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the left gaming area 3A is called left hitting, and the batting method that shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the right gaming area 3B is called right hitting. .. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low accurate low base state, state A) at the time of starting the game is aimed at entering the first starting opening 20 by left-handing. That is, the normal state at the time of starting the game is a left-handed game in which the ball enters the first starting opening 20 by left-handed striking (first special symbol winning/absence determination).

On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the hit determination (first special symbol hit determination) based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, after the big hit game, and the big hit game (special game) end (low accuracy high base state or high probability The low base state) is a game in which the player hits the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, or the second big winning opening 35 by hitting the ball to the right. That is, the big hit game, and the low-probability high base state (state B) or the high-probability low base state (state C) is mainly the ball entry into the second starting port 21 by right-handing (second special symbol winning/absence determination) It will be a right-handed game. When the game balls enter the first starting opening 20, the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general entrance 27, the respective entrances At, a predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as “prize balls” and “game profit”) are paid out (granted). In the present embodiment, the number of award balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the ball entering the first special winning opening 30 is calculated as the number of prize balls paid out based on the entering the second special winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first special winning opening 30 is for paying out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second special winning opening 35 is 10 for one winning ball. The prize balls will be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board 2. On the main display 40, a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that variably displays and stops the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display that variably displays and stops the second special symbol. The device 41b (second special symbol display portion), and the normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") variable display and stop display normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) is included. In addition, the main display 40, the first special diagram reservation display 43a for displaying the number of hit determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, the special determination hold information (second special symbol) A second special figure hold indicator 43b for displaying the number of memories of 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold indicator 44 for displaying the number of memories of operation hold (general figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 are included. ing.

Further, the main display 40, the hit indicator 48 showing that the result of the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination is a hit, the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the hit game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability varying function is activated, and a shooting direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed hitting. A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether to fire or to hit left. Various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display portion 41. In addition, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure reservation display section 43.

In the special symbol display portion 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time and then is stopped and displayed, and by the special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped (derived), the first starting port 20 or the second starting port. The result of the winning/losing judgment (special symbol winning/failing judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol hit determination. If the stop symbol is a specific special symbol (specific identification information) that is set in advance (that is, if it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped and displayed. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) for opening the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i-p", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Further, when the second big hit (4R second big hit), the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays the special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol winning/discarding judgment. Regarding the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display device 41b, different display modes are set according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit determination. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the variable display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variation time, but the mode of the variable display is, for example, in a predetermined order, from left to right. It is possible to adopt a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows.

Here, among the stop display modes of special symbols and effect symbols (display results of variable display), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the determination of the special symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as “hit mode”. ], "specific mode", "specific display mode" or "specific display result", the result of the special symbol judgment is a stop display mode corresponding to "disconnection mode", "non-specific mode" , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit is also called "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit is "small. Also referred to as a "hit mode". Further, any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display device 41a (first special symbol display part), the second special symbol display device 41b (second special symbol display part) and the special symbol display part 41 are indicated. Also referred to as "variable display means" and "identification information display means".

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when there is a game ball entering the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, various information such as a random number for special symbol winning/disapproving determination based on the entering (“acquired information”). (Also referred to as a “special” reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80). More specifically, if the information is acquired based on a ball entering the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as a first special figure reservation (also referred to as “first acquisition information”), If the information is obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in Embodiment 1 is four. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage unit" and "second acquisition information storage unit", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as "acquisition information storage unit". ..

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is exhausted when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digesting the special figure hold means to determine a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol corresponding to the special figure hold, and to perform a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be executed immediately upon entering the ball, that is, each special During execution of variable display of symbols, or during execution of special games based on any special symbol hit/miss judgment, the number of special symbols (4 each) is set as the upper limit, and the right of special symbol hit/miss determination for the entry is reserved (reserved). ) You can do it.

The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two "uv" LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs in accordance with the number of the first special figure reservations. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “u□v□” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings is 1 In the case of, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is lit in red, as in “u□v●”. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off as in “u●v□”. Further, when the number of holdings is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green such as “u▲v▲” to provide a display mode. In addition, the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure reservations, the second special figure reservation is displayed. It displays the number. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “w□□□” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings 1 to No. 4 is set similarly to the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbol is displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed shows the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. Notify me. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol hit/miss judgment. If the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is a specific normal symbol determined in advance (normal normal symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting opening 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state (“specific game”) (Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main controller) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment by the lighting mode thereof. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, both LEDs are turned on and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as in "s.t. In addition, when the determination result is out, an out-of-ordinary symbol such as "s□t■" in which only the t LED is turned on is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time that is set in advance. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off repeatedly.

This pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for normal symbol success/failure determination based on the passage of a game ball to the gate 28, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a general figure reservation in the general figure reservation storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of universal figure reservations that can be stored in the universal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The universal figure hold stored in the universal figure hold storage unit 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbols based on the universal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the public figure hold means that the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol corresponding to the public figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the normal symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately when the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (reserve) the right to determine whether or not a normal symbol is valid for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of public figure reservations is displayed on the general figure reservation display 44. Specifically, the universal figure pending display 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of universal figure pending by turning on the LEDs in accordance with the number of universal figure pending. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "q□r□" (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings is 1 In the case of, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, such as “q□r●”. In addition, the numbers of reservations 2 to 4 are also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) for performing control relating to game profit such as special symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination, and game state transition. "Game control section"), a sub-control board 90 (also called "sub-control section", "sub-control section", or "production control section") that controls the performance to be executed as the game progresses, a game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that performs control related to payout, a design 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a design displayed on the display 102, a third display pending display 103a, Also, an image control board 100 (image control unit) for performing display control of the fourth effect hold display device 103b and the like is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case that stores a main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and an image control board storage case that stores the image control board 100 are provided, and a sub control board storage case that stores the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. A payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for housing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits/receives data (information) to/from another board or the like via the input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be external. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage section 85 (first special figure reservation storage section 85a and second special figure reservation storage section 85b) and a general figure reservation storage section 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, as the sensors, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and The general entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each of the general ball entrances 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entrance 27.

As the solenoids, the second starting opening solenoid 24, the first special winning opening solenoid 33, and the second special winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting opening solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reservation display 43a, the second special symbol reservation display 43b, universal The figure hold indicator 44, the round indicator 45, the game state indicator 46, the firing direction indicator 47, and the hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

In addition, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls or lent balls, and a card unit 135, and a launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “shooting control section”). Are connected. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually the left side of the paper of FIG. 1), and when the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation, the inserted prepaid card (game It is possible to lend a ball based on information stored in a value storage medium).

The payout control board 110 is provided with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of gaming balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 112, the touch switch 114 detects contact of the player with the launching handle 60, and the launching volume 115 of the launching handle 60 is detected. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the firing motor 113 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection in which only signals can be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction restricting means is interposed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with a production control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“production control microcomputer”) for controlling the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. There is. The production control microcomputer 91 transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be external.

An image control board 100, a sound control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 causes the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100. Display of image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display device 102, third effect hold display device 103a, and fourth effect hold display device 103b. Control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols (including effect designs, hold designs, etc.) and Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs the variable display and the stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED the variable display of the second special symbol. And, the variable display and the stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the corresponding LED is turned on or off, or by the color, the display mode showing the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the result of the determination of the special symbol). Stop display with. Similarly, each of the third effect holding display device 103a and the fourth effect holding display device 103b is also composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on/off the two LEDs or by combining the colors, the third effect holding display device 103a is displayed by the holding number and the first special figure holding display device 43a displayed in the first effect holding display area 9c. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holdings as the number of holdings. In addition, the fourth effect hold display device 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same number as the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the hold number displayed in the second special figure hold display 43b. It

A character pattern is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is moved in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display portion) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), part or all of the effect design 8, the first effect hold display section 9c, or the second effect hold display section 9d may be invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, and the auxiliary effect display device 102 are provided so as to be able to reliably confirm the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol, the number of held characters, and the like. Also, a fourth effect suspension display device 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display modes of the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b are in a state in which they are always visible without being obstructed by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. Has become. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 outputs a voice, a song, a sound effect, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the light emission pattern data that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 (data that determines lighting/extinguishment, emission color, etc.). , Lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. It should be noted that the movable decoration member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decoration body 10, although only a part of the movable decoration member 14 is visible. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines the operation pattern data. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to perform lighting control of the lamp or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the ROM may store data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

The sub-control board 90 also includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). The two effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub control board 90.

Next, the control relating to the special symbol win/loss determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, there are "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". When the "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. Further, when the "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. Further, when the "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. When it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" of opening the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is executed in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol hit determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, etc. , Including small hits). Also, the special game to be executed may be different depending on the hit type, the game profit amount obtainable by the special game may be different, and the game state after the special game may be different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “4R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R big hit”. There are 5 big hits, 2R 6th big hits, 2R 7th big hits, and 2R 8th big hits. In the “15R third big hit”, the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is 15. Further, in the “4R first big hit”, the “4R second big hit”, and the “4R fourth big hit”, the number of times (round number) of opening of the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is four. "2R 5th big jackpot", "2R 6th big jackpot", "2R 7th big jackpot", and "2R 8th big jackpot" have the number of rounds (number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) Two times. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. From this, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as "big winning big winning opening (variable big winning opening)".

Also, "4R 1st big hit", "15R 3rd big hit", "4R 4th big hit", "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game, It shifts to the high-probability state of (actuates the probability variation function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "probable variation jackpots (high-probability jackpots)." This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Also, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", "2R eighth big hit" shifts the game state after the big hit game to a low probability state described later (the probability changing function does not operate). .. Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also called "low probability jackpots (low-probability jackpots, normal jackpots)."

Also, "4R first big hit", "15R third big hit", "4R fourth big hit", after the end of the big hit game, set the variation time of the second special symbol to a short time "second special symbol time saving" Function, but not the high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these big hit games becomes the highly accurate low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the playability of the high-accuracy low base state (state C) will be described later in detail, but as described above, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged, the second special It is a period in which it is possible to increase the number of game balls in the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (between big hits) by making a symbol hit determination. In addition, by frequently making small hits in the highly accurate low base state during the big hits, it is expected that many game balls can be obtained in a short time by the small hits. That is, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", "2R eighth big hit", "2nd special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" are activated after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low-probability-high base state. In the case of "4R second big hit" and "2R eighth big hit", the low certainty high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. .. When the variable display of the special symbol is finished on the basis of being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low accurate low base state (normal state). Further, in the case of "2R seventh big hit", the low certainty high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or the variable display of the special symbol is executed 50 times. When the variable display of the special symbol is ended based on the execution of 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low accurate low base state (normal state). Also, as will be described later in detail, in the low accurate high base state, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, the second special symbol winning/absence determination is performed, and next. It is a period for playing games in anticipation of the jackpot.

Moreover, "2R 5th big hit" and "2R 6th big hit" activate the "2nd special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the gaming state after the completion of these big hit games becomes a highly accurate and high base state. In the case of "2R 5th big hit", "2nd special symbol time saving function" continues until the next big hit occurs, and "high base generation function" causes the next big hit or changes in the special symbol. The display ends 50 times. Further, as described above, the "probability change function" continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "2R fifth big hit", after the big hit game, until the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, it is in a highly accurate and high base state, and big hit does not occur even after 50 times. , The gaming state is set to the highly accurate low base state.

High-probability-high base state, like the low-probability-high base state, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol is judged whether or not there is a chance to hit the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy low base state is an advantageous period for the player who can expect a large number of game balls in a short period by small hits by frequently making small hits by right-handed games, as described above. is there. It should be noted that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate low base state than there are game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate high base state. Therefore, when the big hit does not occur until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol after the big hit game is over 50 times passes, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state) than before.

In addition, "2R 6 big hit", after the big hit game, until the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, it is in a highly accurate high base state, and if the big hit does not occur even after 100 times, It is the same as the "2R fifth big hit" except that the gaming state is set to the highly accurate low base state, that is, the period during which the gaming state changes is different. Further, the "2R fifth big hit" is set earlier than the "2R sixth big hit" when the gaming state changes from the high-precision high base state to the high-precision low base state. Therefore, it can be said that the “2R fifth jackpot” is a jackpot more advantageous to the player than the “2R sixth jackpot”.

In addition, a high certainty high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to the "2R fifth big hit", and a low level after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to the "2R seventh big hit game". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are non-notification states in which the gaming state (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

If the type of jackpot is "2R fifth jackpot", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol has passed, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and "2R If the "7th big hit", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol, the game state becomes a low accurate low base state (normal state that is disadvantageous to the player), so the player is not informing Regardless of which game state is in the state, the game is expected to be moved to the high-accuracy low base state, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

In addition, the high-precision high base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to "2R sixth big hit" and the low after the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to "2R eighth big hit" By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are non-notification states in which the gaming state (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

If the type of big hit is "2R 6th big hit", after 100 times the variable display of special symbols has passed, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and "2R In the case of "eighth big hit", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the game state becomes a low-probability low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player), so the player does not inform. Regardless of which game state is in the state, the game is expected to be moved to the high-accuracy low base state, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

In addition, a high certainty high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to the "2R fifth big hit" and a low level after the end of the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to the "2R seventh big hit game". High-precision base state and high-precision high-base state after the big hit game related to "2R 6th big hit" (2R 6th big hit game) and "2R 8th big hit game" (2R 8th big hit game) In the low accurate high base state after the end, by performing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.), the player recognizes which game state Make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, these gaming states are set as non-notification states in which the gaming state (high-probability/high-base state or low-probability/high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

If the type of jackpot is "2R fifth jackpot", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol has passed, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and "2R If the "7th big hit", after 50 times the variable display of the special symbol, the game state becomes a low accurate low base state (normal state that is disadvantageous to the player). Also, if the type of big hit is "2R sixth big hit", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), In the case of "2R eighth big hit", the gaming state becomes a low accurate low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player) after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times. Therefore, in the non-notification state, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low base state when the variation display of the special symbol has passed 50 times in any game state. , Will enhance the fun of the game.

In addition, even if it does not shift to the high-accuracy low base state, without expecting to shift to the low-precision low base state, at least the high base state continues (that is, the non-notification state continues) I do. After the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, if the non-notification state continues, we expect a big hit, and when the variable display of the special symbol passes 100 times, shift to a high-accuracy low base state. The game is expected to be played, and the interest in the game is enhanced. As described above, in the non-notification state, the points for increasing the player's expectation are set a plurality of times, which makes it possible to further enhance the interest in the game and to maintain the high interest in the game for a long time.

In addition, as for the small hit which can occur as a result of the second special symbol hit/miss determination, the number of times of opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is 6 times, and once compared with other big hits (and The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, a total of 1.8 seconds is opened by opening the opening 6 times for 0.3 seconds. Therefore, compared to the big hit game (for example, 15R third big hit game, 4R fourth big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be small. However, by generating a small hit a plurality of times (a large number of times), it is possible to execute a small hit game a plurality of times and obtain more game balls. In the case of a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 is opened and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. Therefore, the second special winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small winning big winning opening (small winning variable entrance)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the special winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times of opening. Also, based on the occurrence of a small hit, the probability change function does not operate, and if the gaming state at the time of a small hit is a high probability state, it will be a high probability state even after the small hit game is over. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is a low probability state even after the small hit game is over. Similarly, regarding the time saving function and the high base generating function of the second special symbol, it is assumed that they do not operate based on the occurrence of a small hit.

Incidentally, the distribution probability to each big hit in the hit determination of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) is 4R first big hit is 65%, 4R second big hit is 35%. On the other hand, the big hit in the winning judgment of the second special symbol (special drawing 2), the 15R third big hit is 50%, the 4R fourth big hit is 5%, the 2R fifth big hit is 5%, the 2R sixth big hit is 5%, 2R 7th jackpot is 25%, 2R 8th jackpot is 10%. That is, by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function to be described later, in the case of a big hit by the hit determination (second special symbol hit determination) based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 of which the variation frequency is improved, 15R, It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to obtain a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. Thus, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than a big hit in the hit determination (first special symbol hit determination) performed by entering the game ball into the first start opening 20, the game to the second start opening 21 It is set so that it is more likely to be a big hit for the player in the hit determination (the second special symbol hit determination) performed when the ball enters the ball (it is possible to obtain a large number of game balls). There is. Further, the player expects the occurrence of the 15R third big hit and the occurrence of a highly accurate low base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is made based on a "random number for special symbol win/loss determination (also referred to as "win/win determination information") The determination of the type of the big hit is performed based on the "big hit type determining random number (also referred to as "symbol determining random number" and "symbol determining information")". As shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for special symbol validity determination takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The big hit type determining random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 includes a random number for determining a special symbol right/wrong and a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a "variation pattern". There is a random number (also called "variation pattern information"). The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. In addition, the random number acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 includes a random number for normal symbol success/failure determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 21 (ordinary symbol or not determination). Ordinary symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. Pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability variation function (probability variation function) for special symbols and ordinary symbols, variation time shortening function for special symbols and ordinary symbols, and each function of the opening extension function of the second starting opening Depending on the combination of the states, it has a plurality of game states. About the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) the state in which the probability variation function is operating is called "high probability state", and the state not operating is called "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol hit determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). That is, in the low probability state, the big hit determination table for the low probability state is used to make a hit determination, but in the high probability state, there are many special symbol hit/miss random numbers that are determined to be a big hit. The table is used to determine whether or not it is true (see FIG. 8A). In other words, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit (the stop symbol is a big hit symbol), as compared with when it is not activated, the probability is high. The means (main control unit) for setting the high probability or the low probability as the probability of the special symbol hit determination (big hit probability) is called "probability setting means".

In addition, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) the state in which the variable time shortening function is operating is called "time saving state", and the non-operating state is called "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern table that is determined such that the variation pattern having the shorter variation time is selected more frequently than the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9 ). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digesting the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective ball entry into the starting opening (ball entry that can be stored as the special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage/disadvantage of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. If the second special symbol time saving function is not operating, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player plays a right-handed game and puts the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the second special The symbol special determination is executed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, the variation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes off, 3 minutes for big hits, 2 minutes for small hits), so the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state. Is also referred to as “first condition state”). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to obtain a large number of game balls even if the right-handed game is played in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed as a left-handed game aiming at the first starting opening 20 in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), In the state A, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed by mistake, without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end, enter the game ball into the first starting opening 20. , The first special symbol can be variably displayed.

When the second special symbol time saving function is operating, that is, when the state B or state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. 9, 2 Because the variation time of the special symbol becomes short, the player does not reduce the number of balls he holds compared to the left-handed game by performing a right-handed game (maintaining or slightly decreasing in state B, state C In, while increasing), it is possible to smoothly execute the game (second special symbol hit determination, variable game of the second special symbol). In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol time saving function is operating, the first special symbol time saving function is also operated, but the first special symbol time saving function may not be operated.

Probability variation function and variation time shortening function (second special symbol time saving function) for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. And, the probability variation function and variation time shortening function for the ordinary symbols are designed to operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability change function and the change time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high game base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), and low base state (low accurate low base state, high accurate state) It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol hit determination is higher than the low base state (also referred to as "universal figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is for the state B which is larger than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C) Ordinary symbol hit determination table (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the variation display of the normal symbol is a hit (the stop symbol is a normal hit symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. ..

In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, in the low base state, when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) and opens. The second starting port is opened during the operation. Further, when the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment in the high base state is a hit, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is to perform the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. Although the number of opening operations of the opening/closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state in the present embodiment, the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once in 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times in 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened 6 times in 1.0 second, and may be more than the opening number in the low base state. In such a case, the function of increasing the number of times of opening of the variable winning device 22 is also referred to as operating.

In the high base state, the probability variation function for the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, so compared to the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , The period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes long (the opening time per unit time becomes long), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 becomes high (also called "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the frequency of execution of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is increased. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball will pass through the second starting opening 21 if the opening frequency is smaller. In the present embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to one opening of 6.0 seconds, and the variation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Incidentally, during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the second starting port 21 is in a closed state, so the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is that the game ball starts to flow down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. Therefore, the time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. In addition, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material forming the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is set to the front side game. The material has a higher friction coefficient than the material forming the ball passage (the material is different). As a result, the velocity of the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be slower than the velocity of the rapid game flow in the game ball passage on the front side thereof. In addition, as a mode of reducing the flow-down speed, in addition, the inclination angle may be made gentle, or an inhibiting member (projection or the like) that reduces the flow-down speed may be provided. Further, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting opening 21 does not enter the second starting opening 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility that it will flow down to 35 is further reduced. In other words, in the high base state, even if the second big winning opening 35 is opened and the second winning hole 35 is in the open state (the state in which the ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting opening 21 and It is difficult to enter the special winning opening 35.

The high base state need not operate all of the above functions. That is, by the operation of at least one function of the probability changing function for the regular symbols, the changing time shortening function, and the opening time extending function of the variable winning device 22, the second starting opening than that when the function is not operating It suffices that 21 is easily opened (frequency of entry is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without being associated with the special symbol time saving state. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since the winning/damaging determination of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the winning/damaging determination of the first special symbol, the player plays the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol will be variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low accurate low base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low accurate low base state), the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation time) is extremely long compared to the variation time of the first special symbol (average variation time). Since it is set to, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. That is, it is advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left-handed game rather than variably display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, "the state in which the first special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not being variably displayed (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "0. It is said that. In addition, "the state where the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holding of the second special symbol is "0". That is.

In addition, high-base states such as high-precision high-base state and low-precision high-base state, as well as in the high-precision low base state, the second special symbol time saving function shortens the variation time of the second special symbol, and the right-handed game It improves the game efficiency. In such a case, it is possible to advance the game in an advantageous manner by performing a right-handed game and performing a second special symbol win/loss determination that is advantageous to the player. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. It is because. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger of the normal symbol hit determination, the right strike is performed to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 21.

Further, in the high accuracy low base state, the frequency of entering the second starting opening 21 is similar to that in the low accuracy low base state (normal state), but is executed based on the entering of the second starting opening 21. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is changing in a short time, the right-handed game capable of executing the second special symbol hit determination which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol hit determination is performed. Also, in the high-accuracy low-base state, since the probability variation function for the regular symbol, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are not operating, the entry into the second starting opening 21 is not performed. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 cannot be obtained as in the high base state. However, instead, by the second special symbol hit determination, by small hits that occur with a high probability (small hit probability: 300/630), prevent the game ball from decreasing during the big hits, rather rather small hits occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls to be held by (generating multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), by frequently entering the ball into the second starting port 21 by a right-handed game, without significantly reducing the ball holding, 2 Aim for the next big hit by the special symbol judgment. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 is set to one, and even if all the right-handed game balls enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. Sphere does not increase (maintains). Further, in the present embodiment, about 90 to 95% of the game ball that has been hit to the right is set to enter the second starting opening 21, so unless it enters another entrance, a high base. If the condition is continued for a long time, the number of balls held is reduced, though slightly.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the right-handed game causes a small hit at a high frequency by the second special symbol hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 to hold the ball in the small hit game. Along with increasing the number, aim for the next big hit by the second special symbol hit determination. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low base state, the longer the period during which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the high-accuracy low base state continues), the more the small hits occur. Opportunities (to execute small hit games) increase, which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board structure and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided with gates 28 (start gate 29), first big winning opening 30, and first entrance from the upstream side of the game area. The second starting opening 21 and the second winning opening 35 are arranged in an optimal order. Moreover, since the game ball downflow passage of the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning openings is in the closed state, most of the game balls shot to the right game area 3B (90% Above) passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), then flows down on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30, then flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then the second It is configured to flow down on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 and down to the outlet 34. Then, if there is an open winning port in the middle of its flow, it enters the winning port, is discharged from the winning port to the back of the game board, and the entered gaming ball is in the downstream game area. It is a non-existent structure.

By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball is prevented from reaching the gate 28 due to the opened second starting opening 21 and the like. Further, the normal symbol hold becomes "0", and it is possible to prevent a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) from occurring as much as possible. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not other winning openings are opened. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down to the downstream side of the right game area as it is, the existence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering the other winning openings.

When the right-handed game is performed in the high base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), first, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and it is determined whether or not to open the second starting opening 21. To be done. In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of winning per normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240), so the game ball is gated. Immediately (after 1 second) after passing through, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the normal symbol hit determination is executed, and when the normal symbol changes and is displayed, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting opening 21, 2 The starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the opening time of the second starting opening 21 is also set to 6.0 seconds once, so as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting opening 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. , Then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then open once for 6.0 seconds, the cycle will be repeated (1 second closed → 6 Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds →...).

Therefore, when the right hitting game is performed in the high base state, the second starting opening 21 is almost opened, and most (about 80 to 90%) of the game balls flowing down the right playing area 3B are in the second starting opening 21. You will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 21, the second special symbol winning/discarding determination is executed. In the second special symbol hit determination, in the high-accurate high-base state, it is a big hit with a probability of 1/63, a small hit with a probability of 30/63, and is out with a probability of 32/63.

First, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is out, the game ball flowing down the right game area 3B, after passing through the gate 28, most (about 80 to 90%) of the game ball is in the open state. It enters the second starting port 21, and other game balls flow down from the game ball passage that branches off before the second starting port 21 downstream, without flowing down to the second starting port 21, and the third starting port. It enters the ball 26 or flows into the outlet 34. As a result, the second special symbol hit determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is discharged by entering one ball in the second starting port 21, the second special symbol winning/deciding judgment is executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and the next big hit is aimed at. It becomes possible. In addition, one prize ball is discharged also by having entered one ball into the third starting port 26.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in a manner according to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second special winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game is smoothly prevented from being blocked by the other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21 and the first large winning opening. Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting opening 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning opening 30, although it shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, in the present embodiment, the second starting opening 21 is in the low base state. Since it is designed to be frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game first entered the second starting opening 21 and did not enter the second starting opening 21. A situation occurs in which only the game balls enter the second special winning opening 30.

Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 is one, the execution time of the big hit game is unnecessarily lengthened and there is no merit to the player. Rather, the game becomes redundant, and the game may not proceed smoothly, which may reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, by disposing the first special winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can be smoothly advanced. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 does not open except during the big hitting game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 during the big hitting game. Absent.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is in the open state in the opening/closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation for 0.3 seconds is performed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is open for most of the time. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls flowing down to the second starting opening 21 enter the second starting opening 21 arranged on the upstream side of the second special winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, it is a small hit, and even when the small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened is executed, the second big winning on the downstream side is made by the second starting opening 21 on the upstream side. The entry into the mouth 35 is obstructed and it is difficult to enter the second big winning opening 35. Although the number is small (though unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 When the second special winning opening 35 is reached, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening 35 if the second special winning opening 35 is in the open state.

Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The high-probability low-base state is a low-base state, but since the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting to the right. When a right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy low-base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and the determination of whether or not to open the second starting opening 21 (ordinary symbol hit determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time (3 seconds) compared to the high base state, and the probability per ordinary symbol is about half that of the high base state ( Since 120/240) is set, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting opening 21 is opened after a short time (3 seconds) after the game ball passes through the gate. Becomes Since the probability of hitting is about 1/2, hits and misses occur about half and half.

That is, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the normal symbol winning/absence determination is executed, and when the normal symbol fluctuates and is displayed, after the game ball passing through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting opening 21, the second The starting port 21 is opened. Also, the opening time of the second starting opening 21 is set to 0.9 seconds and opened three times (the closing time between opening is 0.1 seconds), so long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting opening 21 is It is closed during the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds, and when it hits, then it is opened three times for 0.9 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds again. Looking at an example in which the hit and the off occur alternately, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opened 3 times for 0.9 seconds, and the normal symbol for 3 seconds It will be closed during the fluctuation time, will be disengaged, and will be closed during the normal pattern fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and the cycle will be repeated (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → approximately 2.7 seconds open →...).

Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a highly accurate low base state, the second starting opening 21 will be in the open state for about 30% and the closed state for about 70%. .. Therefore, in the highly accurate low base state, as compared with the high base state in which the second starting opening 21 is open for about 90% and the closed state is about 10%, the second starting It is highly possible that the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the mouth 21 will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 without entering the second starting opening 21. .. In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, whether it is a high base state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state) or high accurate low base state Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the game state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit determination that is executed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, the small special hit only in the result of the second special symbol hit determination that is performed in the right-handed game ing.

As described above, in the high accurate low base state, about 70% of the game balls flowing down the right game area (flowing down to the second starting opening 21) enter the second starting opening 21. Without flowing, it flows down to the second special winning opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21. Thereby, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in the opening/closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Specifically, the opening operation for 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (closing time between opening operations is 0.1 seconds, total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in the open state, 2 Enter the ball into the starting port 21, and if the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flow down to the second big winning port 35, and a small hit game To enter the second special winning opening 35 in the open state.

Since the prize balls based on the balls entering the second special winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each single winning, the second special winning opening 35 is entered during the small hit game. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the number of balls to be held during the high-accuracy low-base state. Further, the high-probability low base state, at least, until the next big hit occurs by the special symbol hit determination (as long as the right-handed game is continued, only the second special symbol hit determination) is executed, high-precision low base state As the game continues for a long time, the player can increase the number of balls he holds. In the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain an average of about 20 prize balls (2 balls entered) by the occurrence of one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (a large number of times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 balls in 10 times). Further, as a result, the total number of balls to be won in the "Renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued can be added to the number of balls to win the small hit game in addition to the ball to win the big hit game, so that a larger number of game balls can be acquired. Further, this makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (only for big hits) and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream (the most downstream of these) from the second starting opening 21 are for small hits ( It is said to be a big prize hole for small hits only). In addition, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening/closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big opening. It is possible to control the number (ratio) of game balls that reach the winning opening 35. Specifically, by the opening/closing control of the second starting opening 21 (the time to be in the open state, the variation time of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the regular symbol judgment), when the small hit game is executed, the high base state ( The probability of a game ball entering the second special winning opening 35 is higher in the high accuracy low base state than in the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state). In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second special winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering a ball), 2 The effect of opening/closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

In addition, by this, even in the same right-handed game, while holding the game ball in the second starting port 21 and holding the ball almost (including slightly increasing or slightly decreasing) (or suppressing the speed of ball reduction) While), the state of playing with a expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (high base state), and a small ball with a game ball in the second starting opening 21. When a hit occurs, while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second special winning opening 35, the state of playing with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol win/fail judgment will be a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (high accuracy low Base state), and has a variety of playability. Further, this makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that, for the player, a game state in which the highly accurate low base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high base state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a high-precision high base state, in the high-precision high base state, a variation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) When the big hit does not occur until the display ends, the gaming state is supposed to change to the high-accuracy low base state. In addition, when the game state after the big hit game is set to the high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is the low-probability-high base state or the high-probability-high base state in the effect symbol display section. The game effect is executed in such a display mode. As a result, even if the gaming state after the big hit game is not in the high-accuracy low base state but in the high-base state, after that, it changes to the high-precision low base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It becomes possible to expect and play a game. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the entertainment of the game for a long time.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are "2R fifth big hit" and "2R sixth big hit" as types of big hits that shift from the high-precision high base state to the high-precision low base state. "2R 5th big hit" transitions from the high-precision high base state to the high-precision low base state after 50 variations of the special symbol display, and "2R 6th big jackpot" shows 100 variations of the special symbol. After passing, the high-accuracy high base state is changed to the high-accuracy low base state. In addition, "2R seventh big hit" and "2R eighth big hit" are provided as the highly accurate low base state. "2R 7th big hit" is a 50th special symbol variation display, after transitioning from low-probability high base state to low-probability low base state (normal state), "2R 8th big jackpot" is 100 times special When the variable display of the symbols is passed, the low accurate high base state is changed to the low accurate low base state (normal state). In this embodiment, the big hit game and the big hit game related to the four big hit types of "2R fifth big hit", "2R sixth big hit", "2R seventh big hit", and "2R eighth big hit" and big hit games. By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state the game state is. In other words, the gaming state is a non-notification state.

In the present embodiment, the distribution ratio (occurrence rate) of these “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” that are in the non-notification state is 50 times. If the high base state (non-alarm state) continues even after lapse of, it is more likely than when the high base state ends in 50 times, to transition to the high-accuracy low base state at 100 times. It is supposed to do. As a result, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low base state after 50 times, and when the high-base state continues without transitioning to the high-accuracy low base state after 50 times ( Even in the case where the non-reporting state continues), it is possible to further increase the expectation of the highly accurate low base state. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the enjoyment of the game for a long time.

Note that, instead of such an aspect, even if the transition is made 50 times or 100 times, the possibility of transitioning to the highly accurate low base state is set to be the same. On the contrary, the possibility of shifting to the high-accuracy low base state may be higher in the case of shifting 50 times than in the case of shifting 100 times. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, the expectation for the transition to the highly accurate low base state will be reduced. In addition, if another jackpot type is provided and the high base state continues even after the variable display of the special symbol for the first predetermined number of times has passed, after the second predetermined number of times larger than the first predetermined number of times ( You may decide to move to a high-accuracy low-base state (unless you hit the jackpot by then). On the other hand, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of times the variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, after the second predetermined number of times larger than the first predetermined number of times (if it is a big hit by then It may be decided not to shift to the high-accuracy low base state (unless). In addition, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is established in the middle of the non-notification state of the high base state, the game is displayed by displaying a character or a character that makes it easy for the player to recognize the game state (executes a finalized effect). You may notify a state.

Also, in the high-accuracy low base state, the result of the second special symbol hit determination, if the big hit, and if it is out, the result of the second special symbol hit determination in the high base state described above It is the same as when it is a big hit and when it is out.

Further, the start gate 29 is also provided in the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed to the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing and the jackpot game is started without being blocked by the second starting opening 21 and the like from passing through the start gate 29. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first big winning opening 30, the second It is required to be provided upstream of the starting opening 21 and the second special winning opening 35.

Further, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lighting-controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game area should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lighting-controlled (display-controlled) in a predetermined manner to inform that the left-handed game area should be fired. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the firing direction by turning on the LED according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y□z□" (for example, □: lights off, ■: lights up), it is possible to inform that the left game area should be fired. it can. Also, in the high base state, it is possible to inform that the right game area should be launched as a display mode for turning on both LEDs, such as "y■z■" (for example, □: extinguished, ■: lit). it can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed is "low accurate low base state", "high accurate low base state", " It is possible to control to either "low accurate high base state" or "high accurate high base state". Among them, the low accurate low base state is also called "normal game state", and the high accurate low base state is Also referred to as "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main controller) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Also, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the ordinary symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special symbol 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". Sometimes called "2" or "2nd special map".

Next to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 is updated by adding 1. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of 4 msec, for example. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, until the interrupt process (S105) is started next, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. To be executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), first, the output process (S201) is executed. In the output processing (S201), the commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each processing described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. The commands and the like output here include the game state, the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, the symbol as the jackpot type, the information regarding the variation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first big winning port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The detection signals detected by 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as winning ball information. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball receiving plate 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

Next, the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is similar to the ordinary symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. It is performed both during the period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), a starting opening sensor detection process (S204), a starting ball entry process (S205), a universal figure operation process (S206), and a special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power interruption monitoring processing (S210). After that, other various processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting sensor detection process]
Next, the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of ordinary symbol holding balls (the number of ordinary figure holdings, specifically, the number of the holdings of ordinary figures provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not (value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, in S301, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbol holding balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol holding balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored number of normal symbol holding balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number obtaining process (S304) is performed. And proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the obtained random number value (acquisition information, general figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reservation balls in the general figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting opening 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a (S305). When it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of the first special figure reserved, specifically, the main controller 80) It is determined whether or not the number of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the RAM has reached 4 (the upper limit number) (S306). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special map 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special map 1 reserved balls (S307), and special figure 1 related random number acquisition Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

In the special figure 1 relation random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (label-TRND-A), the big hit type determination random number The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7A), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special information) are acquired. (Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 1 balls in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 21 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special ball 2 reserved balls (the number of second special map reserved, specifically, the main control) It is determined whether or not the number of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S310). Then, in S310, when it is determined that the number of special sphere 2 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process is ended. When it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of special figure 2 reserved balls (S311), and the special figure 2 relationship A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

In the special figure 2 relational random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 1 relational random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol winning/discarding determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determining random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). The random number value) and the obtained random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current special figure 2 holding sphere number in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b.

[Processing when starting the ball]
Next, the starting ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting entrance time detection process (S205) after the starting mouth sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entering process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by "1" (S315). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number in S307 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) in the immediately preceding starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the second special figure pending storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, of the read random number values, the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (random value for special symbol validity determination) is a big hit depending on the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state) Whether or not it is out (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of big hit is further determined (preliminary judgment). The determination (preliminary determination) in S317 is a prior determination (a so-called "holding prefetching") in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (the determination of whether or not it is a big hit) is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is determined. )).

It should be noted that the pre-judgment of whether or not it is a big hit is a big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a big hit judgment table for a high probability state if it is a high probability state, or a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) And a fluctuation pattern information determination table of. Then, in the preliminary determination, based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining the special symbol) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state, predetermined variation pattern information is selected. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not it is a big hit, a big hit type, whether or not a game effect with a high jackpot reliability is executed.

Next, in S318, game information related to the result of the determination in S317 (preliminary determination information), specifically, information indicating whether or not the special symbol validity determination random number value and the big hit determination value (big hit information), Information (big hit type information) indicating the value of the random number counter for big hit type determination (random number value for big hit type determination), information indicating whether or not the random number value for special symbol validity determination matches the small hit determination value (small hit information ), command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random value) and the like are generated as a special figure 2 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). Incidentally, as the special figure 2 start ball entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read out in S316 may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted. May not be transmitted as it is, but the game information (for example, the above-described variation pattern information or the like) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether or not it is information about a big hit, what kind of big hit type, and information about a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is any. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering ball command, whether or not the obtained special figure 2 acquisition random number is a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, It is possible to specify whether or not to be a big hit when judged by the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start-up ball input command as a hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the result is low probability. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect holding information which is determined to be a big hit is stored.

In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for special symbol validity determination out of the acquired random number value read in S316 is not transmitted to the sub control unit as it is, and the value of the other random number counter for determining the jackpot type (big hit Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), and the information indicating the result of the preliminary determination is generated as the special figure 2 start-up ball input command. Can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” as in the case of the above-mentioned special diagram 2 (S319). Then, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends. The processes of S321 to S323 are the same as those of S316 to S318 described above with respect to Toku-zu 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first special figure reserved storage unit is read (S321), Preliminary determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 1 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The pre-determination (holding prefetching) in S322 is performed prior to the success/failure determination in the special figure 1 success/failure determination processing described later.

[Public motion processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal figure operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the starting ball entry process (S205). In the universal figure operation process (S206), the process relating to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and the "universal diagram action status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. When the "universal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "universal figure operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S, YES in S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) is performed, and if the "general pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401 and S403, YES in S405), normal symbol determination If the "universal figure operation status" is "4" (S401, S403, S405 are all NO), the normal electric auditor product processing (S407) is performed. Note that the normal operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol waiting process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined to be "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process To finish. On the other hand, in S501, when it is determined that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol winning/discarding determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8D, if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is usually 1 second. Select a pattern variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern in which the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), a normal symbol random number shift process described later is performed (S504), then a normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol fluctuation start process (S505), the normal symbol fluctuation display is started in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol variation start processing, in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the variation start of the normal symbol, a normal symbol variation start command is set.

[Normal symbol judgment process]
Next, the normal symbol validity determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol appropriateness determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol appropriateness determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the universal symbol reservation storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the high base state (the low certainty high base state or the high certainty high base state) (S602). In S602, if the state B flag is ON, that is, if it is determined to be in a high base state (YES in S602), a table for state B (hit determination in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8C) It is determined whether or not it is a hit by the high-probability universal figure hit determination based on the values "0" to "238") (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, if the state B flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined to be in a low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) in the normal symbol hitting determination table shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not there is a hit by the low-probability universal figure hit determination based on the table for use (hit determination value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of general/universal figure hit determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), stop display is displayed. The normal pattern (outside the normal pattern) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S605 that the hit (general figure hit) is determined (YES in S605), the hit ordinary symbol to be stopped and displayed (general figure hit symbol) is determined (S607) and the universal figure hit flag is turned on (S608 ), processing is completed.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift processing (S504), first, the normal symbol holding sphere number is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each of the universal figure reservations in the universal figure reservation storage unit is shifted to the side where the current position is read (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order pending storage in the universal figure pending storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth pending figure pending is cleared to 0 (S703). ), processing is completed. In this way, the universal figure hold is digested in the hold order.

[Normal symbol fluctuation process]
Next, the normal symbol changing process (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol variation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at a display result (a hitting ordinary symbol or a deviation ordinary symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for determining whether or not the symbol is normal (S804) is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the universal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the universal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the universal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the universal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is set as the opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (the second starting opening 21). (S903), the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the variable winning device 22 (second starting opening 21) is opened as the opening pattern for state A and state C (for low base state). A pattern is set (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second opening opening counter. In S904, the universal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the universal figure end flag is ON (S1001). The universal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting opening 21 is ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the universal figure end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003), and it is determined that the open time is not reached. If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is the opening timing of the second starting port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting opening 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting opening 21 (that is, after opening the second starting opening 21 in advance. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed (S1005), and when it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the second start opening (NO in S1005), the process ends. When it is determined in S1005 that it is the closing timing of the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing the second starting port 21 (closed) is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second opening opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is ended to open the second starting opening 21 again. On the other hand, in S1008, when it is determined that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), the universal figure ending process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the universal figure ending flag is set ( (S1010), and the process ends. Incidentally, the second starting opening opening counter becomes “0” when the second starting opening 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times during the state B (high base state), and the state A Also, during the state C (low base state), if the second starting opening 21 is opened three times, it becomes "0". On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the universal figure end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting opening 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. , The universal figure hit end flag is turned off (S1011), the universal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the universal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is ended. As a result, in the next interruption process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be executed again as the normal pattern operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 operation processing (S207) subsequent to the normal figure operation processing (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process relating to the special symbol display section 41 and the special winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, “Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each of these stages. And, when "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) is performed, and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "2" Is (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), special symbol 1 variation process (S1104) is performed, and if "Special map 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in S1101, S1103, YES in S1105) ), special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is performed, and if "special diagram 1 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric as a big hit game When the accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the processing ends. The special figure 1 operation status is “1” by default. Also, since the small hit is not set as a result of the first special symbol hit determination, the special electric auditors product processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as a result of the first special symbol hit determination You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric auditors product processing 2 as the small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 waiting process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of holding balls of the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of holding balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is “0”, that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 (YES in S1201), , It is determined whether or not the special map 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, in S1207, when it is determined that the special map 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process is ended. On the other hand, in S1207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), it is in the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a standby screen (during execution of a demo screen for waiting for customers). It is determined whether or not (S1208), and when it is determined that the standby screen is being displayed (YES in S1208), the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

In addition, in S1201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is not “0”, that is, there is at least one memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 (in S1201 NO), the special figure 1 validity determination processing (S1203), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204), the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), and the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206), which will be described later, are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in game" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to Toku-zu 2 are not executed.

[Special figure 1 Pass/Fail judgment process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) will be described. In the special figure 1 hit/absence judgment processing (S1203), first, as a judgment value, it is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure pending storage unit 85a of RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure pending first). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol validity determination random number counter (the oldest memory) that has been read is read (S1601). Next, whether or not the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit is determined (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is performing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of whether or not the other special symbol is a big hit, it is not judged whether it is a big hit, or a small hit or It is considered to be one of the misses (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit determination performed during that period, Everything is out. In S1602, the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not performing variation display related to big hits (NO in S1602), then whether the probability variation flag is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not there is a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the probability is low (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) The win/no-judgment is performed based on the table (the jackpot determination values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit/miss determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high-probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is a "big hit" (S1606). AS) is read, the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), and the big hit symbol is determined based on the value of the big hit type determining random number (S1609). Figure 1 The big hit variation flag is turned on (S1610), and the process ends. In addition, in the case of the hit determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol is used. The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the jackpot type. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the hit determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1), one of the 4R first big hit and the 4R second big hit is executed. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit in the hit determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2), 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, 2R Any of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8(B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not the “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, a deviation symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit variation flag, a first big hit variation flag indicating that the first special symbol is performing a variation display related to the big hit (variable display in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed). And, the second special symbol has a second big hit variation flag indicating that the variation display related to the big hit (variation display that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed, and the main control unit 80. The corresponding flag is set in the big hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM. Further, as the small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a variation display related to the small hit (variable display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), The flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 is set. Then, for one special symbol, if the big hit variation flag is set (that is, during the variation display related to the big hit), in the other special symbol hit determination, the process of determining whether or not a big hit Not performed. That is, control such that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the big hit in parallel is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in an extremely short time, and the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22 ), after the special symbol 1 hit determination process (S1203), the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the state A (whether or not it is a low-probability low base state) (S1701). When it is determined in S1701 that the state is state A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether or not the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1702), and the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referenced with reference to the state A big hit table (the portion corresponding to state A and big hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different variation time lengths is selected according to the state A big hit table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of retained balls (reserved number) is 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holdings is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first holding number deviation table (state A and deviation and holding number in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) 1 and 2), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holdings is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holdings is 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second holding number deviation table (Fig. In the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state A, the state A, and the numbers corresponding to the numbers 3 and 4 to be held.

As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". The variation pattern is more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls is activated, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

Further, in S1701, if it is determined that the game state is not state A (low accurate low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the game state is state B (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state) Is determined (S1708). In S1708, when it is determined that the state B (S1708), then it is determined whether the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1709), and it is determined that the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is ON ( (YES in S1709), referring to the state B big hit table (the portion corresponding to state B and big hit in the change pattern table shown in FIG. 9), change based on the change pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). When it is determined in S1709 that the Toku-zu 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), the state B deviation table (the portion corresponding to status B and deviation in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

Further, in S1708, if the game state is not state B (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state), that is, if the game state is state C (high accurate low base state) (NO in S1708) Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1712), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the big hit in the variation pattern table shown (S1710). When it is determined in S1712 that the Toku-zu 1 jackpot variation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), the state C deviation table (the portion corresponding to state C and deviation in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

Incidentally, in the state B and the state C, since the game is performed mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first Fluctuating display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol in the states B and C is simple (the number of types is small and the variation time is short). In the state B, the variation pattern P15 is set for a big hit, and the variation pattern P16 is set for a big hit. Further, in the state C, a variation pattern P23 is set for a big hit, and a variation pattern P24 is set for a big hit.

After the variation pattern is selected as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. Incidentally, in the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in the variation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), first, the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is set to the next lower level (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a includes an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003"). , To the address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends. After the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) is executed, the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), while setting the special figure 1 operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 variation process (S1104), first, the variation time of the Toku-zu 1 (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation interruption process is performed (S1914), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON (S1905). In S1904, when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of times the special symbol changes during state B (high base state) Is decremented by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the status B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low accurate high base state, the low accurate low base state (normal state) is entered, and if it is a high accurate high base state, the high accurate low base state (advantageous state) is entered.

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variable display of the special symbol is stopped with a result according to the determination result of the special symbol right/wrong determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number, etc. Is performed (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) is displaying variation when the big hit game or the small hit game according to special figure 2 is executed during the variation display of special figure 1. Is a process of temporarily interrupting the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game ends. As a result, while the big hit game or the small hit game relating to one special symbol is being executed, the hit determination processing and the variable display relating to the other special symbol are not executed.

The special figure 1 variation interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). In S2902, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, if the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON in S2909 (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned on (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is interrupted (S2904), and the processing is ended. As a result, the variable display of Toku-zu 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in S2901, the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is already suspended (YES in S2901), whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON or not. Is determined (S2905). In S2905, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big hit game according to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). In S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game according to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is ended. On the other hand, in S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game according to special figure 2 is finished, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to restart the suspended variable display of the first special symbol (time measurement of the variable time).

Here, in the present Example 1, as an interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol A flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80, which has a special figure 2 interruption flag (also called “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display is being interrupted. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit variation flag indicating that the big hit variation related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), the first The special figure 1 big hit flag which shows execution of the big hit game which relates to the special design is turned on (S2003), it moves to the processing of S2004. Thereby, in the special figure 1, it is possible to indicate that the variable display related to the big hit is ended (the big hit is confirmed) and the big hit game is started.

In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening one round once, from the opening of the special winning opening to the closing) is set to "4". (S2004), in order to start the big hit game, the big hit opening command is set (S2005), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the processing ends. Further, at the stop timing of the special symbols that are displayed in a variable manner, a stop command is transmitted to the sub control board 90. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can recognize that the variable display of the special symbol has ended. By this, the big hit standby state is set. Further, in S2001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the variation display related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as a big hit flag, the result of the hit determination relating to the first special symbol is a big hit, and a special figure 1 big hit flag indicating that the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed (“the first big hit”. Also called "flag"), and a special figure 2 big hit flag (also called "second big hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit determination relating to the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. When the big hit game is executed, the big hit flag corresponding to the big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, the result of the hit determination relating to the second special symbol is a small hit, and a special figure 2 small hit flag indicating that the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed (also called "small hit flag") When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs of a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 4R first big hit, a display mode such as “2RΔ4R▲15RΔ” (for example, ∘: turned on, Δ: turned off) is displayed. Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206), etc., the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by the special symbol 1 operation process and the special symbol 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold (“Variable display of the 1st special symbol and variable display of the 2nd special symbol”, “1st special symbol right/wrong judgment and 2nd special symbol It is said that it is possible to execute the judgment of "whether it is true or not" in parallel. In addition, in the first embodiment, the judgment of success or failure based on the ball entering the second starting opening (the second special symbol judgment) is based on the entrance of the ball into the first starting opening (first special symbol winning or failing). It is more likely that the player will be a big hit with a large profit (the amount of profit that can be acquired is larger) than that of the judgment (FIG. 8B).

As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process relating to the special symbol display section 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each of these stages. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2" (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), special symbol 2 during change process (S1154), if the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1151, S1153, YES in S1155) ), special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is performed, and if "special diagram 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), special electric as a big hit game When the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special map 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), special electric character processing as a small hit game Perform 2 (S1109). The special figure 2 operation status is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric auditors product process 2 (S1109) not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric auditors product process 1 (S1108) is common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric auditors product process 2 (S1109) is Only the special figure 2 operation process (S211) is performed. This, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the big hit game and the first special symbol This is because the big hit game related to the two special symbols cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol hit determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol hit determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is to be performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 Pass/Fail judgment process]
The special figure 2 hit/miss judgment processing (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit/miss judgment processing (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this processing is processing relating to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) The stored special symbol right/wrong random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read. In addition, because it has a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit determination, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit determination It is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit variation flag is turned on (S1307), and the process is ended. The other processes are the same as those of the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process relating to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) To select the fluctuation pattern. Also, since the result of the second special symbol hit determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the gaming state.

In addition, in the state B and the state C, the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol winning/absence determination). Therefore, in the state B and the state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation patterns of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a variation pattern of a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is performed mainly on the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol hit determination). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (there are few types and the time is short).

In this special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processing (S1404) is performed and this processing is ended. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in the variation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved sphere count is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted down by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation fourth. The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends. After the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start processing (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", and the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. To do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during fluctuation]
In the special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36, the process (S1951 to S1959) is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 variation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28 (S2951 to S2959). Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs the process (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process relating to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is a big hit type (round counter setting process) or a special symbol 2 small hit variation flag. Although the processing when it is determined to be ON is different, it is as shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric auditors product processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors product process 1 (S1108), first, a big hit game start process described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that is turned on when the player shoots a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing in the big hit waiting state and passes the game ball to the start gate 29. .. After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped with the big hit symbol and becomes a big hit, the big hit start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the big hit game progresses (the round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the gaming machine is kept in the big hit waiting state capable of executing the big hit. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a rest such as a restroom, a drink, and a telephone call. Then, after the break, the player can shoot a game ball at an arbitrary timing and let the game ball pass through the start gate 29 to advance the big hit game. Further, the big hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) in the big hit game is all finished (the big hit game is finished).

When it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), it is then determined whether or not the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not opening. When (NO in S2104), it is time to open the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, has it reached the time to start the first round after passing through the start gate 29? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has passed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the time to start the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2105 that it is the round start time (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a special winning opening process is performed (S2107), and the process is ended. Thereby, the 1st special winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (refer to Drawing 6) according to the kind of big hit.

If it is determined in S2104 that the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the maximum number of winnings in the special winning opening in the round is the specified maximum winning number (this implementation). In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round) (S2111). If it is determined that the prescribed number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then it is time to close the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30), that is, the big winning opening. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the special winning opening time has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, in S2111, when it is determined that the specified number of entered balls (10) is reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round ending conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process is ended to start the next round.

On the other hand, in S2115, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period is set. Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is ended. When it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), the final round is over, and then it is determined whether the jackpot ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2119, when it is determined that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is completed.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start processing (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the jackpot game start processing (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not passed in the jackpot waiting state. In the case (NO in S2151), next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2152), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102), and S2154 is set. Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). When it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. .. That is, while the big hit game is being executed, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the big hit game (round game) is started in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

If it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. If it is determined that the state B flag is not ON in S2154 (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning the state B flag OFF. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156). The jackpot start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the big hit standby state. If it is determined in S2151 that the big hit start flag is ON, that is, if the big hit game has already been started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (progress) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game that has ended this time is related to the probability variation big hit (S2201). In the present embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit are set as the probability varying big hits, and in S2201, a big hit game. Is determined to correspond to any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that this is the probability variation big hit (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned on (S2202), and then it is determined whether the completed bonus game is the 2R fifth jackpot (S2203). .. In S2203, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the big hit game is finished, and the high accurate high base state is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is not the 2R fifth big hit (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (S2209). In S2209, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned on (S2210), "100" is set to the state B counter (S2211), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 100 times after the big hit game ends, and the high accurate high base state is set. In S2209, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is not the 2R sixth big hit, that is, the 4R first big hit, the 15R third big hit, or the 4R fourth big hit (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. The process is finished as it is. As a result, the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished becomes a highly accurate low base state.

In S2201, when it is determined that it is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low-probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then the jackpot game that has ended is a 2R seventh jackpot. Is determined (S2206). In S2206, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is the 2R seventh big hit (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 100 times after the big hit game ends, and the low certainty high base state is set. On the other hand, in S2206, when it is determined that the jackpot game that has ended is not the 2R seventh jackpot, that is, the 4R second jackpot or the 2R eighth jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is set to ON (S2204), the state "50" is set to the B counter (S2205), and the process is completed. As a result, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the big hit game is over, and the low accurate high base state is set.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game that occurred this time is a special symbol. If it is determined to be related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special map 1 big hit flag is turned off (S3002), the special map 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is ended. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the big hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001 ), the special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is ended. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric auditors product processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric auditors product processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit completion flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (the second big winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is open (S2302). When it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or it is time to start the next opening operation after the time of the interval between a plurality of opening operations has elapsed (S2303). .. Incidentally, for the small hit game, regardless of the passage of the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol is displayed. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in S2303, when it is determined that it is time to open the special winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second special winning opening 35 is performed according to the opening pattern of the small hit (see FIG. 6) (S2304), and the processing is performed. To finish. When it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the six opening operations, that is, six times. It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the prescribed number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the special winning opening, that is, a predetermined opening after opening the special winning opening It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). If it is determined in S2307 that the special winning opening time has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number of entered balls (10) (YES in S2306), the special winning opening (second prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the processing shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, in S2307, when it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. The value is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit open counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is ended as it is to start the next open operation.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hitting open counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the process shifts to the small hitting end processing of S2311. In S2311, as a small hit ending process to end the small hit game, set the ending command of the small hit (S2311), start the ending period of the small hit (S2312), set the small hit end flag (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

If it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation has been completed six times (or a prescribed number of game balls have entered), It is determined whether or not the ending time for the small hit has elapsed (S2315), and when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), special figure operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is ended. By generating a small hit game in a highly accurate low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. Incidentally, at the start of the small hitting game, the probability variation flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the small hit game is executed.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is executed. Finish. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation process. On the other hand, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the small hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101) ), the special figure 2 small hit flag is turned off (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process ends. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved figure number processing (S209) subsequent to the special figure 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved sphere number process (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number and the normal symbol reserved sphere number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for transmitting the information on the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process ends.

[Power interruption monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) subsequent to the number of reserved balls (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is input (S2601), and if it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probable change, whether it is a winning game or not, some reserve balls, Data regarding the remaining number of fluctuations is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter, loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with the above-described characteristic configuration, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a unique effect which is not present in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or compared to the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the special symbol hit determination (first special symbol (also referred to as "first identification information") or second special symbol (also referred to as "second identification information"). Based on the jackpot pattern (also referred to as "specific display mode"), a high probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and a high probability state is established when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied ( Benefits) will end.

The process (game state setting process (S2121)) of giving this high-probability state (privilege) can also be referred to as "privilege giving means". In addition, the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variable display and the stop display are performed, so that the same result determination result is shown. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol" can be replaced with "The effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". ..

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counter, flag, status, buffer, timer and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes a program for sub control main processing shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, first, CPU initialization processing is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the content of the RAM is not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. When the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When it is turned on, the data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, the data related to the performance control when the power is cut off such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, when the power is turned on after the power is cut off due to a power failure (when the power is restored), the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003). The state of is restored to the state before the power failure.

In S4004, interrupts are disabled. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update processing (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. The random number for effect determination, the random number for variable effect determination that determines the mode of the effect pattern game effect (variable effect pattern) to be executed, the random number for predictor effect determination that determines the notice effect, and the effect symbol determination that determines the effect symbol There are random numbers. The method of updating the random number can be the same as the method of updating the random number performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random number values may not be added one by one, but two by two. The random number for effect determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. The timing is, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) for notifying that there is a start ball entry from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying start of variation from the main control board 80). When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when a variation effect pattern to be described later is determined, this can be done. The storage location of the obtained random number for effect determination is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board. It transmits to the control board which becomes a corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) in accordance with the received command. (Demonstration symbol game effect, special game effect related to the winning game, etc.) is executed. The production control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits interruption (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Further, it becomes possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of the movable decorative member, audio output control from the speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the production control microcomputer 91. A determination is made (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the processing is ended. .. The reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed prior to the other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse of 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Then, lamp data output processing (S4202) for outputting lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and drive data for driving the movable decoration member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and the driving data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process of storing the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process is performed (S4303), and the switch stored by the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number is executed (S4305).

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described using FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start-ball entry command is received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start-ball entry command is not received (NO in S4401). , S4403, and if it is determined that the start ball entry command has been received (YES in S4401), effect holding information storage processing (S4402) is performed, and processing proceeds to S4403. The production hold information storage processing (S4402) is performed by various information (preliminary determination result, jackpot type determination randomness) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4401. Numerical value, game information such as fluctuation pattern random value), depending on the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the start/end command transmission/reception (when command is generated) special symbol holding balls , Is stored in a predetermined effect holding information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, when the received starting ball entering command is the special figure 1 starting ball entering command corresponding to the number of reserved balls “4” in the special figure 1, the pre-determination result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball entering command. Such information is stored as special figure 1 effect hold information in an area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect holding information thus stored is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The stored contents (effect holding information) of the effect holding information storage area in the sub-control board 90 is the special figure holding storage section (first special figure holding storage section, second special drawing) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is the same as the stored content (acquired information) in the hold storage unit). From this, the effect hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be said to be "acquired information storage means".

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the variation start command is received (YES in S4403), a variation effect start process described later ( S4404) is performed, the process proceeds to S4405, and when it is determined that the variation start command is not received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the variation stop command is received (YES in S4405), the effect design is stopped and displayed to produce a variation effect. A variable effect ending process for ending is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end processing (S4406), the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed, and a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is performed to end the variable effect (effect symbol game effect). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation effect ending process. The variable effect refers to various effects that are performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

Succeedingly, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game-related command is received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, starts the big hit game (occurrence of big hit). ) Opening command sent at the time of, a round start command sent at the start of the round, a round end command sent at the end of the round, an ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big winning opening in the round game The first big winning opening entrance command transmitted based on the entry into 30 and the second big winning opening entrance command transmitted based on entering into the second big winning opening in the small hit game are applicable. .. In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands is received. If not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). , Processing related to execution of effects (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is Set the round effect command that specifies the round effect according to the round specified based on the sub output buffer, and if it is the ending command, the ending effect that specifies the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a special winning opening ball entering command (first big winning opening entering command, second special winning opening entering command), the special winning opening specified based on the command (first big winning opening) The entrance effect command for designating the entrance effect corresponding to the entrance into the mouth 30 and the second special winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When these various effect commands related to the hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101, the opening effect and the round according to the progress of the hit game. An effect, a ball entry effect, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command or a normal symbol variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variation effect start processing]
Next, the variable effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation effect start process (S4402), first, an effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to obtain various effect determination random numbers such as a variable effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, and an effect pattern determination random number. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquisition information), the mode of the effect design game effect (variation effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence or absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information that designates a variation pattern) that designates the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, in the variation pattern designation command, variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, game state information that designates the current game state, and determination of the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination The result and the symbol information for designating the jackpot type are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since the variation pattern designation command includes one corresponding to the first special symbol and one corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect design game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the effect mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the effect mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the effect mode C, and the mode status "4". It corresponds to the effect mode D, and the mode status “5” corresponds to the effect mode E. By referring to the current mode status, the current effect mode can be specified.

Here, the effect mode is a mode of effect mainly on the image display device 7. When the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as the mode of the effect design 8 (for example, a pattern design, a number design, etc.), the appearing characters, items, background images, etc. To be different. In addition, the production design game production can also be executed in a mode according to the production mode, and when a plurality of game productions (such as notice production and reach production) are provided, different game productions can be executed depending on the production mode. Can be In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when being controlled to the low accurate low base state, and the effect modes C and D are executed when being controlled to the high accurate low base state, and the effect mode E. Is executed when controlled to the low accurate high base state and when controlled to the high accurate high base state. Therefore, when the production mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the production mode to know whether the current game state is the low-probability low base state or the high-probability low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, it is difficult to know whether the current game state is the low-probability-high base state or the high-probability-high base state. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the sub-control unit 90 mainly controls the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern). A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a game effect) and a notice effect determination table are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the change effect pattern determination table and the notice effect determination table to be used are set. .. That is, a plurality of variation effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of notice effect determination tables are provided, from which a predetermined variation effect pattern determination table and notice effect determination table are set based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), the variation production pattern determination table is the big hit time corresponding to the current production mode. The variation effect pattern determination table and the notice effect determination table are set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation mode of the effect symbol, etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) ( (Not shown) is stored in advance in the ROM of the sub control board 90. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from the variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the variation effect determination random number acquired in S4501, and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern that matches the designated variation pattern is selected and set (( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach effect effect symbol game effect), or when the character effect performed using a specific character is performed (character effect pattern game effect), reach effect or character The case where the effect is not executed (reach non-effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, the reach effect is, for example, that all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet) as the display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit. When a mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop displays (temporary stop display) with a pattern (the same effect pattern) that constitutes the big hit mode. ), and in the state where the remaining one continues the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one production symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol (three identical demonstration symbols) that completes the big hit mode. Refers to the production. At this time, the game effect is executed by using a predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, whether or not the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show by the production of. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in S4505, based on the effect symbol determination random number acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop effect symbol") is determined and set. The effect design 8 which is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect design game effect is the result of the special symbol hit determination being out of position, and in the case of reach out, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" Among them, one effect design is different from other effect patterns, and when there is no reach, at least one effect symbol out of three effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is different from other effect patterns. It is considered that the production pattern is different

Further, in S4506, the notice effect executed along with the variable effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, this is also referred to as an effect design game effect including the notice effect to be executed. This notice production shows the possibility that the result of the production design game production being executed is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, before the production design is stopped and displayed (confirmed stop display) (during the variation display of the production design). Notification effect). In S4506, based on the preview effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the preview effect determination table set in S4504, a preview effect that matches the specified fluctuation pattern and the determined fluctuation effect pattern is selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( (S4507), the variable effect start process ends. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 causes the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in step 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and variation effect and the like based on the read image data are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moreover, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the effect design game effect (variation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect design 8 is started on the display screen 7a. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, an effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) is configured.

As for the variable display of the effect design 8, the symbols are vertically scrolled in the order of “1”→“2”→“3”...→“7”→“8”→“9” (ascending order) ( (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" again and the vertical scrolling is repeated. The manner of variable display of the effect symbols 8 is determined by the variable effect patterns stored in the above-described variable effect pattern determination table. Therefore, in addition to the vertical scrolling, for example, the scrolling display in the horizontal direction (horizontal scrolling), and the switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling are available as the variable display modes. It is possible to provide the aspect as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses, but in the present embodiment, when the variation display is stopped It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop mode, (1) production symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), 8R (right symbol) stop order of each symbol (also called "stop order") is "left symbol" → Medium pattern → Right symbol" stop mode (also referred to as "first stop mode"), and (2) Stopping mode of each symbol is "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol" (" (Also referred to as "second stop mode"), and (3) all stop times (stop timing) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop") (also referred to as "third stop mode") And (4) the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same, and thereafter the middle symbol is supposed to stop (also referred to as “fourth stop mode”). These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variable display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection/determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection/determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is possible to separately process the selection/determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection/determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). In addition, the stop order of the first stop symbol is also called the "first stop symbol", the stop symbol of the second stop symbol is also called the "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol is the third stop symbol. That is also referred to as "third stop symbol" or "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly in the production mode C (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is "small. This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that it is “win”.

The second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) is mainly (1) production mode A, B (state A), the result of the first special symbol hit determination is "out" or "big hit" When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on that, (2) When the effect mode E (state B), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is "out" or "big hit" When the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as "reach variation") or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as "normal variation"), and (3) production mode C, In the case of D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by reach variation or normal variation based on that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “big hit”, This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped.

3rd stop mode (all symbols simultaneous stop), mainly in the (1) production mode A, B (state A), under the situation where the function of shortening fluctuation according to the special figure holding ball number works (when fluctuation starts) Special figure 1 The number of reserved balls is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol win/fail judgment is "out", and based on this, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is normally changed. , (2) When in the production mode E (state B), the variation display of the production symbol 8 is normally changed based on that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “small hit”. In the case (3) in the production modes C and D (state C), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being “out”, And (4) When the production mode D (state C), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination is "small hit", the variation display This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping.

Fourth stop mode (left/right symbol simultaneous stop→middle symbol) is mainly in the production mode D (state C), that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is “out” or “big hit” This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the reach change based on the stop.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped are provided according to the effect mode (game state) and the variable display mode based on the result of the special symbol right/wrong determination, and the result (stop display mode). Thus, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the game situation. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 that is subsequently displayed (derived display). It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it is executed, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and fuel the expectation for the special game thereafter.

In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, a stop mode in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol→left symbol→middle symbol” (fifth stop mode) ), or a stop mode in which the stop time of the left symbol and the middle symbol is substantially the same and the right symbol is stopped after that (sixth stop mode), etc., various stop modes can be provided, and each stop The conditions under which the mode is executed are not limited to those in this embodiment, and can be set in various ways.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of the symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the game state (production mode). Specifically, in the state A (production mode A, B), "7" of the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbol"), and other odd-numbered symbols "1", "3". , “5”, “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue”). It is also referred to as "design"). On the other hand, in the states B and C (rendering modes C, D, and E), "3", "5", and "7" of the odd-numbered symbols are red symbols, and the other odd-numbered symbols are "1" and "9". Is a green symbol, and even-numbered symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are blue symbols.

The correspondence relationship between the design and the color according to this embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondence relationships can be adopted, and the kind of color is not limited to this embodiment. , Other colors can be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but it can be determined by elements other than color. For example, a type of character when a character is attached to the effect design, and a numerical design in the case of having an effect design (character design) that represents a predetermined character in addition to the effect design (numeral design) that represents a number and Depending on the character design, the design type may be defined, and further, the design type may be defined simply by the odd design and the even design.

Variable display of the effect design 8 is performed, by the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect design 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-described stop mode, The result of the variable display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numerals), that is, "completely separated eyes" (such as "124"), and effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and the effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a symbol (number) different from the others, "Reach reach" ("343" etc.) ) Is a disengagement mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "Zoro eyes" ("777", etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are all the same are used as a big hit mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a big hit game of 4R or more (see FIG. 6). There is.

On the premise of such a basic symbol combination, in the present embodiment, the "reach rose" among the roses is also used for the 2R jackpot mode which is a trigger for executing the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). .. This is because the 2R big hit game has a smaller number of prize balls (the number of acquired prize balls) that the player can obtain compared to the 4R big hit game (4R big hit game, 15R big hit game), and the state C (high prize game). It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state) where it is more difficult to win a prize ball (increased balls) in a small hit game compared to the exact low base state, that is, for the player This is because the special game has a relatively low degree of profit (profit amount). In addition, "completely broken eyes" among the broken eyes are also used as a small hit mode that is a trigger for executing the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is open for most of the time as described above. Therefore, the small winning big winning opening (second winning port 21 located downstream of the second starting port 21 This is because it is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small win can bring a profit (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a miss). Furthermore, the "specific break" to be described later among the breaks is a small hit mode that is a trigger for executing the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high-accuracy low base state). Here, the small-hit mode (particularly unbalanced pattern) is also referred to as the "first display mode", and the large-hit mode (double-sided pattern) is also referred to as the "second display mode". Of the eyes), the reach-cleared eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and of the out-of-order modes (completely-cleared eye and reach-bare eye), the completely-barred eye is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

In addition, since the state A (low accurate low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol award judgment (variable display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. Yes, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol hit determination (variable display of the second special symbol) is rarely performed, so the second special symbol hit determination in such a situation When performed, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and only the variable display (and stop display) by the effect display device 102 is performed. There is. Similarly, the state B (high base state) and the state C (high-probability low base state) are game states that are basically right-handed games, so mainly the second special symbol hit determination (second special) Since the variable display of the symbol) is performed, it is rare that the first special symbol validity determination (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol, such a situation. When the first special symbol hit determination is made below, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable display by the effect display device 102 ( And stop display). However, if a special symbol hit determination against the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a "big hit" determination result is obtained (for example, the first special symbol hit determination in state C When it is a big hit), one or more display devices among the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect indicating that the big hit has occurred. To do. Thereby, while the production display (variation production) of the production symbol 8 corresponding to the current game state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the line is displayed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbols to be displayed is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player loses the opportunity to obtain a profit by stopping the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit.

[Game production in state A]
Next, a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low-probability low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state A is an effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) that is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, mainly based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination. As described above, in the state A, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect design game effect of the state A is performed under the situation where the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) according to a predetermined mode control condition. .. Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the effect mode in the state A.

Further, in the state A, as the effect symbols 8, "2", "4", "6", "8" symbols made of blue symbols and "1", "3", "5" made of green symbols, The symbol "9" and the symbol "7" consisting of red symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). To display each of these symbols, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Executed.

Based on such effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54(a)), the variable display is basically the second stop mode. (Left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) is stopped (see Fig. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)) When the function works (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), the vehicle is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54(g)). Here, when the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 54(f)), and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C) is displayed in a variable manner. The reach effect is executed by the image display device or the like until the stop. In the reach effect, mainly, the effect indicating whether or not the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the symbol previously stopped (whether or not the big hit mode is displayed) is developed. The same is true in the states B and C regarding the reach establishment and reach production.

In this way, when the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a disparate pattern (completely disparate pattern or reach disparity pattern) as a result of the variable display, it is “out”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 However, it switches to the big hit game effect for 4R big hit related to the first special symbol. If the big hit game is related to the "4R first big hit", the game state after the big hit game is the state C (high-accuracy low base state), and the "4R second big hit" is concerned. If so, the game state after the end of the big hit game is the state B (low accurate high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[Game production in state B]
Next, a game effect that is performed when the game state is controlled to the state B (a low-probability high base state or a high-probability high base state) will be described. The high-accuracy high-base state is set after the jackpot game based on the "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit" occurs in the state C (high-accuracy low base state).

The game effect performed in the state B is an effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) that is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, mainly based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination. As described above, in the state B, "E" is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect design game effect in the state B is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting of the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically performed according to the transition to the state B under the control of the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the effect mode E.

Further, in the state B, as the effect symbols 8, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” symbols made of blue symbols, “1”, “9” symbols made of green symbols, and red. The symbols "3", "5", and "7" composed of symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). To display each of these symbols, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Executed. In this example, the state (design) of the effect design 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55(a)), the variable display is basically the third stop mode. It is stopped by (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55(b)). This is because in state B, the second special symbol time saving function and the high base generating function are activated, so that the out variation and the small hit variation without reach can be digested in the shortest possible time to allow the game to proceed smoothly. This is because. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop. There is no agitation for the people. On the other hand, if there is an out-of-reach change with a reach or a big hit change (that is, a "reach change"), or if a reach change is seen, a "reach out-of-reach change" (a type of change without reach) that is actually a normal change is performed. In the case of being displayed, the variable display of the effect design 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left design→right design→middle design) (FIG. 55(c)→(d), (c)→(e)→( See f)).

In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a disengagement mode (separated pattern) as a result of the variably display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. In the state B, the big hit game when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode of the doublet is related to "15R third big hit" or "4R fourth big hit". Big hit game effect for 3 big hit or big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is done. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6).

In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach variety) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect for the 2R big hit with the start of the big hit game. Replace Then, when the big hit game started is related to "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a high-precision high base state (state B), When the big hit game is related to "2R seventh big hit" or "2R eighth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a low-probability-high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

Further, in the state B, the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, and when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variable display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. R. Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (displacement mode) (see FIG. 55(b)). When the small hit in the state B, the small hit game is executed, but even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains as the effect design game effect (here, the effect design). 8 is a state in which it is displayed in a completely broken pattern), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equivalent to the miss. Then, the game state after the end of the small hit game remains the state B unless it overlaps with the transition timing of the game state based on the number of times the special symbol changes.

In the low-probability-high base state, which is the state B, when the variable display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit. , The game state shifts to the state A (low-probability low base state) with the end (stop) of the fluctuation display (outside fluctuation) for the predetermined number of times, and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". To do. Further, in the case of the high-accuracy high-base state which is the state B, when the variable display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit, The game state shifts to the state C (high-accuracy low base state) with the end (stop) of the predetermined number of times of fluctuation display (outside fluctuation), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "C" or "D". ..

[Game production in state C]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state C (high-accuracy low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state C is mainly based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination, the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) that is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the small hit occurrence. It is an effect (small hit game effect). The state C is an advantageous game state (specific game state) in which a large number of prize balls can be expected by the small hits between the big hits by frequently making the small hits until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, in the state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed. Details of this point will be described later.

Further, as described above, in the state C, "C" or "D" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect in the state C is performed under the situation where the background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The effect mode setting and the like in the state C is performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) as in the case of the above-described states A and B, but in the present embodiment, during the mode selection period described later. It is possible for the player to select the effect mode by operating the first effect button 63a, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. Further, in the state C, as in the state B, as the effect symbols 8, "2", "4", "6", and "8" symbols made of blue symbols and "1", "9" made of green symbols. And the symbols “3”, “5”, and “7” composed of red symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the effect design 8 is the same between the state B and the state C.

Here, the contents of the game effect (specification of effect) developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are significantly different between the "effect mode C" and the "effect mode D" in the state C. .. Therefore, in the following, the game effect in each effect mode will be described by dividing into “effect mode C” and “effect mode D”.

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56A, in the effect mode C, the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8 as a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A predetermined character is displayed. The characters displayed here include an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and both characters are displayed so as to face each other. These characters are displayed even when the variable display of the symbols is not being performed. There are a plurality of types of characters for each of the ally character and the enemy character, and one of the ally characters (also referred to as “ally character”) and one enemy character (also referred to as “enemy character”) of the rendering mode C Displayed when setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that the teammate character attacks the enemy character or the teammate character is attacked by the enemy character. The effect (character effect) by such a character is performed as a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern (when accompanied by the variable display of the identification information), and when the result of the variable display is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. There is a case where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (a case where it is performed with a special game after the end of the variable display).

Further, a right hitting instruction image M for instructing a right hit is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount) is displayed in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a. The prize ball count image C1 shown is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of the present embodiment is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying 5-digit numbers “00000” to “99999” and a character image of “pt”. The prize ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of prize balls (the number of acquired prize balls) that the player has acquired by a big hit game, a small hit game, or the like, and the game state after the big hit game is the state B or the state. In the case of C, the number of prize balls to be acquired during that period (so-called, the number of prize balls to be acquired during the condominium period) is shown until the game state returns to the state A (except during the big hit game). .. In addition, since the state C (high-accuracy low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur (the frequency of small hit games increases), winning a prize ball in the small hit game (increasing the number of balls held) The prize ball count image C1 is displayed for the purpose of rendering. In other words, as a small hit game effect, effect display (entering ball effect) by the prize ball count image C1 is performed. The details of the effect accompanying the occurrence of the small hit will be described later.

A basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode C having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 57. It should be noted that in FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, a part of display contents such as effect holding (holding symbol), right-handing instruction image M, and background is omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57A), the variable display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57(b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time saving function is activated, so that the out fluctuation of the reachless state can be digested in the shortest possible time to allow the game to proceed smoothly. When the variable display of the effect design 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. .. Therefore, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, the effect (inclination effect) for increasing the player's expectation is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach variation (out or big hit) or the reach tilt out variation is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol→right symbol→middle symbol) (FIG. 57 ( c)→(d), (c)→(e)→(f)). Further, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination is "small hit", the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → It is stopped at the right pattern) (see FIG. 57(g)→(h)→(i)).

In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a disengagement mode (separated pattern) as a result of the variably display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the big hit game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode in the state C is related to "15R third big hit" or "4R fourth big hit", in this case, for 15R third big hit The big hit game effect or the big hit game effect for the 4R fourth big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6).

In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach variety) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect for the 2R big hit with the start of the big hit game. Replace As the big hit game effect in this case, the state C, that is, the effect display showing the end of the advantageous state where the small hits frequently occur is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. Then, when the big hit game started is related to "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a high-precision high base state (state B), When the big hit game is related to "2R seventh big hit" or "2R eighth big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a low-probability-high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

In addition, in the production mode C (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, and when the variation display of the production symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is performed as a normal variation. It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol→middle symbol→right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed with a specific variation (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57(i)). Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, two adjacent symbols out of the three symbols are the same, and the remaining one is a different symbol combination (“335”, “355”). , "557", etc.) is defined as a specific pattern (small hit mode). The symbol combination that constitutes a specific pattern (small hit mode) does not establish a reach, but since it forms a combination in which two adjacent symbols are the same symbol (number), such a symbol combination Is also referred to as "reach sequence".

Of the symbols (“3”, “5”, “7”) that make up the specific roses (first display mode), the symbols “3” and “5” form the specific roses in the state A. Although it is a green design (first design type) that cannot be done, in the state C, it is a red design (second design type) that can form a specific pattern (see FIG. 53). In other words, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the game state. This allows the player to pay attention to the symbol type (color type in this example) of the effect symbol, thereby attracting interest in the game.

In the present embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) that are the green symbols in the state A, and a specific unevenness (the first symbol) in the state C (first Although the display pattern) is a red pattern that can be configured, for example, a part of the effect design (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that is a blue pattern in the state A is a red pattern. Or, in the state A, the effect design (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that is a blue design, and the effect design that is a green design (“1”, “3”, “5”) , "9") (for example, "4" and "5") can be used as a red pattern. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C, which does not exist in the state A, may be provided, and a specific variation (first display mode) may be configured by the symbols belonging to this symbol type. For example, a gold design (gold design) is provided as a design type dedicated to the state C, and part of the effect design that is the green design in the state A can be the gold design in the state C. This makes it possible to further emphasize the symbol types that can form a specific pattern and make it easier for the player to draw attention. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols “3” and “5” that are the green symbols (first symbol type) in the state A are red symbols (the second symbol type) in the state C, but in this case, In the state A, the design of “7” which was a red design (second design type) from the beginning may be configured to be a gold design in the state C. In this case, the symbols "3" and "5" that are red symbols (second symbol type) are the symbols that can form a specific pattern, and the symbol "7" that is a gold symbol (third symbol type) Can be a 15R big hit mode (“7” doublet) corresponding to the 15R third big hit of the big hits. With this, the symbol type (red symbol) that can form a specific rose pattern (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold pattern) that configures a specific flatter pattern (15R big hit mode) are clearly distinguished, and hit. It is possible to clearly show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type.

Further, in this embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the variable display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode that cannot appear in other effect modes (left symbol → It is assumed that the variable display of the effect design 8 is stopped in the order of stop of the middle design → the right design). Therefore, not only the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) but also the stopped display mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small hit mode has caused the player to pay attention. Further, in the effect mode C, when the derivation display of the small hit mode (stop of variable display), the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) is performed. Specifically, one line image that extends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each pattern (red pattern) that constitutes the small hit mode, and the periphery of each pattern It is assumed that an effect image E (effect effect image) composed of an image (decorative image) for decorating is displayed. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the display of the small hit mode (that the small hit game is executed) when the variable display is stopped by the first stop mode, and when the variable display is stopped by the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of. The form of the effect image E is not limited to this embodiment, and various other forms can be adopted.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed by the display of the small hit mode, the winning prize ball shown by the prize ball count image C1 for each of the entered balls. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entrance into the second special winning opening 35 is 10 prize balls for each entrance, and therefore the winning prize indicated by the prize ball count image C1. The number of balls is added in units of 10. Further, when a small hit game is executed triggered by the display of the small hit mode, a ally character (first character) and an enemy character (first character) displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a along with the execution of the small hit game ( An effect display (character effect) by the second character) is performed. Specifically, one of the friendly character and the enemy character (for example, the friendly character) performs an effect display (also referred to as “first effect”) in which the other (for example, the enemy character) is attacked or mounted. I am trying. The character effect (also referred to as “character effect display”) in this case does not include a later-described battle effect that depicts a confrontation scene between both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the small winning big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), but the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect at this time. By performing the character effect along with the small hitting game having a short execution time in this way, it becomes easy to make the relevant character effect and the character effect performed as the variable effect described later as related effects, and from the variable display. It is possible to obtain an effect (character effect) having a sense of unity between an ally character and an enemy character in a small hit game. Here, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 accompanying the small hit is a sub command of the second prize hole entrance command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second prize hole sensor 35a. The character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the reception by the control unit 90, based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the opening command (S2066) for the small hit transmitted from the main control unit 80. Since these are performed, all of these effects correspond to the small hit game effect (S4407, S4408). The effect of additionally displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is also referred to as “first profit effect”.

In this way, in the production mode C (state C), the stop in the first stop mode of the effect symbol 8 and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red pattern) occur at high frequency, and accordingly, in the small hit game. Since the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 and the character effect display can be executed at a high frequency, by the cooperation of such effect design game effect (variable effect) and the small hit game effect, the occurrence of the small hit is strongly given to the player. It is possible to make an impression. As a result, the expectation for winning a prize ball (increasing the number of balls) due to frequent small hits can be fueled, and the enjoyment of the game in the effect mode C (state C) can be enhanced. It should be noted that the character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second big winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game, the character production is not performed. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second special winning opening 35, It is possible to give a strong impression to the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

Next, description will be made on the contents (production mode) of the production display when the reach variation (outside or big hit) and the reach out-of-range variation are performed in the production mode C. As described above, in the effect mode C, the effect symbol game effect (variable display of the effect symbol 8 etc.) in the state where the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a. ) Is performed (see FIG. 56(a)). Further, when the reach variation (out or big hit) is performed, and when the reach out-of-range variation is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). (See FIG. 57(c)→(d), (c)→(e)→(f)). Under these circumstances, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the variation effect pattern of the reach variation or the reach out-of-range variation, then the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) first stops according to the second stop mode. However (see FIG. 57(c)), when the left symbol (first stop symbol) is stopped, an effect display depicting a scene in which one of an ally character and an enemy character displayed in the background mounts an attack on the opponent (First effect) is performed. The first effect in this case is an effect (character effect) by the character (friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped. The first effect is roughly divided into a pattern in which an ally character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as "first effect pattern A") and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks an ally character (" (Also referred to as “first effect pattern B”), and for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that define the content (type) of the attack to be set, success or failure of the attack, and the like. By providing such plural kinds of patterns, the suggestion of the information (the big hit reliability, the contents of the effect that can be executed later, etc.) regarding the current variation display (the variation) by the effect content when the first effect is performed. (Preliminary notice). It should be noted that the first effect is an effect that one of the ally character and the enemy character mounts an attack on the other and ends, and does not include a battle effect described below.

For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as “first effect pattern”) is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which an ally character mounts an attack), at least the 2R big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the variable display. That is, it means that the big hit that triggers the end of the state C, which is an advantageous state where small hits frequently occur, does not occur. In this case, in the variation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol), the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (disengagement mode). Ruka (reach deviation deviation), whether the reach is achieved and developed to reach production, but finally the middle symbol stops at a pattern different from the left and right symbols and the production symbol 8 is displayed in reach reach (outside mode) (Out-of-reach fluctuation), or through the reach effect, the effect design 8 is displayed with a doublet (big hit mode) (big hit change). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the first effect pattern B (a pattern in which the enemy character mounts an attack), which is the opposite of the first effect pattern, the 2R big hit mode that triggers the end of the state C is displayed as a result of the variable display. Suggests a possibility. In this case, in the variation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol), the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (disengagement mode). Ruka (reach deviation deviation), but reach reach has been developed to reach production, but finally the middle pattern stops with a pattern different from the left and right symbols and the production pattern 8 is reach reach (outside mode or 2R big hit mode) It is displayed (out-of-reach variation or 2R big-hit variation), or the effect design 8 is displayed as a flat pattern (big-hit variation) through reach production. In this way, by the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol), the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether the reach is established, whether it is advantageous for the player, etc.) It is possible to suggest. It is suggested that the first effect pattern A is more likely to be advantageous to the player for the subsequent development than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns by the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is decided whether to do it.

After the left symbol (effect symbol 8L, first stop symbol) is stopped (after execution of the first effect), the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped according to the second stop mode. When the right symbol to be stopped becomes a symbol (number) different from the left symbol, the reach is not established, and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) is stopped and the variable display ends, and the effect symbol 8 It is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (outside mode). In this case, the fluctuation is out-of-reach fluctuation (see FIG. 57(c)→(e)→(f)).

On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol becomes the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the reach is established. At this point, the change is a reach change (see FIG. 57(c)→(d)). When the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect, after the reach is established (after the execution of the first effect), the effect by the character (friend character, enemy character) that is performed in a state where the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) is still changing ( In the present embodiment, it is performed as a battle effect that depicts a confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character that have been displayed as the background. The second effect (battle effect) is roughly divided into a pattern in which an ally character wins a confrontation (battle) (also referred to as "second effect pattern A") and a pattern in which an ally character loses the confrontation (battle). There are three patterns (also referred to as "second effect pattern B") and a pattern (also referred to as "second effect pattern C") that ends the battle (battle) without a winning or losing decision. There are a plurality of patterns that define the type of character, which of the ally character and the enemy character will attack first (the type of character that makes the preemptive attack), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, it is possible to suggest information (big hit reliability etc.) relating to the present fluctuation display (the fluctuation) based on the contents of the performance when the second performance (battle performance) is performed. There is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), of the second effect patterns (also referred to as "second effect patterns"), the ally character makes a preemptive attack on the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern). There is a pattern in which the enemy character first wins and the ally character finally wins. Further, the second effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern) has a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the allied character is defeated. Further, in the second effect pattern C (a winning/losing undecided pattern), a pattern in which an ally character makes a preemptive attack but the enemy character evades the attack, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes a preemptive attack and the ally character bears the attack There is. The second effect (battle effect) based on these second effect patterns all starts with the preemptive attack of the ally character or the enemy character, and the effect content (confrontation result) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear. Scenes, etc.) are predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and according to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above, any one of a plurality of types of patterns can be used as the second effect (battle). It is decided whether to execute the production.

In the present embodiment, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a big hit variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit), that is, a change When the effect design 8 is displayed as a doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the big hit mode is displayed (before the derivation display), the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern). Production) is performed. In this case, after the variable display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), the big hit game of 15R or 4R is performed, and the game state becomes the state C (high-accuracy low base state) again after the big hit game. Therefore, the player can play the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur again after the big hit game. Since the game in the state C can be continued after the big hit game in this way, the second effect pattern A is a pattern in which the teammate character wins.

Further, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as an outlier variation (reach outlier variation) based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination being out of reach, that is, as a result of the variation display, the effect symbol 8 reaches reach variation. When it is displayed with eyes (disappearance mode), the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (undecided pattern) is performed before the disengagement mode is displayed (before derivation display). In this case, after the variable display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the game in the state C is continued. Since the game continues in the state C in this way, the second effect pattern C is a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is finished without a winning or losing decision.

Furthermore, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on that the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R 5th to 8th jackpots), that is, the variation As a result of the display, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a reach-bare pattern (2R big hit mode), the second effect based on the second effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern) before the 2R big hit mode is displayed (before derivation display). (Battle production) is performed. In this case, the 2R big hit game is performed after the variable display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), and the game state becomes the state B (high base state) after the big hit game. Therefore, for the player, the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur is ended by the occurrence of the 2R big hits. In this way, the game state shifts from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot, so that the second effect pattern B is a pattern in which the teammate character is defeated.

Here, among the second effect patterns A to C, the patterns including the content that the ally character makes a preemptive attack are the second effect pattern A (ally victory pattern) and the second effect pattern C (win/lose undecided pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64(a)), for the player, the battle effect (second effect) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect is preempted by the ally character. If it starts from an attack, it can be inferred that there is at least no possibility of a 2R jackpot at this point, that is, the possibility of ending state C. On the other hand, since the pattern including the contents of the first attack by the enemy character corresponds to all of the second effect patterns A to C (see FIG. 64(a)), for the player, the reach on the display screen 7a is reached. If the battle production (second production) is started after the establishment, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle production starts from the preemptive attack of the enemy character, the possibility of a 2R jackpot (end of state C is possible at that time) Sex) cannot be excluded. Then, after the predecessor attack of the enemy character, when the teammate character is defeated and the battle effect is finished, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern B, so the fluctuation is the 2R jackpot. This is a change, and as a result, the game in state C is over. On the other hand, if the ally character finally wins after the first strike of the enemy character and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A. The variation is a 15R or 4R jackpot variation, and when the teammate dodges the enemy character's preemptive attack to end the battle production, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern C. As a result, the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation, and in these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. As described above, in the reach variation in the effect mode C, by performing the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect patterns A to C, the advantageous state in which the small hits frequently occur (state C) continues (victory, undecided). ) Or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain a staging effect that excites the player's expectations and anxiety. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the variable effect (character effect) from the first effect to the second effect (battle effect), and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the effect mode C (state C). Becomes

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56(b), in the effect mode D, the effect design 8 is in a smaller size (reduced size) than the other effect modes such as the effect mode C on the upper right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (also referred to as "reduced display"), and the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In the production mode D having such a screen configuration, usually, the production display mainly showing how the fighter is flying is developed on the display screen 7a while performing the variable display of the production design 8 in the upper right of the screen. It has become a thing. Then, when the reach variation is performed, the effect symbol 8 is displayed large in the approximate center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and a predetermined reach effect (development effect, etc.) is displayed on the entire display screen after the reach is established. It is possible to use it. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but an image with a motif other than this as the main effect image may be displayed. It is possible. Also in the effect mode D, as in the effect mode C, the right-hand hitting instruction image M and the prize ball count image C1 are displayed.

A basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Note that, in FIG. 58 as well, for convenience of explanation, part of the display contents such as effect holding (holding symbol) is omitted. First, in the rendering mode D, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is normally displayed. This moving image is displayed even when the variable display of the symbols is not performed. When the variable display of the effect design 8 is started (see FIG. 58(a)), the variable display is basically in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of normal fluctuation (off or small hit). It is stopped (see FIG. 58(b)). The reason for stopping in the third stop mode is the same as in the effect mode C described above. In the production mode D, the mode of the variable display when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed at the upper right of the display screen 7a is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. .. On the other hand, when the reach variation (outside or big hit) or the reach out-of-range variation is performed, the main image X is hidden, and the effect design 8 that has been displayed small (reduced display) in the upper right of the screen is displayed. It is displayed large in the approximate center of the screen 7a, and its variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58(c)). Thereafter, the variable display of the effect design 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left design→right design→middle design) or the fourth stop mode (left/right symbol simultaneous stop→middle design) (FIG. 58(c)→ (D)→(e), (c)→(e), (d)→(f)→(g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (left/right symbol simultaneous stop→middle symbol), after the main image X is hidden, the effect symbol 8 is largely displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. At the timing, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped at substantially the same time, and the middle symbol may be variably displayed (scroll display).

In this way, when the effect design 8 is variably displayed, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a disengagement mode (separated pattern) as a result of the variably display, it is “disengaged”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eyes) as a result of the variable display, the 4R or 15R big hit game can be executed, and when the 2R big hit mode (reach rose) is displayed, the 2R big hit game can be executed. Becomes The effect during the big hit game and the game state after the big hit game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, in the production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, and when the variable display (small hit change) of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variable display is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The normal fluctuation is performed and the vehicle is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58(b)). At this time, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed in a specific variability (small hit mode) (see FIG. 58(b)). Here, in the effect mode C, the variable display associated with the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in other effect modes, and the effect image E (effect effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. The display of the effect design 8 is mainly shown to emphasize the occurrence of the small hit. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, by displaying the effect symbol 8 in the specific upper right corner of the display screen 7a with a specific variation (small hit mode), the notification of the occurrence of the small hit due to the stop display mode of the effect pattern 8 is proper. Although it is supposed to be performed in an inconspicuous manner, at that time, an effect image different from the effect pattern 8 can be displayed, and the occurrence of a small hit may be suggested (notice) to the player by the display of the effect image. I am supposed to.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(a), it is possible to display a plurality of target images Y substantially at the center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit variation. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second big winning opening 35 in one small hit game, and in this embodiment, it is approximately 2 per one small hit game. Since three game balls are designed (gauge configuration) to be able to enter the second special winning opening 35, three target images Y are displayed corresponding to this. The display of the target image Y is based on the variable effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect symbol game effect), and the variable effect pattern including the display of the target image Y in S4505 described above (small for effect mode D). When the hit variation effect pattern) is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed in executing the variation effect. By displaying the target image Y in this way, the player can infer that the result of the variable display is a small hit. Therefore, the target image Y can be said to be a notice effect image that gives a notice of the occurrence of a small hit. The display of the target image Y may be included in the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above, instead of being included in the change effect pattern.

Then, when the small hit variation (variation display of the effect design 8) is stopped and the small hit mode (such as "355") is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize is opened in the small hit game. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as "destruction effect") showing that the target image Y is destroyed is displayed for each entry (see FIG. 59(b)). The destruction effect is performed based on that the sub control unit 90 receives the second special winning opening ball entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second special winning opening sensor 35a. And corresponds to the small hit game production (S4407, S4408). In the present embodiment, the destruction effect represents that the target image Y is destroyed by the missile attack from the fighter (main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the entrance into the second special winning opening 35 is also performed.

The effect from the start of the small hit variation to the small hit game is the basic effect associated with the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D. In addition to this, in the effect mode D, the effect related to the small hit is as described above. It is assumed that an effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, a so-called "hold ahead read effect" is performed. The holding prefetching effect (also referred to as "small hitting prefetching effect") related to this small hit is realized by the small hitting prefetching effect processing (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs the small hit prefetch production process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 when starting the variable display (variation production) of the production symbol 8 in the production mode D. Specifically, when setting the variation effect pattern (S4505) in the variation effect start process (S4402), the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

In the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although the details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006, which will be described later, when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C). During the period, a special effect will be given to the small hit. If it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), this process is terminated without performing the processes in S5002 and thereafter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not in the specific period) (YES in S5001), as a hold of the currently stored second special symbol (second special symbol hold), the second special symbol hit or not It is determined whether or not a hold (also referred to as "small hit hold") is stored that has a determination result of a small hit (S5002). This determination is performed by referring to the effect holding information (preliminary determination result or the like) stored in S4402 described above, that is, the stored content of the effect holding information storage area (acquired information storage unit) of the sub-control board 90. The presence/absence of a small hit hold is determined, including the second special figure hold corresponding to the variable display (also referred to as “the relevant change”) of the effect design 8 to be started from now on (S5002). Note that holding a small hit is also referred to as "specific acquisition information".

When it is determined in S5002 that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), this processing is terminated without performing the processing of S5003 and thereafter, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not a small hit occurs three or more times in succession as a result of the variation display, including the variation (variation display starting from now) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, including the second special figure holding corresponding to the variation (S5003). This determination can also be made by referring to the effect holding information (stored contents of the effect holding information storage area) stored in S4402 described above.

If it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit holdings have not been stored in succession (NO in S5003), this process ends without performing the processes in S5004 and thereafter. In this case, the small hit prefetch effect (small hit continuous notice) based on the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) is not started. However, when the change is a small hit change corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, the change effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the change effect pattern related to the change, In the variation (small hit variation), a variation effect accompanied by the display of a plurality of (three in this example) target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59A). That is, three target images Y may be displayed as an effect (announcement of the change) that suggests the occurrence of a small hit in the change.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not to start the specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period during which a special effect is performed as an effect related to the small hit. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is continuously played three times or more, that is, it is determined that the small hit is derived as a result of each of three or more continuous variable displays. If (YES in S5003), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs a starting lottery of a specific period (a type of random number lottery for effect determination) as a determination as to whether or not to start the specific period. If it is won (YES in S5004), the processes of S5005 to S5007 when starting the specific period are supposed to be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the two conditions of (1) three or more small hit holdings are stored in succession and (2) winning the starting lottery of the specific period are satisfied, the specific period is satisfied. Is started. That is, these two conditions (1) and (2) are the conditions for starting the specific period.

When it is determined in S5004 that the specific period starts (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned ON (S5006), and the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is set (S5007). .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hits held determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, "3" or "4" is set (S5005). After setting the specific period counter in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display (small hit variation) is stopped (ended) thereafter. Further, the specific period flag is a flag indicating that it is during the specific period, and is mainly used at the start of the variation effect (S4404, S5001, etc.) or when the second special figure suspension occurs (special figure 2 start incoming ball command reception). ) Is a flag that is referred to when the effect holding information is stored (S4402). The specific period flag is turned on in S5006 and then turned off when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero.

In this embodiment, three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored (YES in S5003), and when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured to determine whether to set the small hit prefetching effect pattern B and set the effect pattern B in the case of a positive determination. This makes it possible to provide a case where the small hit prefetch effect is executed and a case where the small hit prefetch effect is not executed when three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, so that the effect can be diversified. Become.

When the small hit pre-reading effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting the small hit pre-reading effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect design game effect is given to the image control board 100. The small hit prefetching effect is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the effect symbol game effect. At this time, when the specific period is started and the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. 61, with the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (the first small hit change). , The main image X (see FIG. 56(b)) is hidden, and the characters “Continuous GET Shiro!!” are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61(a)).

After that, with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” or the like) due to the stop of the variable display, the specific period display area T( which displays the prize ball count image C2 indicating the number of won prize balls during the specific period. The second display portion) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61(b)). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a three-digit number of “000” to “999” and a character image of “pt”. Then, every time a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode, the number of prize balls paid out for the one entered ball The prize ball number image S indicating (10 in this embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61C), and the prize ball number image indicated by the prize ball number image S is It is additionally displayed on the prize ball count image C2 (the number of acquired prize balls) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61(d)). Also, during the specific period, not only the second big winning opening 35, but also when a game ball enters the third starting opening 26, a prize ball to be paid out for each ball (each one is entered) The award ball number image S indicating the number (one in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61(c)), and the award ball number image indicated by the award ball number image S indicates the award ball count image. It is additionally displayed on C2 (the number of winning prize balls) (see FIG. 61(d)). As a result, during the specific period, the award ball number image S and the award ball count image C2 are easily displayed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of these ball entry effects. The effect of additionally displaying the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as “second profit effect”.

The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game sphere by the third starting opening sensor 26a and the second special winning opening sensor 35a. This is performed based on that the sub-control unit 90 receives a ball command (special figure 2 start ball entry command, second big winning opening ball entry command) (S4407, S4408). Since the ball entering the third starting port 26 can occur during a game other than the small hit game, the award ball number image S based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 is displayed and the award ball count image C2 is added. The display can be executed, for example, as an effect during variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game. Further, during the specific period, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 displayed on the lower right portion of the screen (first display portion) is not performed. This shows the number of award balls acquired during a specific period in which the small hit game is continuously performed three times or more (during the small hit condominium period), in distinction from the number of award balls acquired during the small hit game during a period other than the specific period. This is because.

The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above are all of the small hit holdings stored at the start of the specific period (three or four small hit holdings in this embodiment). ) Is carried out until the small hit variation and the small hit game are completed. Then, when the small hit variation corresponding to all the small hit holdings and the small hit game are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T displayed until then is erased from the screen. In addition, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61(e)), and the number of acquired prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is at the lower right of the screen (first display portion). The effect display that is added to (added to) the number of won prize balls shown by the prize ball count image C1 displayed in is displayed (see FIG. 61(e)→(f)). According to the effect based on such a small hit prefetching effect pattern A, the effect form (first profit effect, second profit effect) is changed by changing the display mode of the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount). It is possible to enhance the effect. The mode of effect display based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, the specific period display area T, the number of prize balls image S, etc.) is shown in FIG. For example, the specific period display area T is horizontally displayed near the upper left portion on the display screen 7a, and the prize ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T. It is possible to adopt various display modes such as

On the other hand, when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and the effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is performed, along with the start of the variable display (small hit change) of the effect symbol 8, A plurality of the above-mentioned target images Y (see FIG. 59(a)) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning hole in the small hit game of the number of times corresponding to the number of small hits held (3 or 4) stored at the time when the variable display is started. It is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter 35. As described above, in the present embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for each small hit game (see FIG. 59(a)), an effect based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B (predetermined effect). Then, 9 or 12 target images Y are displayed. In other words, the number of displayed target images Y (effect mode of predetermined effect) varies depending on the number of stored small hits. Due to such display of the target symbol Y, the result of the variable display continuously performed a plurality of times (three or four times in this example) including the variable display is a small hit (specific display result). It is possible to suggest to the player that the consecutive hits). After that, each time a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 while the small hit game is played for the number of times corresponding to the small hit holding number at the start of the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B. The destruction effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59(b)) is performed.

The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y or the destruction effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter that directly indicates the stored number of small hits held is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is used to enter the second special winning opening 35. The predetermined character image is displayed while the effect of updating based on the small hit and the small hit change based on the small hit hold is performed, and the display mode (movement of the character, etc.) of the character image is displayed to the second special winning opening 35. It is possible to make various effects such as effects that change based on the entry of a predetermined effect as the predetermined effects. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect patterns of predetermined effects) corresponding to the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and select and set any one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit prefetch effect.

As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display by the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56(b)), a small hit frequently occurs, so that the second special winning opening 35 enters the ball. Since effects based on (first profit effect, second profit effect) can also be executed with high frequency, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect related to the small hit and improve the interest of the game. In particular, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hitting reservations (“3” or more in the present embodiment), when a specific period is started and the specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of small hit prefetching effect, Until the small hits are all exhausted and the specific period ends, the award ball number image S and the award ball count image C2 are additionally displayed (second profit effect). Therefore, the award ball number image S is displayed and It is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and increase the certainty of the display. Then, after the end of the specific period, the number of won prize balls shown in the prize ball count image C2 (the number of won prize balls during the particular period) is originally displayed in the lower right part of the screen (first display section). It is added (summed) to the number of winning prize balls of the ball count image C1. Further, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hitting reservations (“3” or more in the present embodiment), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of small hitting prefetch effect. The effect (small hit prefetch effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (the number of display of the target image Y in this embodiment) varies depending on the number of small hits held. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect (small hit prefetch effect, the first profit effect, the second profit effect, etc.) that is executed in association with the small hit, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the effect mode D (state C). Become.

Next, description will be made on the contents (production mode) of the production display when the reach variation (outside or big hit) or the reach out-of-range variation is performed in the production mode D. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the effect design 8 is reduced and displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the effect design game effect (of the effect pattern 8) is displayed. (Variable display, etc.) is performed (see FIGS. 56B and 58A). In addition, when the reach variation (outside or big hit) is performed and when the reach out-of-range variation is performed, the main image X is not displayed after the variation display of the effect design 8 is started, and is displayed on the upper right of the screen until then. The effect symbol 8 that was displayed is largely displayed in the approximate center of the screen and is displayed in a vertical scrolling manner, and then the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the second stop mode (left symbol→right symbol→middle symbol) or fourth. Stop in a stop mode (left/right symbol simultaneous stop→middle symbol) (see FIG. 58(c) and thereafter). At this time, if the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58(e)), the reach is established, and thereafter, a predetermined result is displayed before the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display). Reach production is performed. The reach effect is executed based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect differs depending on the type of the variation effect pattern.

Here, the reach effect executed in the effect mode D (also referred to as “third effect”) is the same as the second effect executed as the reach effect in the effect mode C described above, in which the ally character and the enemy character are combined. It is a battle effect (confrontation effect) that depicts a confrontation scene, and is provided with a plurality of third effect patterns having different contents of the battle effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D is roughly classified into a pattern in which the teammate character wins (also referred to as "third effect pattern A") and an ally. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character is defeated (also referred to as “third effect pattern B”) and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is completed without winning or losing (also referred to as “third effect pattern C”). Then, for each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the type of enemy character, the type of character to make a preemptive attack, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. It should be noted that the third effect pattern A (ally victory pattern) is also referred to as a "first variable effect pattern", and the third effect pattern B (ally defeated pattern) is also referred to as a "second variable effect pattern". The effect pattern C (a winning/losing undecided pattern) is also referred to as a “third variation effect pattern”. In addition, in the third effect (battle effect) pattern, the attack content of each of the ally character and the enemy character (for example, the type of weapon used in the attack, the type of technique, etc.) is a pattern with a strong attack power (" A strong pattern) and a weak attack pattern (also called a "weak pattern") are provided. In the present embodiment, among the patterns in which an ally character attacks an enemy character, a strong pattern (also referred to as “ally strong pattern”) can be won by the ally character compared to a weak pattern (also referred to as “ally weak pattern”). It is supposed to show that it is highly effective. Further, among the patterns in which the enemy character attacks the ally character, the strong pattern (also referred to as “enemy strong pattern”) is more likely to be won by the enemy character than the weak pattern (also referred to as “enemy weak pattern”). It indicates that. These strong and weak patterns enable the player to be informed of the development and results of the battle production.

Further, when the reach variation or the reach out-of-range variation is performed in the production mode D, an image (also referred to as a “preliminary image”) that gives a notice (suggestion) of the content of the subsequent game that may be executed through the reach production in the variation Is displayed (see FIG. 65). The display of the notice image is a type of notice effect (preliminary notice pattern) set in S4506 described above in accordance with the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in S4505 described above, and a notice set in advance is provided. When the notice production (preliminary production pattern for production mode D) based on the display of the notice image is selected (set) on the basis of the production determination table (not shown), predetermined execution is performed for the variable display (variation production). Notice image is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the notice image, such as when the variable display is started, when the reach is established, after the reach is established, and the like, and these timings are also set in accordance with the form of the notice production (the notice production pattern). However, the display start timing of the notice image due to the reach out-of-range variation is determined from the start of the variation display until it is determined that the reach is not established (reach not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol is stopped). .. This is because the reach is not established by the out-of-reach fluctuation. In the present embodiment, the display start timing of the notice image due to the out-of-reach variation is the start time of the variation display. By displaying the notice image, the player can infer the development of the game that can be executed after the fluctuation. Note that the display of the notice image may not be based on the notice effect pattern, but may be included in the variation effect pattern set in S4505 described above. In addition, the notice image can be said to be “information regarding the game after the end of the variable display”, and the effect of displaying the notice image is also referred to as “information display effect”.

In the present embodiment, when the notice image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the notice image display area U is located at the lower part of the display screen 7a, and the notice image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65(a), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stopped due to the establishment of the reach are respectively displayed small on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a, and the reach effect is mainly in the center of the screen. The state (reach state) performed is shown. As a notice image that can be displayed in the notice image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65(b), a first notice image for giving notice (suggestion) of occurrence (execution) of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) that gives a notice (suggestion) of continuation of the effect mode D (state C), and a notice (suggestion) of a transition to the effect mode E (state B). It has three types of advance notice images including a third advance notice image 503 (third information). At the start of displaying the preview image (start of the information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, it is possible for the player to make an alternative guess regarding the subsequent game development, so that it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. Further, since the contents suggested by the first to third notice images are contents based on the game in the effect mode D (state C) as a reference (base), display of such notice images causes effect mode D (state C). ) Will give a notice (indication) of the subsequent game development based on the game in (), and the interest of the game in the effect mode D (state C) can be enhanced. It should be noted that the form (display position, size, shape, etc.) of the notice image display area U is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65, and for example, the horizontally long notice image display area U shown in FIG. Or a vertically long notice image display area U is provided at the left or right part of the display screen 7a, and the first to third notice images are vertically (vertically) provided in the notice image display area U. It is possible to adopt various modes such as displaying them side by side.

The first notice image 501 is configured to include the characters “big hit”, the second notice image 502 is configured to include the character “continuation”, and the third notice image 503 is configured to include the character “mode E”. To be done. In the present embodiment, when the notice image is displayed, two types of notice images are displayed. As a display pattern (a notice image combination), that is, a notice effect pattern, the "first notice image 501" shown in FIG. And a second display pattern for displaying the “second notice image 502” and a second display pattern for displaying the “second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503” shown in FIG. 65(d). .. In addition to this, a display pattern for displaying the “first notice image 501 and the third notice image 503” may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, three types of notice images are provided, but for example, when the 15R third jackpot and the 4R fourth jackpot are separately (discriminately) given, or there are more types of jackpots. More types of advance notice images may be provided, such as providing advance notice images according to the type of jackpot. Also in this case, at least two types of notice images may be configured to be displayed in the notice image display area U, and the display pattern of the notice image (notice effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

Which of the first notice image 501, the second notice image 502, and the third notice image 503 is to be displayed depends on the type of notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, when a reach out-of-range variation is performed (reach out-of-range variation effect pattern), the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the second notice image 502 from the start of the variation. The third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the notice image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is due to the stop of the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R). It is performed until the reach failure is confirmed. Then, after the start of displaying the preview image (after the start of the information display effect), when the reach failure is confirmed, the preview image that has been displayed until then is deleted from the screen. In this case, the variable display of the effect design 8 is ended (stopped) without the reach effect being performed thereafter.

Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern in the case of displaying the notice image is performed by the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 which is referred to when setting the notice effect by the display of the notice image in S4506, and It is supposed to be performed based on the display pattern determining random number which takes a value in the range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the respective selection rates of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by this display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach out-of-range fluctuation, both the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern and the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern can be executed. The latter has a higher possibility of execution than the above (the selection rate of the first display pattern is “30%”, the selection rate of the second display pattern is “70%”).

On the other hand, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is a big hit variation based on the result of the second special symbol winning/discarding determination being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) If, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed as a doublet (big hit variation effect pattern) (big hit variation effect pattern), before the big hit aspect is displayed (before derivation display), the third effect. The third effect (variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern) based on the pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed. After the variable display is stopped (after the big-hit mode is displayed), the big-hit game is played, and after that, the game in the state C can be continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern A (first variable effect pattern) is It is a pattern in which an ally character wins. In the variation (big hit variation), a notice image is displayed (information display effect) at a predetermined time during the variation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, for example, when the variation starts or when the reach is established. Is started. In this case, the advance notice image can be displayed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65(c)), at least as a result of the change (battle effect), the player is at least as a result. It can be inferred that there is no possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is a possibility that the game in state C will end (a possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65(d)), the player has a 2R big hit at that time. It is impossible to exclude the possibility (the possibility that the later game development may be disadvantageous).

Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect (battle effect that is a ally victory) based on the third effect pattern A is executed due to the jackpot change is displayed first rather than the second display pattern. The display pattern is more likely to be executed (see FIG. 66). Therefore, the display of the advance notice image according to the first display pattern is larger than the display of the advance notice image according to the second display pattern. It can be said that the expectation (big hit reliability) of executing the game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is high. Further, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the “ally strong pattern” due to a big hit change, the possibility of displaying the advance notice image by the first display pattern is made higher. (See FIG. 66).

In addition, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is the “ally strong pattern” and the display of the preview image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time (for example, a ally character and an enemy) after the display of the preview image is started. Assuming that the first notice image 501 (big hit) may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the notice image display area U at a predetermined time before the end of the battle, such as at the start of the character's showdown or during the showdown. (See FIG. 65(e)). The enlarged display of the notice image is based on the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above, and when the notice effect pattern including the enlarged display of the notice image is selected (set), the enlarged display of the notice image is displayed. Done. Further, along with the enlarged display of the first notice image 501, the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed smaller than at the beginning of display, or is erased (erased in this embodiment). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. As a result, the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is based on the ally strong pattern, and a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) may occur as a result of the variation (battle effect). It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and security of the player by suggesting to the player that the price is high. When the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is deleted, the display may be used to give notice of confirmation of the big hit (big hit confirmation notification). In addition, the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, and then the first notice image 501 is further enlarged, the second notice image 502 is deleted, and the like. The display mode of the notice image being displayed on U may be changed stepwise. Further, as a change in the display mode of the notice image, for example, the "big hit" character of the first notice image 501 may be changed to "super big hit" that suggests the 15R big hit, or the "big hit" character and its background color may be changed. It is also possible to change the characters, colors, shapes, etc., that make up the advance notice image, such as by changing the color. Further, such a change in characters or the like and a change in display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of this embodiment may be combined to be executable.

On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the “ally strong pattern”, that is, a “ally weak pattern”, an “enemy strong pattern”, or an “enemy weak pattern” In any of these three patterns, the first preview image 501 is not enlarged and displayed, and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the notice image in the notice image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the variable display. Even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the “ally strong pattern”, it is possible to display the first notice image 501 in an enlarged manner. In this case, in the case of “ally strong pattern” The possibility of performing the enlarged display (change of display mode) may be made lower than that of (1). This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display (display mode change) of the advance notice image.

In addition, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), when the variation is performed as an outlier variation (reach outlier variation) based on the result of the second special symbol winning/absence determination being out, that is, , When the effect symbol 8 is displayed as reach variation (displacement mode) as a result of the variable display (reach deviation variation effect pattern), before the disengagement mode is displayed (before derivation display), the third effect pattern C (win or lose) The third effect (change effect based on the third change effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. Since the game in the state C is continued after the change display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the third effect pattern C (third change effect pattern) is not determined to win or lose the battle (battle). It is a pattern to finish. Then, in the variation (out-of-reach variation), for example, at the start of the variation or when the reach is established, at the predetermined time during the variation before the third effect (battle effect) is started, the first notice image 501 and the first notice image 501 The display of the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, if the advance notice image is displayed in the first display pattern, the player is unlikely to have at least a 2R jackpot as a result of the change (battle effect) (end possibility of state C). Can be guessed. On the other hand, when the preview image is displayed according to the second display pattern, the player is likely to have at least a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) as a result of the change (battle effect). You can guess not. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect (battle effect with undecided victory or defeat) based on the third effect pattern C is executed by the out-of-reach variation is the first display pattern and the second display. The selection rate of each pattern is set to 50% so that the pattern and the pattern have the same feasibility (see FIG. 66).

Here, the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern (big hit or continuation) is also a display indicating that the game in the state C can be executed thereafter, so that the game in the state C ends. It does not give the player any anxiety that it will end up. On the other hand, the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern (continuation or effect mode E) cannot exclude the possibility that the 2R big hit will occur, and it becomes impossible to continue the game in the state C. Since it also includes sex, such anxiety is given to the player. The display of the notice image according to the first display pattern or the second display pattern in such a reach deviation change occurs at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, a predetermined time during a match between the ally character and the enemy character or at the end of the match). Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (the first notice image 501 or the third notice image 503) are erased (display mode change of the notice image). Thereby, the player recognizes that the big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) does not occur as a result of the variation (battle effect) and is out, and the game in the state C is continued. You can In this way, the display of the preview image that only the second preview image 502 (continuation) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

It should be noted that in the out-of-reach variation, the big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the variation display (the big hit is not generated). The enlarged display of 501 is not performed. Further, in the out-of-reach variation, after the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern or the second display pattern is started, the second notice image 502 of the notice images may be enlarged and displayed. The second notice image 502 is a notice image for notifying (indicating) the continuation of the state C in which small hits frequently occur, and the enlarged display of the second notice image 502 does not give the player the benefit of the big hit occurrence. Since the advance notice (indication) is given that the possibility of continuing the state C is high, it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety that the game in the state C will end.

Further, when a reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is based on that the result of the second special symbol winning/absence determination is 2R big hit (any of 2R fifth to eighth big hit). When it is performed as a 2R jackpot variation, that is, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed as a reach breach (2R jackpot variation rendering pattern) as a result of the variation display (2R jackpot variation rendering pattern), before the 2R jackpot variation display (before derivation display) ), the third effect (variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern) is performed. In addition, after the variation display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), the 2R big hit game is played, the game state after the big hit game is the state B (high base state), and the game in the state C is continued. Since it becomes impossible, the third production pattern B (second variation production pattern) is a pattern in which the teammate character is defeated. In the variation (2R jackpot variation), the second notice image 502 and the second preliminary announcement image 502 and the 3 The display of the notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. By displaying the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player estimates that there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot (end of state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). be able to. In the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect (battle effect of ally defeat) based on the third effect pattern B is executed in the 2R jackpot variation is not executed in the first display pattern, It is assumed that this is executed only by the second display pattern (see FIG. 66). This is because despite the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern (the notice effect suggesting a relatively advantageous game development), the game in state C ends due to the occurrence of the 2R big hit (relative This is because the game development is disadvantageous to the player). By doing so, the player can feel a sense of discomfort or distrust when displaying the notice image and the third effect (battle effect), and when displaying the notice image (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect). It becomes possible not to have a feeling.

After that, the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern in the fluctuation (2R jackpot fluctuation) is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, a predetermined time during a match between an ally character and an enemy character or at the end of the match). Only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second notice image 502 (continuation) is deleted (change in display mode of notice image). As a result, the player can recognize that two big hits (any of the 2R fifth to eighth big hits) have occurred as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in state C has come to an end. it can. In this way, the display of the final notice image in which only the third preliminary notice image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the preliminary notice image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

As described above, in the production mode D, when a reach variation or an out-of-reach variation is performed, based on the variation production pattern related to the variation, the contents (game development) of the game that can be executed after the variation are announced (indication). The notice image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (the notice image display area U). In this notice image, a first notice image 501 (first information) that gives a notice (suggestion) of the occurrence of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) that triggers the setting of state C (high-accuracy low base state). And, a second notice image 502 (second information) that gives a notice (suggestion) of continuation of state C, and a notice (suggestion) that the game state will shift to state B upon completion of the 2R jackpot (game end in state C) ) The third notice image 503 (third information), and the display patterns of these notice images include a first display pattern composed of a combination of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502, and a second notice image. There is a second display pattern including a combination of 502 and the third notice image 503. The display of the notice image based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern is performed from the start of the fluctuation in the reach outlier fluctuation before the reach failure is confirmed, and in the reach fluctuation the third effect from the start of the fluctuation. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of (battle effect) becomes clear (before the battle effect or the end of the fluctuation), state C (an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently) continues (wins) , It is possible to obtain a staging effect that excites the player's expectation and anxiety, such as whether the player is undecided or finished (defeated). If the reach variation is a big hit variation, depending on the mode of the third effect (battle effect) in the variation (strong ally pattern, weak ally pattern, etc.), the third effect is executed after the notice image is displayed. At a predetermined time in the middle (during battle production), the display mode of the notice image displayed at that time can change. Due to such changes in the display mode, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the preview image being displayed, and to suggest that it is highly likely that the subsequent game development will be advantageous to the player, or at an early stage before the end of the fluctuation, It is possible to increase the player's expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C will be described. As described above, when the game state is controlled to the state C (high-accuracy low base state), one of the effect modes C and D is set, and the selected effect mode is set. Is configured to be performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. The selection of the effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) occurs. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the "4R first big hit", "15R third big hit", and "4R fourth big hit" are big hits that are the triggers for setting the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), it is possible to select the effect modes C and D at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

In this embodiment, at a predetermined time after the big hit game is started, a mode selection period in which the effect mode after the big hit game is finished can be selected from the two effect modes C and D is generated. The generation timing (occurrence timing) of this mode selection period is different between "4R first big hit" and "4R fourth big hit", and "15R third big hit". The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs control processing relating to production mode selection such as generation of a mode selection period and selection of a production mode based on operation of the first production button 63a during the mode selection period. It is executed under control, and specifically, it is executed by the hit game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

First, in the state A (left-handed game), the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed and "4R first big hit" occurs, that is, when "4R first big hit" occurs as the first hit, the state B or C (right-handed game) when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed and "4R fourth big hit" occurs, that is, mode selection when "4R fourth big hit" occurs as a condominium The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of the 4R jackpot game are over. Here, as described above, when the final round of the big hit game ends (when the value of the round counter becomes "0"), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the big hit ending command and (S2116), the jackpot ending period is started (S2117). When the sub-control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub-control unit side can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, "4R ending command" for "4R first big hit" and "4R fourth big hit", "15R ending command" for "15R third big hit", It is provided according to the type of jackpot. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In this embodiment, the ending time for the 4R big hit game is "15 seconds", and the ending time for the 15R big hit game is "5". Seconds". It should be noted that the ending time shown in the present embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, the playability, and the like.

Upon receiving the ending command, the sub control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, the ending effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When this ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, the mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen is mainly composed of an image 701 indicating "production mode C" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode C selection image") and an image 702 indicating "production mode D" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode D selection image"). And are arranged side by side, and an image 703 (hereinafter also referred to as “button image”) imitating the first effect button 63a is arranged between the left and right. The display of such a mode selection screen 700 informs the player that the mode selection period is in progress.

When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is being displayed, the image 701 (mode C selected image) and the image 702 (mode D selected image) to be selected alternate with each operation. It is assumed that the image highlighted and displayed (that is, the effect mode) is displayed as being selected (see FIGS. 62A and 62B ). In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the selected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed (emphasized) in a thick frame and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed darkly (dark display). There is. Therefore, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, and selects the effect mode of the subsequent state C (high-accuracy low base state). can do.

Further, in this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, when 12 seconds have passed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), the countdown display showing the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started on the upper side of the button image (FIG. 62(c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in a mode in which the number image 704 is subtracted by 1 in the order of “3”→“2”→“1” and displayed. This countdown display informs the player that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before end of selection period). When the numerical image 704 becomes "1" in the countdown display, the countdown display ends shortly thereafter, and the mode selection period ends. At this time, the highlighted mode selection image (enclosed by a thick frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). After that, an effect display (not shown) showing the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a until the ending period ends. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as the effect mode of the state C to be subsequently executed (started), and thereafter in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D). The source design game production is executed.

On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state B or C (right-handed game) and the "15R third big hit" occurs, that is, "15R third big hit" occurs as a long-distance hit In this case, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R big hit game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, of the 1R to 15R, the period from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R is the mode selection period. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. , It becomes possible to recognize the start of the round game on the sub-control unit side. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), such as “1R start command”, “2R start command”... “15R start command”.

When the sub-control unit 90 receives a "13R start command" that specifies the start of the round game immediately before the 14R (predetermined round game) that is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the start of 13R, it responds to this. The round effect command to be performed is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the round effect of 13R is executed. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. The display of the notification screen 810 notifies the player that the mode selection period will be started from the next round (14R in the present embodiment) (pre-selection period start notification, first notification means). In this way, after notifying in advance that the production mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started), the production mode is selected in a new mode such that the production mode selection period is generated (started). Selection is possible. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection.

The round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image showing the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1 and the like. The prize ball count image C1 displayed here is additionally displayed for each of the winning balls based on the entrance into the first special winning opening 30 during the big hit game (the reception of the first special winning opening entrance command). It is designed such that it is continuously displayed even in the state C after the big hit game is over, and then the first big hit in the big hit game and the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game. The addition is also displayed when a ball enters the winning opening 30. Therefore, the award ball count image C1 displays the total number of award balls acquired during the consecutive holiday period from the first hit.

Next, when the sub control unit 90 receives the “14R start command” that specifies the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 transmits the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). To do. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 14R round effect is executed. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63(b), a 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed on. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R big hit game described above, and it is assumed that the mode selection screen 700 is reduced. There is. By the display of the mode selection screen 900, the player is informed that the mode selection period is in progress (notification during selection period, second informing means). The effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (switching the mode selection images up and down) is the same as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b). Therefore, detailed description of the effect mode selection in 14R is omitted. The screen configuration (display contents) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from a part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed in the mode selection period during the ending period, and the mode is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

Next, when the sub-control unit 90 receives the “15R start command” that specifies the start of 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 sends the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). ) To. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the 15R round effect is executed. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63(c), the 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed on. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, the countdown display is started when 15R starts. This countdown display is the same as the countdown display on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above (see FIG. 62(c)), and the numerical image is “3”→“2”→as the 15R progresses. It decreases to "1" (see FIG. 63(d)). This countdown display notifies the player that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before end of selection period, third notification means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), whereby the mode selection period ends.

After this, until the end of 15R, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the round effect screen 800, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. This selected effect mode (C or D) is set as the effect mode of the state C to be subsequently executed (started), and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) effect mode (C or D). The source design game production is executed.

In this way, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) occurs, the effect mode of the state C is changed to "the effect mode C at a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit is started. , Or “production mode D”, a mode selection period occurs. Regarding the generation timing (start timing) of this mode selection period, the 4R first big hit occurs in state A (left hitting game) and the 15R third big hit occurs in state B or C (right hitting game). The timing of occurrence differs depending on the case. That is, the occurrence timing of the mode selection period is different between the first hit in the state A in which the left-handed game is played and the continuous hit in the state B or C in the game-played the right-handed game. It has become a thing. In addition, if you take another way of thinking, the type of jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, 4R jackpot game (4R 1st jackpot, 4R 4 jackpot) or 15R jackpot game (15R 3 jackpot) Therefore, the generation timing of the mode selection period is different. For this reason, depending on the game state when the big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the long game) and the type of big hit game to be executed, the time when the effect mode can be selected is different, or the effect mode is selected. It is possible to change the mode.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 4R jackpot game is executed, the mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all round games have ended, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when the 15R big hit game is executed, a mode selection period occurs (starts) in the middle of 14R to 15R (final R) during the big hit game. , A notification screen 810 for notifying that the mode selection period will be started from the next round is displayed (pre-selection period start notification, see FIG. 63(a)), and in 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. It is displayed (notification during selection period, see FIG. 63(b)), and countdown display is executed in 15R (notification before end of selection period, see FIGS. 63(c) and (d)). Thus, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select the effect mode after the completion of all round games, and in the 15R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select the effect mode by the end of all the round games. Given to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to give the player a different impression regarding the effect mode selection.

In addition, the ending period of the 4R jackpot, which has a relatively small number of rounds, is longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot, which has a relatively large number of rounds, and the mode selection period is generated using the ending period of the 4R jackpot. ing. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the negative image for the player that the number of rounds (the number of winning prize balls) is small compared to the 15R big hit and the execution period of the big hit game is short as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Become.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the 15R big hit game is executed, the player is prompted to select the effect mode after the big hit game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in the present embodiment). There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. In addition, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and the notification related to the effect mode selection (the selection period from the start to the end of the mode selection period) Notification before the start, notification during the selection period, notification before the end of the selection period) are performed. This makes it possible for the player not to miss the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Arrangement of Image Display Device]
Next, an arrangement mode of the image display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the three image display devices (display means) of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Of the three image display devices, the first image display device 7 has a display screen 7a (display surface) thereof facing the opening provided in the approximate center of the game board 2 (game area 3). It is provided on the back side (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the left and right sides of the front surface of the front frame 51 (see FIG. 1).

Here, as shown in FIG. 1, in the vertically long rectangular front frame 51, with the front frame 51 closed (closed state), the surface of the game board 2 (game board surface) is in front of the game machine (front side). ) Is provided with a viewing window 51a (viewing portion). The visual recognition window 51a is made of a transparent glass plate, and has a vertically long, substantially elliptical shape that occupies most of the area above the hitting ball supply tray 61. Through the visual recognition window 51a (glass plate), the player can display the game area 3 formed on the surface of the game board 2 and the display screen 7a (display contents) of the first image display device 7 arranged on the back side of the game board 2. ) Etc. can be visually recognized. Further, as described above, the front frame 51 is rotatably supported by the frame hinges 56, 56 provided at the upper and lower corners on one end side (the left side in this embodiment) of the front frame 51. There is.

In the present embodiment, the second image display device 71 is provided on the front surface of such a front frame 51 and on the upper side of one end side (left side) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. The third image display device 72 is provided above the other end (right side) opposite to the end (left side) (see FIG. 1). Each of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is a liquid crystal display device that is smaller than the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3), and has a quadrangular display that is almost square. It has screens 71a and 72a. Further, in the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the respective display screens 71a and 72a maintain a substantially straight state (posture) in a vertical direction (vertical direction) in a front view, while the front frame 51 is maintained. It is configured to be inclined to the side of the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51). As shown in FIG. 1, the degree of inclination of the display screens 71a, 72a is such that the angle between the display screen 71a and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is obtuse for each display screen. It is set to a predetermined angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees), and a player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 can see the display screens 71a and 72a from the front (front side) of the gaming machine. ing. In this way, the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51), so that the game area 3 and the first image display device 7 can be viewed through the viewing window 51a. For a player who plays a game while visually recognizing the display screen 7a (display content), it is possible to visually recognize the display screens 71a and 72a (display content) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 with a small line-of-sight movement. Is possible. The display contents of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 will be described later.

The first image display device 7 provided on the back side of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) is also called “board side display means” or “first display means”, and the front frame 51 (of the game area 3) The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 provided on the outer side) are also referred to as “frame side display means” and “second display means”, and the second image display device 71 is referred to as “first frame”. It is also called "side display means" or "left display means", and the third image display device 72 is also called "second frame side display means" or "right display means".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (first frame side display means) of the frame side display means is provided on the front upper part on one side end (left side) of the front frame 51. The second image display device hinge 75 rotatably supports the front frame 51. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (second frame side display means) is not pivotally supported like the second image display device 71, but is on the other end side (right side) of the front frame 51. ) Is fixed to the upper front. As described above, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are configured (arranged) such that the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51), respectively. However, since the second image display device 71 is horizontally rotatable about the axis of the second image display device hinge 75, the second image display device 71 is in the inclined state (initial state, first state). State) and a state (tilt state, second state) further inclined from the state toward the visual recognition window 51a side. That is, the angle formed between the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is a predetermined first angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees). And an inclined state (second state) in which a predetermined second angle (for example, 80 degrees to 100 degrees) whose angle is smaller than the first angle can be adopted. Has become. On the other hand, since the third image display device 72 is fixed to the front frame 51, the angle formed between the display screen 72a and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is predetermined. The angle is fixed (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees).

In this way, the second image display device 71 is configured to be rotatable so that it can take the initial state (first state) and the tilted state (second state) for the following reason. That is, in the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to lend a game ball (ball lending) based on the value information recorded in a recording medium (game value storage medium) such as a prepaid card. A card unit 135 (a game ball lending device) is provided, and the card unit 135 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control board 110) are connected (see FIG. 5). The card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is usually adjacent to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, the card unit 135 is located on one end side (left side) on which the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are pivotally supported. For this reason. When the front frame 51 is opened or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened, the front frame 51 is an axis of the frame hinges 56, 56 on one side end side (left side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. With the center as the center, the card unit 135 is horizontally rotated to the card unit 135 side (left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). At this time, in the case where the frame side display means or the frame side effect means such as the frame side movable accessory is provided on one end side (the left side front surface of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 and the like are pivotally supported, There is a risk that the frame-side effect means may come into contact with the card unit 135 and hinder the opening of the front frame 51 or the like (rotation toward the card unit 135 side). In this respect, if the second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) to the side of the viewing window 51a which is the side facing the card unit 135 as in the present embodiment, the front frame 51 is formed. When the second image display device 71 is tilted toward the viewing window 51a side (when the second image display device 71 is tilted), the presence of the second image display device 71 hinders the opening of the front frame 51 and the like. Therefore, the front frame 51 and the like can be opened without any trouble.

In addition, in a state where both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are closed, that is, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, the operation unit of the card unit 135 is operated to record on the card (recording medium). It is assumed that the operation position and the card removal position are near the second image display device 71 when the ball is paid out based on the held ball information or the card (recording medium) is taken out from the card unit 135. Also, by tilting the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (in a tilted state), it is possible to smoothly perform the operation, the taking-out, and the like. In consideration of the opening of the front frame 51 and the like and the operation on the card unit 135, the second image display device 71 is rotatable. As a result, the second image display device 71 (first frame side display means, left display means) is provided as frame side display means on one end side (left side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. It is possible to adopt such a novel arrangement mode, and it is possible to make the appearance of the gaming machine feel a novelty that has not existed in the past. In particular, as in the present embodiment, not only the one side end (the left side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported but also the other side end (the front frame 51 of the front frame 51 opposite to the one side end). By providing the third image display device 72 (second frame side display means, right display means) as the frame side display means also on the right side), the front frame 51 forming the front (front surface) of the gaming machine is novel. The novelty of the appearance of the gaming machine becomes even more remarkable. Such novelty in appearance is effective in motivating the player to play.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mechanism (maintaining means) for maintaining the second image display device 71, which can be in the initial state and the tilted state, in the initial state. Specifically, as a means for maintaining the second image display device 71 in the initial state, a torsion coil spring (not shown) that biases the second image display device 71 to one side end (left end side) of the front frame 51. Are provided in the vicinity of the second image display device hinge 75. The second image display device 71 is kept in the initial state by the biasing force of the torsion coil spring (biasing means). Therefore, in order to bring the second image display device 71 into the tilted state, for example, the back surface side (the surface opposite to the display screen 71a) of the second image display device 71 is manually pushed to twist the coil spring (biasing means). The second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) toward the viewing window 51a by applying a force against the urging force of the second image display device 71. Further, when the front frame 51 and the like are opened and the back surface of the second image display device 71 comes into contact with the card unit 135, the force applied to the back surface of the second image display device 71 by the contact causes the second image display device 71 to move. It will be tilted (rotated) to the visual recognition window 51a side. On the other hand, when the force that tilts (rotates) the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (the force that opposes the biasing force of the torsion coil spring) is released, the second image display device 71 causes the torsion coil spring (attachment). The initial state is restored by the urging force of the urging means). This allows the second image display device 71 to be kept in the initial state under the situation where the front frame 51 is in the closed state, so that the display screen 71a (display content) of the second image display device 71 can be visually recognized well. It is possible to secure the sex. Further, the second image display device 71 tilted to the viewing window 51a side automatically returns to the initial state when the tilting force is released, so that the second image display is performed without any special operation or treatment. The device 71 can be reliably brought to the initial state.

[Display contents of image display device]
Next, the display contents of the three image display devices included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect symbol game effect (variation effect), the notice effect (indication effect), Various effect displays such as big hit game effects and demonstration effects can be executed (effect display execution means). In the following, the display content of the image display device will be described with a focus on the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) and the notice effect (indication effect) when the game state is controlled to the state A (low accurate low base state). ..

[Display contents of production design game production]
First, the display contents of the image display device when the effect symbol game effect is executed in the state A will be described. The effect display related to the effect symbol game effect is mainly executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) (see FIG. 54). In the state A, as described above, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode, and therefore the background image corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. The display of the effect symbol 8 is displayed on the display screen 7a under the background display. Then, depending on the fluctuating effect pattern or the notice effect pattern set at the time of starting the change display of the effect pattern 8, the effect display related to the reach effect, the notice effect, or the like is added to the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). It may also be executed in the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). That is, when the effect display is mainly performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 and the effect display is supplementarily performed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. There is. From this, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is also referred to as "main display device" or "main liquid crystal", and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 ( The display screen 72a) is also referred to as a "sub display device" or a "sub liquid crystal".

In the present embodiment, as the variation mode (variation production pattern) of the effect design 8, a variation mode without reach (normal variation) and a variation mode with reach (reach variation) are provided, and as the type of reach production, Normal reach effect and super reach effect (also called "SP reach") are provided. Therefore, when the reach variation is executed, one of the reach effects is set on the basis of the variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table in S4505 described above. When the super reach effect is executed, the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) is set higher than when the normal reach effect is executed.

When the sub-control unit 90 receives the variation start command from the main control unit 80 (S4403) based on such variation effect specifications, the first image display is performed based on the variation effect pattern set in response to this. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of the device 7 (variable display start means). The variation display is a normal variation without reach, a reach variation due to a normal reach effect (also referred to as "normal reach variation"), and a reach variation due to a super reach effect (also referred to as "SP reach variation"), which will be described later. In the case of the SP reach variation excluding the SP reach variation, the variation display and the effect display such as the reach related to the variation are displayed from the start to the end of the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) as shown in FIG. ) And not the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). However, as will be described later, the notice effect (indication effect, suggestion display) related to the variation display and the subsequent variation display (variation display based on the suspension of the special figure) is displayed in the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display. It may be performed on one or both of the image display devices 72 (display screen 72a). Note that FIG. 67 shows an example of normal fluctuation without reach. Further, the effect display related to the reach effect (normal reach change, SP reach change) is also referred to as “specific display”.

Here, a predetermined background image (predetermined display) is usually displayed on the respective display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (predetermined display execution means). This background image is different from the background image (not shown) displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 in which the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed, and the background common to the effect modes A and B. It is an image and is a unique (dedicated) background image (predetermined display) in the case where the effect display relating to the change effect, the notice effect, etc. is not performed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. From this, the background image displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is also referred to as "main background" or "main background", and the background image displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a is referred to as "sub-background". Also called "sub-background". Note that, in FIG. 67 and the like, background images (sub-backgrounds, sub-backgrounds) displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a are shaded.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, when a sub-background is displayed on each of the display screens 71a, 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, one of the display screens 71a (left The display means) displays a variation number image 710 (predetermined display) showing the number of symbol variations. This fluctuation number image 710 shows the number of times (variation number) of execution of variable display of the special symbol (and effect symbol) performed until the next big hit occurs, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed once. Each time (in this embodiment, every time the variation display ends), the variation number indicated by the variation number image 710 is incremented by 1 and displayed. The variation count image 710 is displayed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) based on a variation stop command from the main control unit 80 (predetermined display execution means). On the other hand, an effect mode image 720 (predetermined display) showing the current effect mode is displayed on the display screen 72a (right display means) on which the sub-background is displayed. This effect mode image 720 shows the name of the effect mode indicating the kind of effect mode currently set in the state A (for example, the XX mode corresponding to the effect mode A, the ΔΔ mode corresponding to the effect mode B, etc.). The display is performed based on the mode status set under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) (predetermined display execution means).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the effect design 8 to be executed is the specific SP reach variation of the SP reach variation, as the execution mode of the variation display (effect display) related to the specific SP reach variation, in the present embodiment, There are roughly two modes. Specifically, one of the modes is in the reach state from the beginning of the variation display related to the specific SP reach variation, and the reach effect (specific SP reach effect) related to the variation is displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). ), the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) are executed (also referred to as “first mode”). In another aspect, at the beginning of the variation display related to the specific SP reach variation, the effect display related to the variation is executed only by the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and after the reach is established, the effect content is changed. When developing to SP reach, in addition to the first image display device 7 the effect display related to the variation, any of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) This is a mode in which one or both of them are executed (also referred to as “second mode”).

In the present embodiment, if the ally character and the enemy character confront each other in the contents (production mode) of the specific SP reach production executed in the state A (production mode A or B), if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and the player loses. If the content is out of order. Such a specific SP reach effect is also referred to as “specific effect”. As the specific effects, a first specific effect (effect display based on the first mode) executed based on the first mode (three-screen display from the beginning) and a second mode (initially single-screen display) are executed. The second specific effect that is subsequently executed based on the two-screen display or the three-screen display). Further, as the second specific effect (effect display based on the second aspect), a variable display (specific SP reach effect) including the effect (specific SP reach effect) is initially executed (started) on the first image display device 7. “Second specific effect A” that is also executed later by the second image display device 71, and “second specific effect A” that is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7 and then executed by the third image display device 72. “Specific effect B” and “second specific effect C” that is initially executed (started) on the first image display device 7 and then executed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. ing. Therefore, when the specific SP reach variation is executed, any one of the specific effects (the first specific effect, the second specific effects A to C) causes the variation pattern designation command and the variation in S4505 described above. It is set based on the effect pattern determination table, and the set specific effect is executed (specific display execution means, effect display execution means).

Next, the display content of the image display device when the specific effect is executed will be described. First, when the first specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 68, a state in which reach is established on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 from the beginning of the variable display (effect display) (reach state) ) Is displayed, and an effect display indicating the start of the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character is performed. At this time, the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) in the reach state are respectively displayed small on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, and the effect display indicating the start of the competition on substantially the entire display screen 7a. Is performed (see the middle part of FIG. 68). Further, at this time, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, instead of the sub-background and the number-of-changes image 710, a sub-character on the side of the ally character involved in the battle (battle) related to the specific effect (“ally” (Also called "sub-character") is displayed, and instead of the sub-background and the effect mode image 720, the sub-character on the enemy character side involved in the confrontation (battle) related to the specific effect is displayed on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. A character (also called "enemy sub-character") is displayed (see the middle part of Fig. 68). Then, along with the progress of the variable display, a display scene of the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in the course of the progress, “the ally sub character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the ally character. "Demonstration display", "Demonstration display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Allied sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (allied character side) "Production display", "production display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (on the enemy character side)", and the like.

Thereafter, in the first specific effect, as shown in FIG. 69, an effect display (allied victory scene) in which the ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) wins over the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is performed. Then, the variation is a big hit variation, and the effect design 8 is displayed (stopped display) with a doublet (big hit mode) (see FIG. 69(a)). On the other hand, when an ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) is defeated by an enemy character side (enemy character or enemy sub character) when an effect display (ally defeated scene) is performed, the variation is changed (reach out variation). That is, the effect design 8 is displayed (stopped display) in the reach crossover pattern (disengagement mode) (see FIG. 69(b)).

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect display of the finalization scene (allied victory scene or ally defeated scene) indicating the end of the confrontation in the specific effect (first specific effect, second specific effect A to C) is mainly displayed on the display screen 7a. (Main LCD) executed. Then, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C described later, when the ally winning scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69(a), the display screen 71a on the left side is displayed. Is displayed on the display screen 72a on the right side, and the character "Victory" is displayed on the two sub-liquid crystal display screens. On the other hand, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C described later, when the ally defeat scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69(b), the left display screen 71a is displayed. Is displayed on the right side of the display screen 72a, and the character of "defeat" is displayed on the two sub-liquid crystal display screens.

When the second specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 70, the variable display (effect display) is started on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and when the reach is established thereafter, the The left design (production design 8L) and the right design (production design 8R) stopped (temporarily stopped) due to the establishment of the reach are respectively displayed small on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, and are displayed on the entire display screen 7a as friendly characters The effect display indicating the start of the confrontation of the enemy character is performed, and subsequently, the effect display indicating the confrontation scene of the ally character and the enemy character is started. In the meantime, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, the sub-background and the like are displayed without any special effect display related to the variable display (described later). Except when the notice production is done). Up to this point, the display contents are common to the second specific effects A to C.

When the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect A (display screen 7a→display screens 7a and 71a), effect display of the confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Shortly thereafter, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the display screen 71a gradually decreases, and in the decreasing area, the silhouette of the ally sub character appears. The production display (appearing production of friendly sub-character) is displayed. When the ally sub-character is displayed on the entire display screen 71a through this ally sub-character appearance production, thereafter, a confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses. , "Production display in which the ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the ally character" and "Production display in which the ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (allied character side)" And so on. In such a second specific effect A, when the effect display in which the ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) wins the enemy character (ally victory scene) is performed, the variation is a jackpot variation, and the effect pattern 8 Is displayed (stopped display) as a doublet (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69(a)). On the other hand, when an effect display (ally defeated scene) in which an ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) is defeated by an enemy character is performed, the variation is an outlying variation (reach outlying variation), and the production design 8 Is displayed (stopped display) in a reach cross pattern (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69(b)).

Although the teammate sub-character appearance effect is started on the display screen 71a, the teammate sub-character appearance effect is completed before the teammate subcharacter is displayed on the entire display screen 71a, and the entire display area of the display screen 71a is the sub-background. It is also possible to provide a pattern for returning to the display of. In other words, it is also possible to provide a Gase ally sub character appearance effect. In this case, the SP reach effect is that the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

When the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect B (display screen 7a→display screens 7a and 72a), effect display of the confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 72. Shortly thereafter, on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the entire display screen 72a gradually decreases, and in the decreasing area, the silhouette of the enemy sub-character appears. Is displayed (the enemy sub-character appearance production). When the enemy sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screen 72a through this enemy sub-character appearance production, the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy characters is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses. "Demonstration display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Demonstration display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and participates in the confrontation (enemy character side)", etc. Is done. In such a second specific effect B, when an effect display in which an ally character wins the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) (ally victory scene) is performed, the change is a jackpot change, and the effect pattern 8 Is displayed (stopped display) as a doublet (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69(a)). On the other hand, when an effect display (ally defeated scene) in which an ally character is defeated by the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) is performed, the change becomes an outlier change (reach outlier change), and the effect design 8 Is displayed (stopped display) in a reach cross pattern (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69(b)).

Although the enemy sub-character appearance effect is started on the display screen 72a, the enemy sub-character appearance effect is finished before the enemy sub-character appearance is displayed on the entire display screen 72a, and the entire display area of the display screen 72a is the sub-background. It is also possible to provide a pattern for returning to the display. That is, it is also possible to provide an enemy sub-character appearance effect of Gase. In this case, the SP reach effect is that the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

Furthermore, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect C (display screen 7a→display screens 7a, 71a, 72a), as shown in FIG. 73, the effect display of the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a. Shortly after the start, on the display screens 71a, 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the whole of each display screen gradually decreases, In the decreasing area, the effect display (sub-character appearance effect) in which the silhouette of the ally sub-character (display screen 71a) and the silhouette of the enemy sub-character (display screen 72a) appear is performed. When the sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screen 72a through this sub-character appearance production, the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses, and the "display screen" is displayed. 71a is an effect display in which an ally sub-character supports an ally character", "an effect display in which an enemy sub-character displayed in a display screen 72a supports an enemy character", "an ally sub-character displayed in a display screen 71a is a display screen" 7a and effect display to be added to the confrontation (allied character side)", "effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a is moved to the display screen 7a and added to the confrontation (enemy character side)", etc. .. In such a second specific effect C, if an ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) wins the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) (ally victory scene), the change is a big hit change. That is, the effect design 8 is displayed (stopped display) in a doublet pattern (a big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69(a)). On the other hand, when an ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) is defeated by an enemy character side (enemy character or enemy sub character) when an effect display (ally defeated scene) is performed, the variation is changed (reach out variation). That is, the effect design 8 is displayed (stopped display) in a reach-spaced pattern (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69(b)).

Although the sub-character appearance effects have been started on the display screens 71a and 72a, the sub-character appearance effects in which the ally sub-characters and the enemy sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screens are finished, and the display areas of the display screens 71a and 72a are completed. It is also possible to provide a pattern in which the entire display returns to the sub-background display. That is, it is possible to provide a sub character appearance effect of Gase. In this case, the SP reach effect is that the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

Regarding the jackpot reliability of the second specific effects A to C as described above, the jackpot reliability of the second specific effect A (allied character, ally sub character VS enemy character) is the highest in view of the fact that the ally character wins a big hit. Are set as follows, and in the following, the jackpot reliability is set in the order of the second specific effect C (allied character, ally sub character VS enemy character, enemy sub character) and the second specific effect B (ally character VS enemy character, enemy sub character). It is set to be low.

As mentioned above, the effect symbol game effect which can be executed in the state A has been illustrated, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with other various variable effects (variable effect patterns) with different display contents (effect modes). It is needless to say that this can also be performed using one or more display devices of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Particularly, regarding the effect display (specific display) related to the reach effect, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display, as in the first specific effect and the second specific effect described above. By providing a mode in which one or both of the devices 72 are used for execution, it is possible to further enhance the effect of production.

As described above, when the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is executed in the state A, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is mainly used, and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and The effect display in which one or both of the three-image display device 72 (display screen 72a) is added can be executed. Therefore, after the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7, with respect to the effect display related to the change, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image It is possible to bring the player's attention to the display device 72, and it is possible to display a wide range inside and outside the game area. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect display with an impact, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display and enhance the interest.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the variable display based on the specific SP reach variation is executed, that is, when the specific effects (first specific effect, second specific effect A to C) are executed, the variable display is performed. There is also a mode (first mode) in which the effect display is executed on the three image display devices from the beginning of the above, and the effect display is executed on the first image display device 7 at the beginning of the variable display, and then the second image is displayed. There is also a mode (second mode) in which the effect display is executed by one or both of the display device 71 and the third image display device 72. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display from becoming uniform, and to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed.

Further, when the variable display including the second specific effect is executed, the variable display is initially started by the first image display device 7, and then the reach is established, and the effect display showing the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character. Is started on the display screen 7a, the display area of the sub-background of one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is gradually reduced, and the reduced amount is displayed. The area is changing to the display area for sub character appearance production. That is, the effect of gradually expanding the display area of the effect display related to the variation from the first image display device 7 to one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is executed. It is possible. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the interest in the case where the variable display including the second specific effect is executed.

[Display contents of notice production]
Next, the display content of the image display device when the notice effect is executed in the state A (low accurate low base state) will be described. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the effect holding information (preliminary determination result, etc.) stored in S4402 and the notice effect pattern set in S4506 (see FIG. 52), notice effect (Indication production, suggestion display) can be executed (indication display execution means). In the present embodiment, in state A (low accurate low base state), as a notice effect that can be executed using the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, third image display device 72). , Has multiple types of notice production. Below, 5 types of 1st notice production to 5th notice production are demonstrated among those notice productions. It should be noted that in the notice effect described below, a notice effect (the notice of the variation) that indicates that the display result of the variation display (the variation) currently being executed may be a big hit (a specific display result) is currently stored. There is a notice effect (holding prefetch notice) that suggests that the display result of the variable display executed based on the suspension of the special map is a big hit (specific display result).

First, the first notice effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the first effect hold displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit). It is a notice effect (also referred to as “effect pending notice”) in the display mode of 9a. This first notice effect (effect hold notice) is executed as a hold prefetch notice. State A is a low-probability low-base state, so normally, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Correspondingly to this, in state A, the suspension advance notice is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination (S322) of the acquisition information (first special map suspension) acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 20. It is possible. The control related to the execution of the first notice effect (production hold notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91), and the preliminary determination result of the first special figure hold is the sub control unit 90 (production control). It can be recognized on the sub-control side by the production microcomputer 91) referring to the effect holding information stored in S4402.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the present embodiment, the effect holding notice is given in the display color of the first effect holding 9a. From this, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is provided with the normal color corresponding to the case where the effect hold notice is not given and the notice color corresponding to the case where the effect hold notice is given. There is. The normal color is one type of "white", and the notice color is three types of "blue", "green" and "red". The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) determines whether or not to execute the production hold notice when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 (the first special figure suspension occurs). When the result of the decision to execute is obtained, the effect suspension notice is executed. As a condition for executing the effect pending notice, for example, at least one first special figure hold is stored (special figure 1 hold ball number ≧1), and the first special figure hold stored at that time It is possible to determine that a predetermined execution lottery is performed when the production suspension notice is not given, and that the lottery is won. It should be noted that the execution condition of the effect suspension notice is not limited to this, and for example, it is required that two or more first special figure suspensions are stored, or even if the effect suspension notice is given, further production is effected. The hold notice may be executable.

When executing the production suspension notice, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) executes the display color (preliminary color) of the first production suspension 9a, that is, an execution pattern of the production suspension notice (first notice production pattern). ) Is determined. This determination is performed based on the effect-holding notice deciding table shown in FIG. 74(b), which is a type of notice-leaving effect deciding table, and the effect-holding notice deciding random number which takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) selects, based on the preliminary determination result (production hold information), the first special figure hold that is the target of the production hold notice, and the first special figure hold is "disengaged. "Hold 1", "Loose hold 2", "Loose hold 3", "Big hit hold" is specified, and the corresponding display color of the first effect hold 9a (first notice effect pattern) is specified. , And decides (selects) by referring to the effect pending notice determination table. Here, "outside hold 1" is the first special map hold in which normal fluctuation (outside) is performed, "outside hold 2" is the first special map hold in which normal reach change (outside) is performed, and "outside hold" "3" is the first special figure reservation in which the SP reach variation (disappearance) is performed, and "big hit reservation" is the first special figure reservation in which the big hit variation is performed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is set to be highest when the display color of the first effect suspension 9a is "red", and hereinafter, the jackpot reliability is set in the order of "green" and "blue". Is set to be low (see FIG. 74(b)). In addition to the effect pending color, for example, the effect pending notice can be given based on the difference in the shape (design) or size of the effect pending, and each element such as color, shape, or size. It is also possible to use a combination of In addition, execution timing of the production hold notice is various timings such as when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 (when the first special figure is held) or during the variable display of the production design 8 on the display screen 7a. It is possible to

The second notice effect is executed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the notice effect according to the display mode of the variation number image 710 displayed on the display screen 71a (also referred to as "number notice notice"). ). As described above, when the effect display such as the variable display of the effect design 8 is performed on the first image display device 7 and the sub-background is displayed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display screen 71a is displayed. Displays the variation number image 710 (see FIG. 67 and the like). The second notice effect (notice of number of times display) uses the variation number image 710 (display of the number of variations), and regarding the variation display of the effect symbol 8 being executed on the first image display device 7, the variation display thereof. Is displayed as a big hit (the effect design 8 is displayed in a big hit manner), which is executed as a change notice that suggests that the possibility is higher than usual.

The control related to the execution of the second notice effect (the notice of the number of times display) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (variable effect) is started, the second image is displayed. When the sub-background is displayed on the display device 71, it is determined whether or not to execute the number-of-times display notice by referring to the result of the determination regarding the variation display that starts and the variation mode (variation effect pattern). (Execution lottery, etc.) When executing the number-of-times display notice, by setting the second notice effect pattern (number-of-times display notice pattern) as the notice effect related to the variation display (S4506), the variation display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a. At the same time, it is possible to execute the number of times display notice on the display screen 71a. The number of times display notice is set so that the possibility of execution is higher when the variation display that triggers the execution is SP reach variation (out) or big hit variation than when it is normal variation (out). ing. In the present embodiment, the display color of the variation count image 710 is normally "white", and the display count is changed by changing the display color to "red". It should be noted that the form of the number of times display notice is not limited to the change of the display color of the change number image 710, and may be, for example, the size of the number of times display, the method (calculated numbers, Chinese numerals, etc.), the position, or the like.

The third notice effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). It may be executed. As shown in FIG. 75, this third notice effect is a notice effect with a launch fireworks motif (also referred to as “fireworks notice”), and when the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a, Along with this, fireworks are launched from the display screen 7a toward the display screen 71b, and the background of the display screen 71b becomes the background of the starry sky. The color of the fireworks suggests the jackpot reliability. In this embodiment, four colors of "white", "blue", "green" and "red" are provided as the color of the fireworks, of which "red" has the highest jackpot reliability, and hereinafter "green", The jackpot reliability is set to be lower in the order of “blue” and “white”.

The control related to the execution of the third notice effect (fireworks notice) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). When the control is executed as a hold prefetch notice, the first notice effect (effect hold notice) is executed. ), it is possible to execute the fireworks notice in the same way. That is, when the variable display of the effect design 8 is started, the type of the first special figure hold that triggered the execution of the fireworks advance notice with reference to the first special figure hold (effect hold information) stored at that time ( For example, by specifying (selecting) the fireworks color as the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern) according to the specified type, the display can be displayed Along with the variable display of the effect design 8 on the screen 7a, it is possible to execute a firework notice on the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a. In this case, the firework notice is executed each time the variable display is started until the notice subject reservation that triggered the execution of the fireworks notice (preliminary notice of reservation) is exhausted.

In addition, when executing the fireworks advance notice as the change notice, when starting the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (variation effect), refer to the judgment result or the variation mode (variation effect pattern) of the variation display to be started. Then, by determining (selecting) the color of the fireworks as the third notice production pattern (fireworks notice pattern) (S4506), the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a are displayed together with the variable display of the production design 8 on the display screen 7a. It is possible to carry out fireworks advance notice. The determination (selection) of the third notice production pattern (fireworks notice pattern) can be performed by referring to, for example, a fireworks notice determination table (not shown) as described in the above-mentioned notice of production suspension. ..

The fourth notice effect is executed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) and may be executed as the change notice or as the hold prefetch notice. As shown in FIG. 76, the fourth notice effect is a notice effect (also referred to as “chance zone notice”) in which the characters “background” and the background are displayed on the display screen 72a. When the zone notice) is executed, it is started along with the start of the variable display of the effect design 8 on the display screen 7a. In the present embodiment, there is one type (character display of chance zone) of the effect mode (notice effect pattern) of the fourth notice effect (notice of chance zone). However, it is of course possible to provide a plurality of modes such as the above-mentioned first notice effect (effect pending notice) and the third notice effect (fireworks notice).

The control relating to the execution of the fourth notice production (chance zone notice) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91), but when it is executed as a hold prefetch notice, at least the variable display of the production symbol 8 is displayed. It is possible to execute a chance zone notice on the display screen 72a together with the variable display of the effect design 8 on the display screen 7a, provided that two or more first special figure reservations are stored when starting. Is becoming In this case, the chance zone notice is continuously executed until the notice target hold that triggered the execution of the chance zone notice (holding prefetch notice) is exhausted. For example, three 1st special figure reservation is stored, when executing the chance zone notice for the 3rd 1st special figure reservation, the production design which is based on the 3rd 1st special figure reservation The characters "chance zone" continue to be displayed on the display screen 72a until the variable display 8 is executed. Further, when the chance zone notice is executed as the variation notice, when the variation display (variation production) of the effect symbol 8 is started, the fourth notice production pattern (chance zone notice pattern) is set as the notice production related to the variation display. By setting (S4506), it is possible to change the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a and execute a chance zone notice on the display screen 72a. The chance zone notice, in either the case of executing as a hold prefetch notice or the case of the change notice, is more likely than the case where the first special figure hold or the change display, which is the execution opportunity, is the normal change (out). It is set so that the possibility of execution becomes higher in the case of SP reach fluctuation (out-of-range) or big hit fluctuation.

The fifth notice effect is executed using all of the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). Then, it is executed as a notice of the change associated with the big hit change. In other words, it is a notice effect that confirms the big hit. In the present embodiment, as a mode (variable effect pattern) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 that is performed as a big hit change, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are flat eyes shortly after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8. Has a full-rotation effect in which low-speed fluctuations are performed in a state of being aligned with each other, and the fifth advance notice effect is an effect (“full-rotation advance notice”) that gives advance notice (indication) of execution (occurrence) of the full-rotation effect.

The control related to the execution of the fifth notice effect (notice of all rotations) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). In the case of a big hit variation and an effect mode including all-rotation effect, it is possible to execute the all-rotation notification by setting the fifth notice effect pattern (all-rotation notice pattern) (S4506). In the present embodiment, since the full rotation effect is positioned as a so-called "premier effect", the possibility of executing the full rotation advance notice and the full rotation effect is extremely low.

As shown in FIG. 77, the fifth notice effect (notice of all rotations) of the present embodiment is “all” on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) with the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8. A display located inside the game area 3 for displaying the characters "turn" on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the character "roll" on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). A screen 7a (main liquid crystal) and three display screens 71a, 72a (sub-liquid crystal) located on the left and right of the display screen 7a and outside the game area 3 to display the "full rotation" character Has become. After a while from the execution of the notice of all rotations (display of the letters "all rotations"), one digit of the same number of the effect design is displayed on each of the three display screens, and the three display screens are used for the double eyes (big hit). Aspect) is displayed. That is, when viewed from the front, the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal) has a left symbol (effect symbol 8L), the central display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) has a middle symbol (effect symbol 8C), and the right display screen 72a (right symbol). The right symbol (effect symbol 8R) is displayed on the liquid crystal) with the same number. This corresponds to the start of the full rotation effect. After that, with the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the three display screens aligned with each other, the screens are slowly scrolled from the top to the bottom of each screen (“111” to “999” in ascending order). Fluctuates slowly). After this scroll display (full rotation), any combination of "111" to "999" is stopped and displayed on each of the three display screens, and finally, the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are finally displayed. Is displayed (determined display) on the display screen 7a in a big hit mode.

The above-mentioned first to fifth notice effects may be executed individually, or a plurality of notice effects may be executed at the same time, provided that the image display devices used to execute the notice effects do not overlap. There are also things to do. As an aspect in which a plurality of notice effects are executed at the same time, for example, while the first notice effect (notice of effect hold) is being performed on the first image display device 7, the second notice effect (display of the number of times is displayed on the second image display device 71). (Preliminary notice), or the third notice effect (fireworks notice) is executed on the first image display device 7 and the second image display device 71 while the fourth notice effect (chance zone notice) is performed on the third image display device. There is a mode to execute.

As described above, the notice production (indication production, suggestion display) that can be executed in the state A has been illustrated. It is also possible to execute these using one or more display devices of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Further, not only the state A (production mode A, B) but also the notice production which can be executed in the state B (production mode E) and the state C (production mode C, D), the first image display device 7, the first. It is possible to execute using one or more display devices of the two-image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. Further, a part or all of the above-described first to fifth notice effects may be configured to be executable even in the state B (effect mode E) and the state C (effect modes C and D).

As described above, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), when the notice effect regarding the variable display (indication effect, suggestion display) is executed, the first image Not only the display device 7, but also the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) can execute the notice effect. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the notice effect by the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is located substantially in the center of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) and the left side of the front frame 51 (outside the game area 3). One or more image displays of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) located and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) located on the right side of the front frame 51 (outside the game area 3) Since it is possible to execute the notice effect by the device, it is possible to display a wide range inside and outside the game area 3. As a result, it is possible to provide a noticeable presentation effect that has an impact, and it is possible to increase the variation by increasing the variation of the noticeable presentation effect. In particular, in the all rotation notice (fifth notice effect) for giving notice of the execution of the all rotation effect, the characters "all rotation" are displayed on the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a of the first to third image display devices. , After that, the production symbols of the same number are displayed one digit at a time on each of the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, and full rotation production is performed in a state where the double stitches are maintained, and among "111" to "999". After any one of the combinations is stopped and displayed by the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, the effect design 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) is finally stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the big hit mode on the display screen 7a. It Thereby, with respect to the stop display (display of the stop effect symbol) of the effect symbol 8 mainly performed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the variation of the display of the stop effect symbol is increased and the stop effect symbol is displayed. It will be possible to increase the interest in the event.

In executing the first to fifth notice effects by the first to third image display devices, a plurality of notice effects are performed at the same time (with the same variable display) on condition that the image display devices used do not overlap. It is possible to execute. In this case, since the notice effects of different modes are executed on the respective image display devices, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention to the notice effects that are compositely executed. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's expectation.

[Other display contents]
As described above, the effect design game effect (variation effect) and the notice effect are usually executed in the first image display device 7 corresponding to the main liquid crystal, and when the specific change effect or the notice effect is executed, One or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, which correspond to liquid crystal, are used. Then, when such a specific change effect or notice effect is not executed, the sub-background, the change count image 710, and the effect mode image 720 are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. (See FIG. 67 and the like). In the present embodiment, it is possible to display various information on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 in addition to the variation number image 710 and the effect mode image 720.

For example, on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), it is possible to display information regarding the setting of the gaming machine during a game or waiting for a customer (standby). As the information on the setting of the gaming machine, for example, the volume of the sound effect (effect sound) output from the speaker 67, the brightness (luminance) of the display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, the appearance rate of the predetermined change effect or the notice effect. There is information about the production environment. In this embodiment, on the left side of the upper surface of the hitting ball supply plate 61 (upper plate) (to the left of the first effect button 63a), in addition to the first effect button 63a, an operation means such as an operation lever that can be operated by the player ( (Not shown) is provided, and by operating the operation means while waiting for a customer (standby) or during a game, the above-mentioned information regarding the production environment is displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). It is supposed to be done. The player can operate the operating means for the effect environment based on the displayed information to set the effect environment according to his/her preference. The operation means provided on the left side of the upper surface of the hitting ball supply plate 61 (upper plate) is operated. During the game, the firing handle 60 provided on the lower right part of the front of the game machine is operated with the right hand. This is because it is considered that the player's right hand is occupied and the left hand is vacant because the player shoots a game ball. In this way, by performing the setting related to the production environment by using the operation means located on the left side of the center of the gaming machine or the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), during the game (of the firing handle) It is possible to enhance the convenience by making it possible to perform the setting operation without any trouble even during the operation.

Further, for example, on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), information regarding specifications such as a jackpot probability and a probability variation ratio (probability variation rush rate) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed while waiting for a customer (standby). It is possible. By thus displaying the information regarding the specifications on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) provided on the front frame 51, for example, for a person who selects a gaming machine (model) to play in a gaming hall. , The front of the game machine without looking at the image display device (main liquid crystal) provided on the back side (inside the game area) of the game machine in the waiting state (standby state) from the front side (front side) of the game machine It is possible to confirm the specs simply by looking at the display screen of the image display device (outside the game area) protruding to the side. As a result, it becomes possible to easily select the model to play in the game hall. The information regarding the specifications may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a).

As described above, when the effect display related to the specific variation effect or the notice effect is not executed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the sub-background or the sub-background is displayed on those display devices (display screens 71a and 72a). It is possible to perform other display (predetermined display) that does not interfere with the performance performed by the first image display device 7, such as the number-of-variations image 710, the effect mode image 720, information about settings of the gaming machine, information about specifications, and the like. Is becoming As a result, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 can be effectively used.

[Specific reach production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78 and FIG. 79, a specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149 that is one aspect of the reach effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment has will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment in terms of specifications such as winning/probability determination probabilities and control surfaces, and therefore description thereof will be omitted. In the specific reach effect 149, during the execution of the reach effect (may be from the beginning of the reach effect, or may be in the middle of the execution of the reach effect), the specific effect pattern (“7” in this embodiment) is always used. The reach production in is executed. Therefore, when the specific reach effect 149 is executed and a big hit occurs, the big hit symbol of the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the big hit (big hit type) when this specific effect design is stopped and displayed as a big hit design is a big hit (specific big hit) advantageous to the player. Specifically, in the present embodiment, this particular jackpot is a jackpot (first identifying result) in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is over is a low probability high base state. Therefore, when the specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149 is generated, the player can increase the sense of expectation for the generation of an advantageous big hit and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of reach effects (game effects) having different execution modes (effect modes), including a specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149, as a reach effect (game effect). ing. Also, depending on the reach effect (game effect) to be executed, the effect symbol (special symbol) may be stopped and displayed in the big hit mode (the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is the big hit), that is, the big hit reliability is different. It is said that

FIG. 78(a) shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect design 8 is started. 78(b), during the execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78(a), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same effect symbol ("7"), It shows a scene in a reach mode. The effect symbol "7" is also referred to as a first specific symbol 146 (specific symbol). When the big hit in the first specific symbol 146 ("777"), when the big hit in the second specific symbol 147 (non-specific symbol) (for example, "444"), the big hit that is advantageous to the player is executed. To be done. In addition, when the big hit in the first specific symbol 146, the big hit is a big hit (first specified result) advantageous to the player who surely generates a highly accurate low base state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the second specific symbol 147, the big hit becomes a disadvantageous big hit (the second specified result) which may not generate a high-accuracy low base state after the big hit game ends (in some cases).

FIG. 78(c) shows "Thunder reach (specific reach effect, specific game effect)" in which the character A appears as a reach effect (game effect) while the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78(b) is being executed. Is executed. As shown in FIG. 78(c), a reach type display unit 141 (game effect type display unit) indicating the type (name) of the reach effect to be executed is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, and "Thunder reach" is displayed. Is displayed. In addition, a character A performing a predetermined motion during Thunder Reach is displayed at a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a. Further, on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, the effect symbol (the first specific symbol 146) of "7" which is the reach symbol (reach effect symbol) is displayed. It should be noted that the reach symbol (the first specific symbol 146) has a smaller size when displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a than when displayed near the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 78(b). Is displayed.

FIG. 78(d) shows an execution mode of Thunder reach (specific reach effect) while the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78(c) is being executed. Specifically, it is an effect in which the character A 144 throws the lightning pattern 145 to the medium effect design 8L that is variably displayed and stabs the lightning pattern 145 to the predetermined medium effect pattern 8L. Then, when the lightning pattern 145 is stuck in the same medium effect design (“7”) as the reach symbol (first specific symbol 146), it becomes a big hit and becomes a medium effect symbol different from the reach symbol (first specific symbol 146). If stabbed, it will come off. In FIG. 78(d), a scene in which the lightning pattern 145 is stuck in the same medium effect design (“7”) as the reach pattern (first specific pattern 146) (that is, a scene in which the player is notified of confirmation of a big hit) Showing.

As a result of Thunder Reach, FIG. 78(e) shows a scene in which all the left, right, and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed (confirmed stop display) with the first specific symbol 146 (“7”), and the big hit is confirmed. 78(f) shows that the lightning pattern 145 is stuck in the middle effect symbol (“6”) different from the reach symbol (the first specific symbol 146) during the execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78(c). A scene (that is, a scene in which the player is informed of the disconnection) is shown. In FIG. 78(g), as a result of Thunder Reach, the left and right effect symbols are the first specific symbol 146 (“7”), and the intermediate effect symbol is a stop effect display (“6”) different from the reach symbol (determined stop). It is displayed), and the scene where the deviation is confirmed is shown. Thus, in the specific reach effect 149 (thunder reach), the effect symbol is always in the reach mode with the first specific symbol (specific symbol), and the reach effect is executed. And when it becomes a big hit in the specific reach effect 149 (Thunder reach), it always becomes a big hit with the first specific symbol (specific symbol), and a big hit relatively advantageous to the player is executed.

Next, another execution mode of the specific reach effect 149 (thunder reach) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79(a) shows a scene where the variable display of the effect design 8 is started. 79(b), while performing the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79(a), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same effect symbol ("6") ( The intermediate presentation pattern continues to be displayed variably), showing a scene in a reach mode. In addition, the effect symbol “6” is also referred to as a second specific symbol 147 (specific symbol). In the case of a big hit (“666”) with the second specific symbol 147, there is a possibility that a big hit with a lesser advantage (a disadvantage) for the player than with the big jackpot with the first specific symbol is executed. Is high. Specifically, a big hit with a low advantage for the player may be always executed, and a big hit similar to the case where the big hit with a low advantage is executed and the big hit with the first specific symbol is executed. There may be cases where it is done.

79(c) shows a scene in which "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is executed as a reach effect (game effect) while the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79(b) is being executed. There is. In this way, in the present embodiment, the "thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is the case where the effect symbol 8 is the reach mode with the first specific symbol 146 and the second specific symbol 147. , Are all reachable effects (game effects). However, in the case of "Thunder reach (specific reach production)", the production symbol is always the first specific symbol (specific symbol) in the reach mode, and when "Thunder reach (specific reach production)" is a big hit, it is always the first. It is a big hit with one specific symbol (specific symbol), and a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player is executed.

79(d) to (f) show the reach symbol (“6”) from the second specific symbol 147 (“6”) during execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79(c). The scene which performs the symbol change effect 148 (change effect) which changes to 1 specific symbol 146 ("7") is shown. In FIG. 79(d), the left and right reach symbols (“6”) displayed in the first position 142 (first display area) on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are enlarged and swayed and displayed. The scene which moves to the 2nd position 143 (2nd display area) below the center part of the screen 7a is shown. By displaying the reach symbol in an enlarged manner and moving it to a position closer to the center of the display screen, it is possible to reliably notify (visualize) the occurrence of the symbol change effect 148 (change effect itself) to the player. Become.

79(e) and (f) show an execution mode (effect mode) of changing from the second specific symbol 147 (“6”) to the first specific symbol 146 (“7”) in the symbol change effect 148. There is. FIG. 79(g) shows a scene in which the changed reach symbol (“7”) is displayed in the enlarged state at the second position 143 in the symbol change effect 148. This surely informs the player that the reach symbol in the "thunder reach (specific reach effect)" has changed from the second specific symbol 147 ("6") to the first specific symbol 146 ("7"). It becomes possible to do. As a result, the player enhances the interest of the game. Further, FIG. 79(h) ends the symbol change effect 148, moves and displays the changed reach symbol (“7”) from the second position 143 to the first position (returns to the original position), and reaches. The scene in which the design is reduced and displayed (returned to the original size) is shown.

After that, the reach symbol is set to "7" of the first specific symbol 146, and "thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is started. Note that the execution mode after FIG. 79(h) is the same as that of FIGS. Further, in the middle of execution of "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)", the left and right effect symbols may be displayed only on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a. That is, in the specific reach effect, the time when all of the left and right middle effect symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol is displayed on the second display screen 71a outside the game area, and the right effect symbol is the third outside the game area. The time of displaying on the display screen 72a may be included. Accordingly, by displaying a part or all of the effect design on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a outside the display area, the character effect is made more prominent on the display screen 7a, and the player reaches the specific reach effect. It becomes possible to draw attention.

In the second embodiment, the specific reach effect 149 is a game effect that can be executed in a specific game state among a plurality of game states. Specifically, the specific reach effect is a game effect that can be executed in a low accurate low base state (a normal effect mode described later), and other game states (low accurate high base state, high accurate low base state, high accurate high In the base state), the specific reach effect is set not to be executed. That is, the specific reach effect in which the character A appears is a game effect that can be executed only in the normal effect mode, and the super effect mode (first super effect mode, second super effect mode), first count effect mode, second It is not executed in the count production mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from getting tired by changing the game effects that can be executed in each game state (depending on the effect mode being executed).

[Advance notice]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the notice effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, with the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol), the result of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) can be a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol). The notice effect showing the nature (big hit game execution possibility) is executed. In the second embodiment, there are four types of notice effects (fourth notice effect, fifth notice effect, sixth notice effect, seventh notice effect) shown in FIG. 80, and these notice effects are changed in the effect symbol. Along with the display, it is displayed on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. Further, these notice effects have different jackpot game executability (also referred to as "big hit reliability") indicated by the notice effects. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, the fourth notice effect <the fifth notice effect <the sixth notice effect <the seventh notice effect is set, and the jackpot reliability of the fourth notice effect is the lowest. 7 The big hit reliability of notice production is set to the highest.

Thereby, when the fourth notice effect and the fifth notice effect are executed along with the variation display of the effect symbols, the degree of expectation of a big hit is low, so it is difficult to enhance the entertainment of the game, but the sixth notice effect. When the 7th notice effect is executed, the expectation of a relatively big hit is high, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, the player performs the game while expecting that the sixth notice effect and the seventh notice effect will be executed as the notice effect during the variable display of the effect symbols.

Specifically, the fourth notice production 151 is a production mode in which the jackpot reliability is set to 2% and the character B152 imitating a boy appears at a predetermined timing. The fifth preliminary announcement effect 153 is an effect mode in which the jackpot reliability is set to 4% and the character C154 imitating a fish appears at a predetermined timing. The sixth notice production 155 has a jackpot reliability set to 33%, and is a production mode in which a character D156 imitating a silhouette of a human running at a predetermined timing and a character E157 imitating a southern island appear. The sixth notice effect 155 (first game effect) has the jackpot reliability set to 33%, and the fourth notice effect 151 (second game effect) and the fifth notice effect 153 (second game effect). By comparison, it is said to be a notice production with a high probability of a big hit.

Further, among the plurality of characters (characters D and E) appearing in the sixth notice effect 151, the character D (specific character) represents the specific character in a silhouette mode, and a game profit (prize ball) acquisition effect described later. Is also a character that appears in. The character D (specific character) commonly appears in a situation where there is a relatively high possibility of being advantageous to the player (when the game effect is executed) or in a situation of being advantageous to the player. Further, the character D (specific character) is set so as to appear in common in a plurality of scenes. However, the same character data may be used in common for this, or the data used differs depending on the appearance scene. May be characters having the same shape (appearance to the player), or may be characters having similar shapes but different sizes. Further, as long as characters having the same shape (including similar shapes) are included, other characters (decoration) may be added to other portions. The colors may be different. It suffices if the characters appearing in a plurality of scenes are similar enough that the player can recognize that they are the same character (all are running human silhouette characters).

Further, the seventh notice effect 158 has a jackpot reliability set to 45%, and a plurality of (many) characters F159 imitating a bird appear. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the seventh notice production 158 is set to 45%, and compared to the fourth notice production 151 and the fifth notice production 153, the notice performance is highly likely to be a big hit.

In addition, an execution mode of the fourth notice effect 151 to the seventh notice effect 158 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 70A shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect design 8 is started. 81(b) to 81(e) are different variable displays, and after changing from the scene of FIG. 81(a) to any of FIGS. 81(b) to 81(e), FIG. ). Further, since the jackpot reliability varies depending on the notice effect, the result of the reach mode shown in FIG. 81(f) can be a big hit depending on which notice effect has been passed and then the scene of FIG. 81(f) has been entered. Sex (expectation) is different.

81(b) shows a scene in which the character B152 of the fourth notice effect 151 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene in FIG. 81(a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81(a). 81(c) shows a scene in which the character C154 of the fifth notice effect 153 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene in FIG. 81(a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81(a). 81(d) shows a scene in which the character D156 and the character E157 of the sixth notice effect 155 are displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene in FIG. 81(a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81(a). There is. 81(e) shows a scene in which the character F159 of the seventh notice effect 158 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene in FIG. 81(a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81(a).

[Game profit acquisition production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the game profit acquisition effect of the second embodiment will be described. The game profit acquisition effect is an effect showing how much game profit is acquired in the specific state when the game state is in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called condominium state (condominium period), and in the low-probability low base state (state A), the gaming state becomes the low-probability low base state again when the big hit occurs. Up to (excluding jackpot game state) state. This is an effect showing the amount of game profit acquired in this specific state.

FIG. 82(a) shows a big hit (4R first big hit) in a low accurate low base state, a big hit game (4R first big hit game) related to the big hit is being executed, and is displayed on the round display portion 161. As it is, it shows the execution scene of the 4th round game which is the final round ((F) shows the final round). That is, it is a big hit that occurs in a low accurate low base state (normal state) and is a so-called first hit. And a specific state starts from this big hit (big hit game). Further, at the lower center of the display screen 7a, there is provided an earned profit display unit 166 showing the amount of game profit (the number of prize balls) obtained in the big hit game, and by displaying "00550pt", the game profit of about 550 balls is provided. It is shown that the (prize ball) has been paid out (obtained). Since the big hit shown in FIG. 82(a) is the first big hit game in the specific state, the gained game profit displayed in the gained profit display unit 166 is the total gained game profit in the specific state (specific period). Become. Therefore, the earned profit display unit 166 shown in FIG. 82A is also referred to as a total earned profit display unit 164.

In addition, a jackpot game effect 163 in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle each other is displayed at a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a during the jackpot game. Then, in FIG. 82(a), since the effect in which the teammate character defeats the enemy character is displayed, it is possible for the player to shift the game state after the jackpot game is finished to a game state relatively advantageous to the player. It is shown. Incidentally, in the big-hit game effect, when the ally character's effect of defeating the enemy character is displayed, the game state after the big-hit game is finished becomes a relatively advantageous game state (high-accuracy low base state) for the player. When the effect in which the enemy character defeats the teammate character is displayed, the game state after the big hit game is finished is shifted to a game state relatively low for the player (low accurate high base state). In addition, in the case of transitioning to the highly accurate and high base state (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit), the player displays that the enemy character defeats the teammate character and once shifts to the disadvantageous game state. As shown in FIG. 7, when the variation display number of the effect symbol (special symbol) reaches a predetermined number (50 times or 100 times) after the big hit game, it is notified that it is in an advantageous state.

FIG. 82B shows the ending period after the end of the final round (4 rounds) of the big hit game (4R first big hit game) shown in FIG. 82A. On the display screen 7a, the big hit game is finished, the game state after the big hit game is shifted to a state C (high-accuracy low base state) that is advantageous to the player, and the earned game profit in the big hit game is "00600pt". It was shown that it was. FIG. 82(c) shows a scene in which a transition from the state of FIG. 82(b) to the state C has been performed, and variable display of effect symbols (special symbols) has been performed a predetermined number of times. In FIG. 82(c), the specific state (the condominium state) continuing from FIG. 82(a) continues, and “T:00650pt” is displayed in the total gained profit display portion 164 shown in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The display is made, and it is shown that the total gained game profit in the above-mentioned big hit game and the subsequent state C is “650 pt”. In this embodiment, it is possible to increase the gained game profit not only during the big hit game but also in the state C. A firing direction display unit 162 is provided at the upper right portion of the display screen 7a to notify the player of the firing direction of the game ball. In addition, the effect for state C is displayed in a predetermined display mode at a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a.

82(d), after the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times from FIG. 82(c), the result of the variable display of the prescribed effect symbol (special symbol) is a big hit, and the big hit symbol ( “777”) indicates a scene in which the display is stopped. FIG. 82(e) is executing the big hit game (15R third big hit game) relating to the big hit shown in FIG. 82(d), and shows the execution scene of the second round game. At the center upper part of the display screen 7a, a total earned profit display unit 164 showing the total game profit at a specific state (specific period) is provided, and at the lower center of the display screen 7a, the big hit game being executed (15R An earned profit display unit 166 showing the current earned game profit in the third jackpot game) is provided. In addition, a big hit game effect 163 in which the teammate character and the enemy character are in battle is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a.

FIG.82(f) has shown the scene which the round game progressed to the 15th round which is the last round in the same big hit game as FIG.82(e). The display of the acquired profit display unit 166 increases to “02050pt”, and accordingly, the display of the total acquired profit display unit 164 increases to “02750pt”. In addition, since a teammate character defeats an enemy character is displayed as a big round game effect for the final round, the game state after the big hit game is relatively advantageous to the player (state C, highly accurate). The player has been shown to transition to a low base state).

FIG. 83(g) shows the ending period after the end of the final round (15 rounds) of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) shown in FIG. 82(f). On the display screen 7a, the big hit game is finished, the game state after the big hit game is changed to a state C (high-accuracy low base state) that is advantageous to the player, and the big hit game (15R third big hit game) It is shown that the acquired game profit was “02200pt” and the total acquired game profit in the specific state was “02900pt”. FIG. 83(h) shows a scene in which a transition from the state of FIG. 83(g) to the state C is performed and the effect symbols (special symbols) are variably displayed a predetermined number of times. In FIG. 83(h), the specific state (state of condominium) continuing from FIG. 82(a) continues, and “T:03500pt” is displayed in the total gained profit display portion 164 shown at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The display is made, and it is shown that the total gained game profit in the above-mentioned plurality of big hit games and the state C executed during that time is "03500pt".

83(i) is after performing the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) a predetermined number of times from FIG. 83(h), and after a predetermined number of jackpot games, a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol). The result of the variable display is a big hit, and the big hit symbol (“777”) is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that also in FIG. 83(i), the specific state (the condominium state) continuing from FIG. 82(a) continues. FIG. 83(j) is executing the big hit game (15R third big hit game) related to the big hit shown in FIG. 83(i), and shows the execution scene of the 12th round game. The display of the acquired profit display unit 166 becomes “01850pt”, and the display of the total acquired profit display unit 164 increases to “09950pt”.

FIG. 83(k) is the same 12th round in the same big hit game as FIG. 83(j), and shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 83(j). As shown in FIG. 83(k), the obtained game profit in the big hit game being executed is "01900pt", and as a result, the total game profit in the specific state is "10000pt". In this pachinko game machine 1, the fact that the total gained gaming profit is “10000 pt” is a standard that the specific state has continued for a long time and a large amount of gaming profit (prize ball) has been earned. That is, the situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in order to show the advantageous situation to the player, a specific profit display portion 167 is provided at a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a.

The specific profit display unit 167 is provided in response to the acquired profit displayed on the total profit display unit 164 being “10000 pt”, and the amount of total acquired game profit exceeds the specific amount on the specific profit display unit 167. “10000 ptOVER” indicating that (the amount has become a specific amount) is displayed. Further, in the specific profit display portion 167, the character D156 (specific character) is displayed together with the display of “10000 ptOVER”. As a result, it is advantageous for the player that the player is in a specific state (a state of condominium) and that a large amount of gaming profit can be obtained, that is, that "10000 pt" has been obtained as an earned profit. Is easily recognizable.

As described above, the character D156 (specific character) is a character used as a notice performance with a relatively high jackpot reliability, and the display mode also imitates a running human silhouette similar to the notice effect. Since it is the display mode, the player can easily recognize that the same character is used. In this way, by using a character similar to the character (specific character) used in the game production with high jackpot reliability, the current game situation, that is, the situation in which the game profit of “10000 ptOVER” is obtained, is for the player. It is possible to easily grasp the favorable situation. Further, although all the characters appearing in the sixth notice effect 155 may be used, in the present embodiment, only the character D is used as the common character. That is, it is sufficient if at least some characters are common in both scenes.

Further, in order for the player to surely recognize the display mode (“10000 ptOVER” and the specific character) of the specific profit display unit 167, a specific time (“4 s” in this embodiment) from the time when the total acquired game profit becomes 10,000 pt. ) Display continuously. In the meantime, even when the display of the total gained profit display unit 164 exceeds “T: 10000pt”, the display mode of the specific profit display unit 167 is maintained as “10000ptOVER” (the specific character also continues the display. To). Further, in order for the player to surely recognize the display mode of the specific profit display unit 167, the amount of profit (“10000 pt”) displayed on the specific profit display unit 167 is displayed on the total gained profit display unit 164 ( It is displayed in a larger size than "10000pt". Further, the profit amount displayed on the specific profit display unit 167 (“10000 pt”) is displayed in a larger size than the profit amount displayed on the acquired profit display unit 166 (“01900 pt”).

In addition, the specific amount (“10000” pt) that triggers the display of the specific profit display portion 167 is set to an amount that cannot be acquired by one big hit game even if it is a big hit game that can obtain the most game profit. .. Further, in the present embodiment, since the gained gaming profit can be increased even in the state C, one big hit game and the state C continue for a long time (that is, a small hit game is generated many times). Although it is possible to obtain a specific amount of game profit, usually, a specific amount of game profit is obtained by generating a plurality of big hit games. Therefore, it is not possible to obtain a specific amount of game profit only by the game profit obtained by one big jackpot game, but it is possible to obtain a specific amount of game profit by generating multiple jackpot games. It can be said that it is possible.

Further, in FIG. 83(k), the case where the amount of total gained gaming profit exceeds the specific amount (“10000 pt”) during the big hit game has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is not in the big hit game, but in a specific state, and in a state other than the big hit game (high accurate low base state, high accurate high base state, low accurate high base state) The amount of game profit may exceed a specific amount (“10000 pt”). FIG. 83(l) shows such a situation, and when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is in the state C, the amount of the total gained gaming profit due to the occurrence of the small hit game is a specific amount (“10000 pt”). It shows the scene beyond. As shown in FIG. 83(l), in the lower center part of the display screen 7a, a total earned profit display unit 164 is provided, "T: 10000pt" is displayed, and the total earned gaming profit is "10000pt". It is shown that.

Further, in response to this, similar to FIG. 83(k), a specific profit display portion 167 is provided in the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a. Then, the specific profit display unit 167 displays "10000 ptOVER" indicating that the amount of the total gained gaming profit exceeds (becomes the specific amount). Further, in the specific profit display portion 167, the character D156 (specific character) is displayed together with the display of “10000 ptOVER”. As a result, it is advantageous for the player that the player is in a specific state (a state of condominium) and that a large amount of gaming profit can be obtained, that is, that "10000 pt" has been obtained as an earned profit. Is easily recognizable. Also, when the total gained game profit is "10000pt" in the state C, the player can surely recognize the display mode ("10000ptOVER" and the specific character) of the specific profit display unit 167 as in the big hit game. Therefore, after the total gained gaming profit reaches 10,000 pt, it is continuously displayed for a specific time (“4 s” in this embodiment).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, by displaying a common character in a plurality of advantageous situations, such as a situation in which the jackpot is highly reliable and a large amount of game profit can be obtained. It is possible to increase the appearance frequency of the character (specific character) that appears in a situation that is advantageous to the player. Further, by causing the specific character to appear in a plurality of advantageous situations in this manner, the player who sees the specific character in one scene can see the other scene from the experience of seeing the specific character in the previous advantageous situation. It is possible to intuitively recognize that the current situation may be an advantageous situation when looking at the specific character. As described above, in a gaming machine having a wide variety of game effects, by causing a specific character to appear in an appropriate scene, the contents of the game effects (e.g., jackpot reliability and advantageous degree) can be efficiently provided to the player. It becomes possible to inform (recognize) to. As a result, the player can easily understand the game machine and enhance the interest of the game.

[Mode of mode transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the effect mode (effect mode) executed in each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The types of big hits, the types of game states to be transferred after the end of big hits, etc. are the same as those in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6 and the like). The game state in the initial state after the power is turned on is a low-probability low base state, and the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode 181 (third specific effect mode)" shown in FIG. 86(a). The means for setting a predetermined effect mode from a plurality of effect modes is also referred to as "effect mode setting means". In the second embodiment, the “production mode setting means” is provided in the sub control unit 90.

In the normal production mode (low accuracy low base state), while the game (special symbol win/loss judgment, variable display of special symbols/effect symbols, etc.) is being executed, the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment (first special symbol win/loss judgment) is a big hit. Then, the big hit special symbol (big hit effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit game is executed. As described in the first embodiment, similarly in the second embodiment, in the low-probability low base state, the game ball is shot in the left game area and the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol winning/absence determination) is performed. It has become the main game, and in the high-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy low-base state, low-accuracy high-base state, shoot a game ball in the right game area to display the variation of the second special symbol (second special The game is mainly based on the determination of whether or not the symbol is valid.

Big hits as a result of the first special symbol hit determination that can occur in the normal effect mode (low accurate low base state) are 4R first big hit and 4R second big hit. When the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a predetermined ratio when the 4R first big hit is reached (for example, 50% when the 4R first big hit is reached), and/or during the big hit game In addition, the "first bonus (4R first big hit game)" that informs (indicates) the player that the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game will be the super effect mode (high accurate low base state) To be executed. When the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed, the player can easily recognize that the game state shifts to the player's advantageous game state after the big hit game, so that the player can play the game with a sense of security. It will be possible. That is, when the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed along with the big hit game, it is sure to shift to the super effect mode (high accurate low base state) after the end of the big hit game. It should be noted that there are two types (a plurality of types) of production modes in the super production mode shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 86(c).

In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a predetermined ratio when the 4R first big hit (remaining ratio, for example, 50% when the 4R first big hit), and the 4R second big hit When it becomes, "the 2nd bonus (4R 1st big hit game)" is executed. In the second bonus (second bonus effect), when the big hit or/and during the big hit game, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game shifts to the count effect mode (low accurate high base state). An effect is given to inform (suggest) the player to do. However, even when the second bonus is executed, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination is the 4R first big hit, the effect mode after the big hit game is not the count effect mode. , Transition to super production mode (high-accuracy low-base state). The production mode of the count effect mode (first count effect mode) that can be shifted from the first special symbol winning/disabling judgment is the mode shown in FIG. 86(d).

That is, when the second bonus (second bonus effect) is executed along with the big hit game, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game shifts to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) ( 4R first big hit) and a case of shifting to the count effect mode (low accurate high base state) (when 4R second big hit). Further, when the second bonus is transferred to the super effect mode, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by performing promotion effect indicating that the game is transferred to the super effect mode during the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game. .. Therefore, even when the second bonus effect is executed, the player can maintain a high interest in the game for a long time without expecting the promotion effect, without losing the expectation of the advantageous game state. Becomes

A plurality of effect modes are provided in the super effect mode executed in the high-accuracy low-base state as in the first embodiment, and the player can select one of the effect modes at a predetermined timing such as during a big hit game. It is possible to select using the effect button (see FIG. 86(f)). Further, as selectable effect modes, a first super effect mode 182 (first effect mode, specific effect mode) and a second super effect mode 183 are provided. During the execution of these super effect modes, the game state is set to the high-accuracy low base state, and as described in the first embodiment, it is possible to increase the amount of the gained game profit by the small hit game. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player. The super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) continues until the next big hit (first bonus, third bonus, or fourth bonus) occurs.

When the first count effect mode (count effect mode, second effect mode) executed in the low accurate high base state does not become a big hit until the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) of a predetermined number of times (100 times) is finished , The game state shifts to the normal effect mode. As a result, the gaming state shifts from the low certainty high base state to the low certainty low base state (the most unfavorable gaming state for the player). As described above, in the super effect modes 182, 183 (high-accuracy low base state) and the first count effect mode (low-accuracy high base state), the variation time of the second special symbol becomes a time saving state, and the game ball is in the right game area. Is emitted and the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol judgment).

Then, in the super effect mode 182, 183 or the first count effect mode, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is 15R third big hit, "third bonus (15R third big hit game)" is executed It The third bonus is a big win most advantageous to the player, in which the game profit that can be obtained is the largest and the game state after the big hit game is set to the super production mode. Therefore, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed, the player can easily recognize that the game state (super effect mode, high-accuracy low base state) advantageous to the player is transferred after the big hit game. Therefore, it becomes possible to play the game with a sense of security. That is, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed along with the big hit game, it is sure to shift to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) after the end of the big hit game.

In addition, in the super production mode 182, 183 or the first count production mode, if the result of the second special symbol winning/deciding determination is the 4R fourth big hit, the "first bonus (4R fourth big hit game)" is executed. It Since the 4R fourth big hit game and the 4R second big hit game are similar big hit games (the number of times the big winning opening is opened, the opening time, etc.), the first bonus effect of the same effect mode is executed. Further, as described above, by the first bonus effect, after the big hit game, it is possible to easily recognize that the game state shifts to a player's advantageous game state, so that it is possible to play the game with a sense of security.

Further, in the super production mode 182, 183 or the first count production mode, the result of the second special symbol hit determination is 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit. In this case, the “fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, or 2R eighth big hit game)” is executed. In the fourth bonus (fourth bonus effect), when the big hit or/and during the big hit game, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game shifts to the count effect mode (low accurate high base state). An effect is given to inform (suggest) the player to do. However, even when the fourth bonus is executed, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is the 2R fifth big hit or the 2R sixth big hit, the effect mode after the big hit game end, Although it transits to the count production mode (second count production mode) once, when the variable display of the special design (production design) has passed the predetermined number (50 times or 100 times) (if it is not a big hit in the meantime), production The mode shifts to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state, second specific effect mode). That is, when the count effect mode is executed in the highly accurate and high base state, and the count effect mode is the second count effect mode, then the game state shifts to the highly accurate and low base state, and the effect mode is super. The mode shifts to the effect mode (second specific effect mode). In addition, "50 times" or "100 times", which is the number of times to shift the effect mode described above, is also referred to as a specific number of times.

On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination is 2R 7 big hit or 2R 8 big hit, the effect mode after the big hit game is finished, shift to the count effect mode (second count effect mode) However, when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) has passed the predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) (if it is not a big hit in the meantime), the effect mode shifts to the normal effect mode (low accurate low base state). To do. That is, the count effect mode (second count effect mode) is executed in the low-accuracy high-base state, and then the game state is changed to the low-accuracy low-base state and the effect mode is changed to the normal effect mode. In addition, the production mode of the count production mode (second count production mode) that can be shifted from the second special symbol winning/deciding determination is the mode shown in FIG. 86(e).

Further, in the super effect mode, when the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit), it is always the second count effect after the big hit game. The fourth bonus is a disadvantageous jackpot compared to the first bonus and the second bonus because the mode shifts (and the amount of game profit that can be obtained is also small). On the other hand, the third bonus and the first bonus are advantageous jackpots because they always shift to the super mode after the jackpot game (the amount of game profit that can be obtained is large, especially the third bonus is large). ..

Here, 1st count production mode 184 which shifts based on the result of the 1st special design winning/deciding judgment, on the basis of the variable display of the special design (production design) of the specified number of times, shifts only to normal production mode. On the other hand, the second count effect mode 185 that shifts based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination, based on the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) a predetermined number of times, when shifting to the normal effect mode 181 They are different from each other in that they have a case of shifting to the super production modes 182 and 183.

On the other hand, the production modes of the first count production mode 184 (first specific production mode) and the second count production mode 185 (first specific production mode) are all common production mode names in the production mode display unit 171. “Count mode” is displayed, and the background character 172 also displays a common character (cloud background). The difference is that images (display units) that are different from each other are provided in a partial area of the display screen 7a. Specifically, in the second count effect mode 185, a remaining number display section showing the remaining time of the count effect mode is provided at the upper right of the display screen 7a. The display modes of both effect modes are different in that such a display unit is not provided in the first count effect mode 184. In this way, since there is a slight difference in the display mode between the two effect modes, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the effect modes. As a result, even when the player is in the first count effect mode 184, he/she expects to switch to the super mode to maintain a high gaming interest for a long time, or when the second count effect mode 185 shifts to the super mode. In addition, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the "count mode (184, 185)", which is an effect mode having the same effect mode name, is referred to as a "first specific effect mode". That is, the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185 correspond to the “first specific effect mode”. The production mode after the big hit game is set to the "count mode". The count mode (first specific effect mode), if the result of the special symbol hit determination is not a big hit, when the variable display frequency of the effect symbol reaches a predetermined number (predetermined number), it shifts to another effect mode. To do. The destination production mode to which the big transition does not occur is a normal production mode (third specific production mode) and a super production mode (second specific production mode). More specifically, when the count mode being executed is the first count effect mode, only the normal effect mode is entered. In addition, when the count mode being executed is the second count effect mode, there are cases where the normal effect mode is entered and cases where the super effect mode is entered.

As described above, when the count mode (first specific effect mode) is set based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination, the count mode is the first count effect mode (first specific effect mode), and When the count mode (first specific effect mode) is set based on the result of the 2 special symbol hit determination, the count mode is the second count effect mode (first specific effect mode). Further, as described above, in the first count effect mode, when the variation display number of the effect symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times) without the result of the special symbol hit determination being a big hit, the normal effect mode (first 3 specific effect mode). Further, the second count effect mode, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is not a big hit, when the variable display number of the effect symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times or 100 times), the normal effect mode (3rd There are cases where it shifts to the specific effect mode and cases where it shifts to the super effect mode (second specific effect mode).

That is, when the effect mode set after the end of the big hit game is set to the count mode (first specific effect mode), the count mode is based on the variable display of the effect symbol (identification information) of the specified number of times, and the supermarket is displayed. The possibility of shifting to the effect mode (second specific effect mode) depends on the game state. Specifically, the production mode is likely to shift from the count mode to the super production mode (without passing the big hit game) in the second game state (low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state, or high). In the case of (probably low base state), the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (specific result), the big hit game is executed, and when the count mode is set after the big hit game is finished, the first game state (low probability The result of the special symbol hit determination in the low base state) is a big hit (specific result) and a big hit game is executed, which is higher than when the count mode is set after the big hit game is finished.

This is the pachinko game machine, in the second game state (low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state, high-probability low base state), is a game mainly based on the determination of the second special symbol, the first This is because, in the game state (low-probability low base state), the game is mainly based on the first special symbol award/miss determination. Therefore, the production mode, the possibility of shifting from the count mode to the super production mode (without passing the big hit game) is a big hit in the second special symbol hit determination, the big hit game is executed, and is counted after the big hit game ends. It can be said that the case where the mode is set is higher than the case where the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a big hit (specific result) and the big hit game is executed, and the count mode is set after the end of the big hit game. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the count mode set by the result of the first special symbol hit determination is all the first count effect mode, the possibility of transitioning to the super effect mode (without passing the big hit game), It is set to "0". Instead of such a mode, even from the count mode set by the result of the first special symbol hit determination, there may be a case of shifting to the super effect mode (without passing the big hit game). Even in such a case, the count mode set based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination is more than the count mode set based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination (the big hit game. It is possible to increase the possibility of shifting to the super production mode (without passing). Moreover, as still another aspect, the count mode set based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination is more than the count mode set based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination ((big hit game) It is possible to increase the possibility of shifting to the super production mode (without passing through).

As described above, in the second embodiment, the bonus effect and the effect mode shown in FIG. 84 are executed in accordance with the transition of the game state, the game effect is diversified and diversified, and the game is prevented from getting tired. It is possible to boost the interest.

[Game production in each production mode]
Next, a game effect (reach effect or character effect) executed in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. As shown in FIG. 85, a normal effect mode 181 (third effect mode), a first super effect mode 182 (first effect mode, specific effect mode), a second super effect mode 183, a count effect mode (second effect mode, In the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185), game effects having different effect modes (display modes) are provided. Further, in the normal effect mode 181, four types (plurality) of game effects (reach effects) can be executed, and jackpot reliability is set for each of these four types of game effects. The jackpot reliability indicates the possibility that, when a corresponding game effect (for example, Thunder Reach) is executed, the effect symbols (special symbols) that are variably displayed together with the game effect are stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. That is, it shows the possibility of becoming a big hit (first bonus or second bonus) (possibility of executing a big hit game).

Further, each game effect executed in the normal effect mode mainly based on the first special symbol win/decision determination allows different characters to appear, and character S in S reach, character T in T reach, character A in Thunder reach ( 78(c), (d), etc.), the character Y appears in the full rotation reach. By seeing these appearing characters and effect modes, the player can easily understand the jackpot reliability of the executed game effect. Of course, in these game effects, other common or different characters than the character shown in FIG. 85 may be displayed (appeared).

Also, as shown in FIG. 85, different game effects can be executed in the first super effect mode 182, the second super effect mode 183, and the count effect modes 184 and 185, which mainly have the second special symbol winning/decision judgment. Here, the reliability of the game effect in these effect modes is referred to as "advantageous jackpot reliability". This is different from mere "big hit reliability", and may be an advantageous big hit, that is, the third bonus or the first bonus that the super mode will continue (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) ) Is shown. In the super production mode, there are few game profits that can be obtained, and the big hit that the production mode after the big hit game shifts to the count production mode is a big hit that is disadvantageous to the player even if it is a big hit Since it is a big hit), the "reliability of big hit" indicates that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit excluding these disadvantageous big hits.

Specifically, the character A confrontation reach 191 that can be executed in the first super effect mode 182 is a game effect in which the character X and the character A appear and confront each other, and the advantageous jackpot reliability is the first super effect. It is set to the lowest "1%" among the game effects that can be executed in the mode 182. That is, when the character A confrontation reach 191 is executed in the first super effect mode 182, it is very unlikely that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is a big hit. Therefore, when the character A confrontation reach 191 is executed, the player does not become a disadvantageous jackpot rather than expecting a jackpot, that is, the player expects that the result of the special symbol hit determination is out of play. To do.

Further, the character G confrontation reach 192 is a game effect in which the characters X and G appear and confront each other, and the advantageous jackpot reliability is set to "10%". Further, the character H confrontation reach 193 is a game effect in which the characters X and H appear and confront each other, and the advantageous jackpot reliability is set to “30%”. Further, the character I confrontation reach 194 is a game effect in which the character X and the character I appear and confront each other, and the advantageous jackpot reliability is the highest among the game effects that can be executed in the first super effect mode 182. It is said to be "50%". Further, the above-mentioned confrontation reach is an advantageous jackpot if the ally character X defeats the enemy characters A, G, H, or I. If you lose, it will be a big hit, and in the case of a draw, the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment will be out, and the gaming state will continue. Moreover, the 1st count production mode 184 and the 2nd count production mode 185 shall perform common game production. This makes it more difficult to determine which count effect mode. It should be noted that in each effect mode, game effects other than those defined in FIG. 85 (notice effect, prefetch effect, reach effect, character effect) may be provided.

[Production mode of each production mode]
FIG. 86(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the normal effect mode 181. In the normal effect mode 181, a character imitating a mountain and a tree is displayed as the background character 172. In the normal effect mode, the effect mode display section 171 indicating the normal effect mode is not provided. Therefore, since the background character and the effect mode display unit 171 are not present, it is understood that the normal effect mode is set. FIG. 86(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the first super effect mode 182 when the player selects the first super effect mode 182 among the super effect modes. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating the sun is displayed as the background character 172, and the "first super mode" is displayed on the effect mode display portion 171, thereby clearly indicating the effect mode to be executed to the player. There is.

In addition, FIG. 86(c) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the second super effect mode 183 when the player selects the second super effect mode 183 of the super effect modes. On the display screen 7a, a character simulating the moon is displayed as the background character 172, and by displaying the "second super mode" on the effect mode display portion 171, the effect mode to be executed is clearly indicated to the player. There is. Also, FIG. 86(d) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the first count effect mode 184 when the effect mode is set to the first count effect mode 184. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating a cloud is displayed as the background character 172, and by displaying the "count mode" on the effect mode display portion 171, the effect mode executed by the player is shown.

Also, FIG. 86(e) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the second count effect mode 185 when the effect mode is set to the second count effect mode 185. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating the same (common) cloud as the first count effect mode 184 is displayed as the background character 172, and the same effect as the first count effect mode 184 is displayed on the effect mode display unit 171. "Mode" is displayed. This shows the effect mode to be executed by the player. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, a remaining number display section 173 of the first count effect mode 184 is provided and shows the remaining period of the second count effect mode 185. The execution period of the first count effect mode 184 (as the longest period when a big hit does not occur) is a period in which the number of variable display of special symbols is fixed at 100 times, and the execution period of the second count effect mode 185. (As the longest period when a big hit does not occur) has a plurality of periods in which the number of times of variable display of special symbols is 50 times and 100 times.

Therefore, in the second count effect mode 185, such a display unit is provided in order to show the remaining time period in a manner that is easy for the player to understand, or to increase the interest of the game by performing an effect of increasing the remaining time period. This difference in display mode is the difference between the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185, and the other configurations, appearance characters, executable game effects, etc. are common. Therefore, when the production mode is set to the count mode, the player who has been in contact with the pachinko gaming machine for a short period of time identifies whether the count mode is the first count production mode or the second count production mode. Difficult to do.

In FIG. 86(f), when the effect mode is set to the super effect mode, the player can select any effect mode from the first super effect mode 182 and the second super effect mode 183. The production mode selection screen 186 is shown. The effect mode selection period is provided at a predetermined time during the big hit game before the effect mode is set to the super effect mode (similar to the first embodiment).

[Game production in specific production mode]
Next, using FIG. 87, a game effect (reach effect, in a specific effect mode (specifically, a first super effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment has. An effect mode (execution mode) of (character effect) will be described. When the gaming state is set to the high-accuracy low base state, any one of a plurality of effect modes (first super effect mode, second super effect mode) is selected by the player's effect button operation (selection by the player). The production mode can be selected. As described above, these effect modes have different game effects depending on the effect mode to be executed. Therefore, the player can prevent the game from getting tired or enhance the interest of the game by selecting an arbitrary effect mode or switching to a different effect mode according to his/her preference. ..

As shown in FIG. 85, FIG. 87, etc., in the first super effect mode 182, a game effect having a characteristic effect mode different from other effect modes is executed. Specifically, four types (plural) of game effects (reach effect): character A confrontation reach, character G confrontation reach, character H confrontation reach, and character I confrontation reach (collectively referred to as simply “confrontation reach”). ) Is feasible. In these game effects, a teammate character (character X) and an enemy character (character A, G, H, or I) are confronted with each other, and the result of the confrontation is a judgment result advantageous to the player. I'm showing you. That is, it shows whether or not to execute a big hit game (first bonus or third bonus) which is advantageous to the player whose game state after the big hit game is set to the super effect mode, depending on the game effect to be executed.

In addition, in each game effect, an option display unit 179 that suggests the result of the competition is provided at the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the result of the competition is any of the results displayed on the option display unit 179. There are three types of options displayed on the option display unit 179: [Victory], [Continue], and [Defeat], and when the result of the confrontation reach is [Victory] ([Result display unit 178 displays Victory] is displayed), the player wins a big win, the third bonus or the first bonus (big hit game) is executed, and the effect mode after the big hit game is set to the super effect mode. The game state in the super production mode is a highly accurate low base state that is advantageous to the player.

When the result of the confrontation reach is [Continued] (when [Continued] is displayed in the result display unit 178), the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is wrong is determined, and the jackpot game is not executed. The first super production mode continues even after the end of the confrontation reach. Then, after that, in the first super effect mode, the variable display of special symbols (effect symbols) is continuously executed. When the result of the confrontation reach is [defeat] (when [defeat] is displayed in the result display unit 178), it is a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the fourth bonus (jackpot game) is executed, and the jackpot game ends. The subsequent effect mode is set to the second count effect mode 185. Incidentally, as described above, the game state in the second count effect mode has a low accurate high base state and a high accurate low base state.

Further, a plurality of game effects that can be executed in the first super effect mode 185 are set, and among these plurality of game effects, the game effect for which the option “defeat” can be displayed on the option display unit 179 is an enemy character. Only the character A confrontation reach 191 (first special game effect) in which the character A appears is set. That is, in a situation where the game is being executed in the first super effect mode 185, the effect mode being executed shifts from the first super effect mode 185 to the second count effect mode 185 without passing through the character A confrontation reach 191. There is nothing to do. Therefore, in the first super production mode 185 in the high-accuracy low-base state, the character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed when the 2R seventh big hit and the 2R eighth big hit which are disadvantageous to the player. The character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed even when the 2R fifth big hit and the 2R sixth big hit that can be promoted from the second count effect mode to the super effect mode are achieved. That is, when the fourth bonus (see FIG. 84) is executed in the first super effect mode and the effect mode after the jackpot game is over is shifted to the second count effect mode, the character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed.

FIG. 87(a) shows a scene in which the character A confrontation reach effect 191 (first special game effect) is executed along with the variable display of a predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. On the left part of the display screen 7a, a background character 172 imitating the sun, which indicates that the effect mode being executed is the first super effect mode 185, is displayed. Further, in the approximate center of the display screen, a teammate character X174 and an enemy character A144, which are confronted in the confrontation reach, are displayed. In addition, on the left and right upper portions of the display screen, the effect pattern of the reach mode is displayed (the left and right effect patterns "2" forming the reach mode are displayed). Further, an option display section 179 is provided at the upper part of the display screen, and options that can be the result of the competition reach are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87(a), in the character A confrontation reach effect, [continue] and [defeat] are displayed as options in the option display section.

In the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is always displayed as an option. Also, [Victory] is not displayed as an option. Therefore, the character A confrontation reach effect is a reach effect showing a situation that is considerably disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player plays the game with the expectation that [Continue] is displayed on the result display unit 178, that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination is out of order, and that the first super effect mode is continued. Although not shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, although "win" is not displayed as an option, after "defeat" is displayed as a result of the confrontation, a reversal effect is executed, which is advantageous to the player. It also has a big hit.

As another aspect of the second embodiment, in the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect), the option of "win" may be displayed, or "defeat" may not be displayed. In addition, even if three options of [Win], [Continue], and [Defeat] are displayed, or only one option is displayed (in this case, the displayed option is used to confirm). Good.

FIG. 87(b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87(a), and shows a scene in which [Continue] is displayed in the result display section as the result of the confrontation of the character A confrontation reach effect. ing. Further, a detachment reach effect design [232] is displayed in the center portion of the display screen, and it is shown that the detachment result is out as a result of the reach effect. Further, the character "draw" indicating that the confrontation between the character X and the character A was a draw is displayed. This indicates that the first super production mode continues after that, without the first super production mode ending (the fourth bonus being executed and shifting to the second count production mode). That is, it indicates that the character A confrontation reach effect is executed when the result of the special symbol hit determination is out.

FIG. 87(c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87(a), and shows a scene in which [defeat] is displayed in the result display section as the confrontation result of the character A confrontation reach effect. ing. Further, in the central portion of the display screen, the outreach effect design [212] is displayed, which shows that the result of the reach effect did not result in an advantageous jackpot advantageous to the player. Incidentally, as the effect design, the out-reach effect effect design of [212] (effect pattern which is not the same in three digits) is displayed, but the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a big hit (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R). 7th jackpot or 2R 8th jackpot). Further, in the confrontation between the character X and the character A, an effect indicating that the character A has won (the character X has lost) is displayed. This indicates that the first super effect mode is finished (the fourth bonus is executed and the second count effect mode is entered). That is, the character A confrontation reach effect executed when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a comparatively unfavorable jackpot (2R 5 jackpot, 2R 6 jackpot, 2R 7 jackpot or 2R 8 jackpot) Is shown.

As described above, when the character A confrontation reach effect is executed and [defeat] is displayed in the result display section, in principle (in most cases), the fourth bonus is executed and the second count effect mode is set. Transition. However, in a rare case (with a considerably low possibility), the reverse production may be executed after the defeat production of FIG. 87(c), and the production showing that the advantageous jackpot is achieved may be performed. In this case, the third bonus (or the first bonus) is executed, and then the super effect mode is entered. In the table of FIG. 85, the advantageous jackpot reliability of the character A confrontation reach is not 0% but 1% because it has such a rare case. Further, instead of such an aspect, the advantageous jackpot reliability when the character A confrontation reach effect is executed may be set to 0%.

FIG. 87(d) shows a scene in which the character G confrontation reach effect 192 (second special game effect) is executed along with the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. On the left part of the display screen 7a, a background character 172 imitating the sun, which indicates that the effect mode being executed is the first super effect mode 185, is displayed. Further, a character X174, which is a teammate character, and a character G192, which is an enemy character, are displayed in the approximate center of the display screen. In addition, on the left and right upper portions of the display screen, the effect pattern of the reach mode is displayed (the left and right effect patterns "2" forming the reach mode are displayed). Further, an option display section 179 is provided at the upper part of the display screen, and options that can be the result of the competition reach are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87(d), in the character G confrontation reach effect (second special game effect), unlike the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect), [win] and [continue] are available as options in the option display section. ] Is displayed and [Defeat] is not displayed.

That is, in the character G showdown reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is not displayed as an option. Also, [Victory] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character G confrontation reach production is a reach production that shows a situation that is quite advantageous to the player (no disadvantage will be a big hit as a result of the game production). Therefore, the player expects that "win" is displayed in the result display unit 178, that is, the result of the special symbol winning/judgment determination is an advantageous big hit, and that the first super production mode is continued after the big hit game is finished. And play a game. Further, even if [win] is not displayed and [continue] is displayed, the first super effect mode continues after that, so that the player can play with a sense of security. .. Further, although not shown in the drawing, it may have a pattern for displaying only [win] (one choice).

FIG. 87(e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87(d), and shows a scene in which [win] is displayed on the result display section as a result of the character G confrontation reach effect. ing. In addition, a hit (advantageous big hit) reach effect design [222] is displayed in the center part of the display screen, and it is shown that the hit (advantageous win) has been achieved as a result of the reach effect. Further, an effect image showing that the character X, which is a teammate character, has won the character G, which is an enemy character, is displayed. As a result, it is an advantageous big hit, and the big hit game (third bonus or first bonus) is executed, and it is shown that after the big hit game is finished, the first super effect mode is set again. That is, it is shown that the result of the special symbol hit determination is the character G confrontation reach effect executed when the advantageous big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit).

Also, FIG. 87(f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87(d), and a scene in which [Continue] is displayed in the result display section as the confrontation result of the character G confrontation reach effect. Is shown. Further, a detachment reach effect design [232] is displayed in the center portion of the display screen, and it is shown that the detachment result is out as a result of the reach effect. Further, the character "draw" indicating that the confrontation between the character X and the character G was a draw is displayed. This indicates that the first super production mode continues after that, without the first super production mode ending (the fourth bonus being executed and shifting to the second count production mode). That is, it indicates that the character G confrontation reach effect is executed when the result of the special symbol hit determination is out.

FIG. 87(g) shows a scene in which the character H confrontation reach effect 193 (second special game effect) is executed along with the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. In addition, a character X174 of an ally character and a character H176 of an enemy character, which are to be confronted in the confrontation reach, are displayed in the approximate center of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 87(g), the option display section 179 displays [Victory] and [Continue] as options as in the case of the character G showdown reach effect, and does not display [Defeat]. ..

That is, in the character H confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, as in the case of the character G confrontation reach effect, "defeat" is not displayed as an option. Also, [Victory] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character H confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) is a reach effect showing a situation that is quite advantageous to the player (no disadvantage will result in a disadvantage as a result of the game effect). Also, although illustration is omitted, when the result of the character H showdown reach effect is [win] as in FIG. 87(e) or FIG. 87(f), an advantageous jackpot is executed and then the first supermarket is executed. When the production mode is set again and [Continue] is selected, the first super production mode is continued without executing the big hit game.

FIG. 87(h) shows a scene in which the character I confrontation reach effect 194 (second special game effect) is executed along with the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. Further, in the approximate center of the display screen, a teammate character X174 and an enemy character I177, which are confronted in the confrontation reach, are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 87(h), in the option display portion 179, [Victory] and [Continue] are displayed as options as in the case of the character G showdown reach effect, and [defeat] is not displayed. ..

That is, in the character I confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, as in the case of the character G confrontation reach effect, [defeat] is not displayed as an option. Also, [Victory] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character I confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) is also a reach effect showing a situation that is quite advantageous to the player (no disadvantage is a big hit as a result of the game effect). Although illustration is omitted, when the result of the character I showdown reach effect is [Victory] as in FIG. When the production mode is set again and [Continue], the first super production mode is continued without executing the big hit game.

As described above, in the first super effect mode (first effect mode, specific effect mode), whichever of the character G confrontation reach effect, the character H confrontation reach effect, or the character I confrontation reach effect is executed, [Defeat] is not displayed as an option, and as a result, [Defeat] is not displayed in the result display section. That is, in the first super effect mode, only the character A confrontation reach effect has a possibility of being a disadvantageous jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and other game effects (character G confrontation) except the character A confrontation reach effect. Reach production, character H showdown reach production, and character I showdown reach production) have no possibility of being a disadvantage jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, when a game effect other than the character A confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) is executed, the possibility of a disadvantageous jackpot at that point is eliminated, and the player's sense of security is increased and the character A confrontation is performed. It is possible to increase the expectation for an advantageous jackpot when a game effect other than the reach effect (second special game effect) is executed. As shown in FIG. 85, the character G confrontation reach effect, the character H confrontation reach effect, and the character I confrontation reach effect differ in the possibility of being an advantageous jackpot reliability (advantage jackpot reliability). Confrontation reach production is the most advantageous.

Further, even if the character A confrontation reach effect is executed, there is an option of [Continue] that does not result in a disadvantageous jackpot, and there is also a possibility of an advantageous jackpot, though it is a slight possibility. As a result, when the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect) is executed, the sense of tension to the disadvantageous jackpot is increased to enhance the enjoyment of the game, and the expectation for the continuation of the first super effect mode and the advantageous jackpot. It is possible to increase the level of interest and maintain a high level of entertainment.

Further, in the first super effect mode, the game effect in which the character A appears is set to be the most unfavorable game effect for the player, so that the value of the character A (specific character) in the first super effect mode is set low. ing. On the other hand, as described above, the "specific reach effect", which is a game effect that can be executed in the normal effect mode and in which the character A common to the character A confrontation reach effect appears, has a relatively high jackpot reliability. At the same time, a big hit is always an advantageous big hit (high-precision low base state and is set to the super effect mode).

That is, the specific reach effect (refer to FIGS. 78 and 79, etc., the third special game effect) executed in the normal effect mode (third effect mode) and the character A confrontation reach effect executed in the first super effect mode. (Refer to FIG. 87 and the like, the first special game effect) is a game effect (reach effect) in which the character A appears, but the value of the game effect for the player (a result advantageous to the player). The possibility of becoming a big hit, and the reliability of winning jackpots) are completely different. As a result, depending on the effect mode (normal effect mode, first super effect mode) to be executed and the game state (low accurate low base state, high accurate low base state), the value of the game effect in which the same character A appears (big hit reliability) , Advantageous jackpot reliability, possibility of producing advantageous results for players). Further, as a result, the player's excitement (tension) when the game effect (reach effect) in which the character A appears is executed is enhanced depending on the effect mode and the game state, and the game effect is diversified to improve the game. It is possible to prevent getting tired.

In addition, by allowing the player to arbitrarily select an effect mode that can be executed in the super effect mode, if the player does not like the effect mode such as the first super effect mode, the second super effect mode is selected. You can play games. As a result, it is possible to provide a game effect according to the taste of the player, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game for various players. In the first super effect mode, there is a possibility that the jackpot is a big hit only when a specific game effect (character A confrontation reach) is executed, and it is a big hit when another game effect is executed. By eliminating the possibility, the play mode puts the highest priority on which game play is executed.

On the other hand, in the second super effect mode, there is a possibility that an advantageous big hit or a disadvantage big hit may occur when any of a plurality of game effects (J reach, K reach, A reach, L reach) is executed. And, the possibility of an advantageous jackpot is made different depending on the game effect to be executed. As a result, no matter which of the plurality of game effects is executed, the game effect can be viewed with a certain degree of expectation for the advantageous jackpot. On the contrary, whichever of the plurality of game effects is executed, it is possible to see the game effects with a certain degree of anxiety that a big hit occurs. Further, as a result, it is possible to enhance the excitement (tension) of the player and enhance the interest of the game.

[Other execution mode of game profit acquisition production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 94, another execution mode of the game profit acquisition effect of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, the game profit acquisition effect is an effect that indicates how much game profit is acquired in the specific state when the game state is in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called condominium state (condominium period), and in the low-probability low base state (state A), the gaming state becomes the low-probability low base state again when the big hit occurs. Up to (excluding jackpot game state) state. This is an effect showing the amount of game profit acquired in this specific state. Further, in another execution mode of the game profit acquisition effect which will be described later, the total game profit acquired in the specific state (specific period) and the unit period of the specific state (specific period) (a period including one jackpot game) ) The unit gain game profit obtained in ), the first image display device 7 (second display device), the second image display device 71 (first display device), and/or the third image according to the game situation. The images are displayed on the display device 72 (first display device).

That is, the gained game profit amounts for different periods are respectively displayed on a plurality of separately arranged display devices, and different display devices are displayed according to the game situation. Incidentally, it is preferable that at least one of the plurality of separately arranged display devices is provided at least inside and outside the game area. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp the game profit obtained in the desired period according to the game situation. In addition, "display according to the game situation" is displayed according to a game state such as a low accurate high base state, a high accurate high base state, a high accurate low base state, a normal production mode, a first super production mode. , The second super production mode, the first count production mode, the second count production mode, and the like, which means that the display is performed. Incidentally, the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 may display the effect symbol 8 depending on the game situation, such as when performing the reach effect. The display screen 71a is also referred to as a second effect symbol display unit, and the display screen 72a is also referred to as a third effect symbol display unit.

FIG. 88(a) shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol (first special symbol) is being executed in the low accurate low base state (normal state). As shown in FIG. 88(a), in the low accurate low base state (normal state), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (first image display device, first effect display device) provided substantially in the center of the game area 3. On the (first display screen), a production design display area 7b (production design display section) for displaying the production design 8 and a production hold display area (a first production suspension 9a or a second production suspension 9b) for displaying production suspension (first production suspension 9a or second production suspension 9b). The first effect hold display area 9c or the second effect hold display area 9d) is provided. Further, on the display screen 71a (second display screen) of the second image display device 71 provided in the outer area (first outer area) of the game area 3 (on the left side in FIG. 88), or after the power is turned on, If the big hit game is executed after the power is turned on, the first fluctuation number display section 203 (first bonus fluctuation number display section, execution period display) that displays the fluctuation display number of the effect symbol from the end of the previous big hit game Section) is provided.

Here, it is shown that the variable display of the effect symbol 78 times has been completed since the last big hit game ended (currently the 79th variable display is being executed). In addition, on the display screen 72a (third display screen) of the third image display device 72 provided in the outer area (the second outer area) of the game area 3 (on the right side in the drawing of FIG. 88), the effect indicating the current effect mode is displayed. A mode display unit 171 is provided. Then, the characters of "normal mode" indicating that the current effect mode is the normal effect mode 181 are displayed.

FIG. 88(b) shows a scene in which the above-mentioned “Thunder reach (specific reach effect)” is executed as a reach effect (game effect) while the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 88(a) is being executed. Showing. At this time (during the reach effect execution), the effect mode display unit 171, the first effect hold display unit 9c, and the variable display unit 9e are erased, and the first display screen, the second display screen, and the third display screen are displayed. A game effect (reach effect) is displayed using three display screens (substantially the whole). However, as shown in FIG. 88(b) and the like, such other display units (effect mode display unit 171, effect hold display unit, variable display unit, total earned profit display unit and second earned profit display described later) are displayed. The first variation count display unit 203 does not erase the display and maintains the display even in a situation in which a copy etc. is temporarily not displayed. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the game period from the previous big hit game (game period from power-on) regardless of the game situation.

In addition, this allows the player to check how long he/she has played the game without going through the big hit game, and prevent excessive investment in the game. In addition, even when the player is not playing the game (during the demonstration image display, etc.), the first fluctuation number display unit 203 is not erased, and the display is maintained. This allows other players to use it as reference information when selecting a gaming machine. Even when the game information is not displayed on the island facility or the like, the game information is always displayed on the game machine, which enables clear and reliable notification.

FIG. 88(c) shows the result of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 88(b), and the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 88(b) is a big hit, and a big hit effect design (“777”). )) is stopped and displayed. In addition, the bonus type display portion 201 displays the characters "first bonus" for notifying that the jackpot type is the first bonus advantageous to the player. In the normal state (low-probability low base state), since it is executed by the first special symbol hit determination, the jackpot type advantageous to the player here is the 4R first jackpot. The first bonus (big hit) advantageous to the player means that the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game is finished is transferred to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state). Also at this time, the first variation number display unit 203 maintains the display without being erased.

FIG. 89(d) shows a scene during execution of the big hit game (4R first big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 88(c) (3R). Based on the fact that the big hit game is executed from the normal state, a special period (long-term holiday period) is started. Then, during the special period, the total gained profit display unit 164 (second profit information display unit) that displays the game profit obtained during the special period, and the second gained profit display unit 204 (first profit information display unit). ), and are provided. The special period ends when the game state is set to the normal state (low-probability low base state) again during the period excluding the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 89(d), in the game situation during the big hit game, the upper center of the display screen 7a (first display screen) of the first image display device 7 provided in the game area is acquired in the special period. A total earned profit display unit 164 showing the total number of game profits is provided (T:00350pt). This means that 350 game balls have been paid out during the special period.

Further, on the lower right of the display screen 7a, there is provided a second earned profit display unit 204 showing the total number of game profits obtained in the big hit game being executed (350/600). This means that the maximum number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out in this jackpot game is 600, and that 350 game balls are currently paid out. During the big hit game in the first hit (the big hit that occurs in the normal state), the value displayed on the total earned profit display unit 164 and the value displayed on the second earned profit display unit 204 are the same value. Therefore, only one of them may be displayed, or both may be displayed as in the present embodiment. Further, in this embodiment, only at the time of the first win, the "maximum number of game balls (number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out in the big hit game" is displayed, and thereafter, only the number of game balls actually paid out is displayed. Is displayed. The number of rounds of the big hit game being executed is shown on the upper left side of the display screen 7a (3R: third round).

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a firing direction display unit 162 showing the firing direction (firing area) of the game ball is provided. In addition, a jackpot game effect such as a predetermined character design or background design is displayed in a substantially central portion (other display area) of the display screen 7a. Further, on the second display screen 71a, the first number-of-changes display section 203 is displayed without being erased. Thereby, during the big hit game, from the previous big hit game to the big hit game of this time, the variable display (special symbol hit/miss judgment) of the value (78 times) displayed on the first fluctuation number display unit 203 (the special symbol hit determination) is required. You can easily check what you have done. In addition, in other display areas of the second display screen 71a and in the third display screen 72a, a big hit game effect such as a predetermined character picture or background picture is displayed.

FIG. 89(e) shows a scene in which the effect symbols are variably displayed a predetermined number of times in the highly accurate low base state set after the big hit game shown in FIG. 89(d) is finished. Specifically, from the display of the first fluctuation number display unit 203 (14 times), it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the effect symbol has been executed 14 times after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 89(d) is finished. Since the gaming state after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 89(d) is set to the high-accuracy low base state (since it is not set to the low-accuracy low base state), the special period is continuing. Here, in the second embodiment, as described above, as the effect modes of the super effect mode, the first super effect mode 182 and the second super effect mode 183 are provided, and the player in the predetermined selection period. By selecting, it is possible to select one of the effect modes. The effect mode selection period and selection method in the high-accuracy low-base state are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. On the second display screen 71a, a second effect mode display section 202 (selection mode display section) that displays the effect mode selected by the player, and an effect mode display section 171 (first effect that displays the effect mode being executed). Mode display section).

Characters of "super effect mode" indicating the super effect mode are displayed on the effect mode display portion 171, and the first super effect mode is indicated on the second effect mode display portion 202 as the effect mode of the super effect mode. The characters "1st SM" indicating that the item has been selected are displayed. Further, in the gaming state of the high-accuracy low base state (first super effect mode), at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the total earned profit display unit 164 (which indicates the total number of gaming profits acquired in the special period (second period)). A second profit information display section) is provided (T:00720pt). This means that 720 game balls have been paid out during the special period. From the scene shown in FIG. 89(d), 370 game balls are additionally paid out in the remaining period of the big hit game and in the period of 14 revolutions of the first super effect mode.

In addition, in the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, the effect for the first super effect mode such as a character pattern imitating an airplane is displayed. On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a second effect hold display section 9d is provided. In addition, the third display screen 72a is provided with a second acquired profit display unit 204 (first profit information display unit). In the second earned profit display unit 204, in the gaming profit acquired in the big hit game shown in FIG. 89(d), in the highly accurate low base state after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89(e) (small hit game Display the game profit that is obtained by adding the game profit obtained. In other words, the second earned profit display unit 204 displays the total amount of gaming profit obtained in one big hit game period and a period until the next big hit game occurs from the big hit game. The period from the start of this one big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is also called a unit special period (first period), and the game profit obtained in this unit special period is a unit game profit (first profit information). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 89(e), the second gained profit display unit 204 displays the unit game profit and the type of the previous big hit (big hit game) (first B: first). Bonus). With this, it is possible to easily understand what kind of big hit game and how much game profit has been obtained in the subsequent gaming state in the unit special period. Further, the change (increase) in the display (value) of the unit game profit continues as long as the first super effect mode shown in FIG. 89(e) continues, and the game profit (prize ball) is given by the occurrence of the small hit game. When it is paid (paid out), the value of the total earned profit display unit 164 of the display screen 7a and the value of the second earned profit display unit 204 of the third display screen 72a increase in conjunction (by the same number). ..

Note that in the scene shown in FIG. 89(e), since the unit special period is the first time in the special period, the value of the total earned profit display unit 164 and the value of the second earned profit display unit 204 match. .. If the special period continues for a long period of time and a plurality of unit special periods occur in response to a large hit game occurring a plurality of times, these values will be different.

89(f), the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) shown in FIG. 89(e) continues, and the 29th effect symbol from the end of the previous jackpot game (FIG. 89(d)). The scene in which variable display is being executed is shown. As shown in FIG. 89(f), the reach effect is generated in the 29th effect variable display of effect symbols. When the reach effect is generated in the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state), the second effect mode display unit 202 and the effect mode displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, respectively. The display unit 171, the total earned profit display unit 164, the second effect hold display unit 9d, the firing direction display unit 162, and the second earned profit display unit 204 are the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. Will be hidden (erased) from. Then, the reach effect is displayed on all the display screens of the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. It should be noted that even during the reach effect, the first fluctuation number display unit 203 is not erased and maintains the display.

FIG. 90(g) shows the result of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as FIG. 89(f), and the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 89(f) is a big hit, and a big hit effect symbol (“777”). )) is stopped and displayed. In addition, the bonus type display unit 201 displays the characters "third bonus" for notifying that the jackpot type is the third bonus advantageous to the player. In the first super production mode (high-accuracy low base state), the second special symbol hit determination is executed, so the jackpot type advantageous to the player here is the 15R third jackpot. In addition, the 4R fourth big hit is also a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, the third bonus (big hit) that is advantageous to the player is a big hit game in which the game profit that can be obtained is the maximum, and the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game is the super effect mode (high accuracy low It means to shift to the base state). Also at this time, the first variation number display unit 203 maintains the display without being erased.

FIG. 90(h) shows a scene during execution of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 90(13R). The special period started with the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89(d) is continuing. As shown in FIG. 90(h), in the game situation during the big hit game, a total earned profit display unit 164 is provided at the center of the upper part of the display screen 7a, the total earned profit display unit 164 showing the total number of game profits acquired in the special period (T. : 02850pt). This means that 2850 game balls have been paid out during the special period. Specifically, between the game profit obtained in the previous big hit game shown in FIG. 89(d) and 28 revolutions of the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) until the present big hit game is executed. When the gaming profit shown in the second earned profit display unit 204 in FIG. 90(h) is added to the gaming profit obtained by adding the gaming profit obtained in the small hit game to the value of the total earned profit display unit 164 (T : 02850pt).

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a second earned profit display unit 204 showing the total number of game profits obtained in the big hit game being executed (FIG. 90(h)) (01950pt). This means that in the big hit game that is being executed, 1950 game balls are currently paid out. As shown in FIG. 90(h) and the like, in the present embodiment, the total earned profit display unit 164 and the second earned profit display unit are displayed during the variation display of the effect symbol such as the high-accuracy low base state and during the big hit game. The display device for displaying 204 is different. As a result, the profit display section is set at an appropriate position according to the game situation, and the player can accurately and surely be notified of the game profit acquired in a desired period, so that the player can grasp it.

In FIG. 90(i), the effect mode (game state) after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 90(h) is set to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state), and the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) is set. ) Shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol is performed 22 times (a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol for the 23rd time is being executed). As shown in the second display screen 71(a), the effect mode is set to the super effect mode, and the second super effect mode is set by the player's selection (second SM: second super effect mode). ..

Further, in the scene shown in FIG. 90(i), as described above, since the second unit special period is being executed, a plurality of second earned profit display units 204 are provided on the third display screen 72a. There is. At the top of the third display screen 72a, the gained game profit in the unit special period being executed is shown (3B, 2960pt). As a result, it is possible to understand that the big hit game that has occurred during the unit special period this time is the third bonus, and that 2960 game profits are currently awarded during the unit special period this time. Further, below (immediately below), the gained game profit in the previous unit special period is shown (1B, 28, 885pt). When the unit special period ends, a second variation count display unit 205 (a second bonus variation count display unit, a period information display unit) is added (additional note) to the second earned profit display unit 204. Then, by viewing the additional information, it is possible to grasp how long it took from the end of the big hit game to the occurrence of the next big hit game (whether the number of Nankai fluctuations was required) in the unit special period. .. By this, the big hit game that occurred in the last unit special period is the first bonus, the number of times of the variable display of the effect symbol between the big hit games (the number of times the special symbol is judged) is 28 times (period information). , It is possible to grasp that 885 game profits have been obtained in the previous unit special period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90(i), when the unit special period becomes plural due to the occurrence of the jackpot game a plurality of times during the special period, a plurality of second earned profit display units are provided on the third display screen 72a. 204 is displayed. In this case, the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period being executed (continued) is displayed more conspicuously than the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the already ended unit special period. Specifically, you can display the one that is currently being executed in a larger size than the one that has been finished, or give decorations that are not on the one that is currently being finished (addition of a picture, addition of a frame, etc.) , Can be displayed in bold type.

Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, a total earned profit display unit 164 is provided, and the amount of game profit obtained during the entire special period, that is, the period obtained by adding all unit special periods is displayed (T: 03845pt). ). Specifically, the two second earned profit display units 204 of the third display screen 72a
When 2960 and 885 displayed in are added, it becomes the value (3845) displayed in the total gained profit display portion 164. Further, the change (display) of the unit game profit displayed on the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period being executed continues as long as the super production mode continues. Therefore, when the game profit (prize ball) is given by the occurrence of the small hit game, the unit special during the execution of the third display screen 72a is linked to the increase of the value of the total gained profit display portion 164 of the display screen 7a. The value of the (topmost) second acquired profit display portion 204 corresponding to the period is increased by the same number. It should be noted that the value of the second earned profit display portion 204 corresponding to the finished unit special period in the lower part has not been changed since it has already been determined.

FIG. 91(j) shows that the second super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) shown in FIG. 90(i) continues, and the 45th effect symbol from the end of the previous jackpot game (FIG. 90(h)). The scene in which the variable display is finished is shown. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(j), a reach effect is generated in the variable display of the 45th effect design, and a teammate character is defeated by an enemy character in the confrontation effect in the reach effect, which is a big hit against the player. It shows the scene that became. Although illustration is omitted, after that, a jackpot game (fourth bonus) that is disadvantageous to the player is executed based on the jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished is a low-probability-high base state or a high-probability-high base. The high accurate low base state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, ends.

Also, in the 4th bonus (2R 5th big jackpot game, 2R 6th big jackpot game, 2R 7th big jackpot game, or 2R 8th big jackpot game), it is possible to obtain the game profit, but in comparison with other big jackpot games And a small amount. Therefore, even during the execution of the big hit game, it is difficult for the player to recognize the execution as compared to other big hit games. In addition, for the unit special period including the big hit game related to the fourth bonus, the corresponding gained profit display unit 204 does not display the gained profit. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, or 2R eighth big hit game), and the decrease in the interest of the game is minimized. It is possible to prevent. Further, when a game profit is obtained in the big hit game related to the fourth bonus, even if it is displayed only on the total profit profit display unit 164 without being added to the second profit profit display unit 204 (without being displayed). Good. Further, the gaming profit obtained in the jackpot game related to the fourth bonus may be added to the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the previous unit special period as the one obtained in the previous unit special period. In the present embodiment, when the gaming profit is obtained in the jackpot game related to the fourth bonus, it is not added and displayed on both the second earned profit display unit 204 and the total earned profit display unit 164.

In the scene shown in FIG. 91(k), a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed based on the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 91(j), and as a production mode after the jackpot game ends. The scene in which the count effect mode is set is shown. As described above, the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a disadvantageous big hit (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit), the count set after the end of the big hit game The effect mode is the second count effect mode. Further, the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a disadvantageous big hit (4R second big hit), the count effect mode set after the end of the big hit game is the first count effect mode. As shown in FIG. 91(k), in the second count effect mode 185, the remaining period display unit 206 is provided on the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the remaining period display unit 206 displays the variation number of the effect symbols (special By displaying the remaining number of times of (symbol judgment), it is possible to play the game while grasping the remaining period of the second count effect mode.

On the other hand, in the first count effect mode 184, the remaining period display unit 206 that displays the remaining period (number of times) of the first count effect mode except for the time immediately before the end of the first count effect mode (for example, 5 times before the end). It does not have it (FIGS. 94(e) and (f)). In this respect, the display modes are partially different between the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185. Further, in the game situation in which the production mode (game state) is set to the count mode (low accurate high base state or high accurate high base state), the total earned profit display unit 164 is provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. There is. Further, the third display screen 72a is provided with three (plural) second earned profit display units 204. Since the count mode is currently in progress, the character “C mode” indicating the count mode is displayed on the second highest profit display portion 204 at the top. As described above, in the big hit game in which the count mode is set, and in the count mode (low-probability high base state or high-probability high base state), the game profit that can be acquired is small. Do not show profits earned on.

Further, the second earned profit display section 204 at the top of the third display screen 72a indicates the unit special period currently in progress, and the second earned profit display section 204 below the second earned profit display section 204 shows the previously completed unit special period. Further, the second earned profit display unit 204 therebelow indicates the unit special period that has been completed two times before. In this embodiment, a maximum of three second earned profit display units 204 can be displayed on the third display screen 72a, and when a big hit game (unit special period) occurs four times or more, the oldest ones in order. It is supposed to be erased. The number of the second earned profit display units 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a may be any number of four or more.

FIG. 91(l) is the 40th time from the end of the previous jackpot game (FIG. 91(j)) when the count mode (low accurate high base state or high accurate high base state) shown in FIG. 91(k) continues. The result of the variable display of the effect design shows a scene in which a big hit occurs. FIG. 92(m) shows a scene during execution (10R) of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 91(l). The special period started with the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89(d) is continuing. As shown in FIG. 92(m), in the game situation during the big hit game, a total earned profit display unit 164 is provided at the center of the upper part of the display screen 7a, the total earned profit display unit 164 indicating the total number of game profits acquired during the special period (T. : 05385pt). Further, on the lower right of the display screen 7a, a second earned profit display unit 204 showing the total number of game profits obtained in the big hit game being executed (FIG. 92(m)) is provided (01450pt).

In FIG. 92(n), the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game shown in FIG. 92(m) is set to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state), and the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) is set. ) Shows a scene in which the effect design variable display is executed four times (a scene in which the effect design variable display is being executed for the fifth time). As shown in the second display screen 71a, the first super production mode is set by the player's selection (first SM).

Further, in the scene shown in FIG. 90(n), since the fourth unit special period in the special period is being executed, the number of second earned profit display units 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a is exceeded. There is. Therefore, the oldest second earned profit display unit 204 is deleted, and the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period being newly executed is provided at the top (3B, 2350pt). Further, from the "C mode" displayed on the second earned profit display section 204 therebelow, it is possible to grasp that the special period has been continued by pulling back during the count mode (big hit occurrence). In the flow described above, the total earned profit display unit 164 and the second earned profit display unit 204 are displayed on a predetermined display screen according to the game situation.

FIG. 93(a) shows a scene in which the big hit is a big hit in the normal state (low accurate low base state), and the big hit effect design (“666”) is stopped and displayed. The "second bonus" is displayed on the bonus type display portion 201 of the display screen 7a. In the second bonus, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game is set to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) according to the result of the game effect (confrontation effect) executed during the big hit game. In some cases, the count mode (low accurate high base state) may be set. The count mode in this case is the first count effect mode 184.

FIG. 93(b) shows a jackpot game (second bonus) executed based on the jackpot shown in FIG. 93(a). During the final round of the big hit game or with the end of the final round, a victory effect in which an ally character defeats an enemy character is executed, and it is shown that the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) is set after the end of the big hit game. Has been done. In FIG. 93(c), the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) is set after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 93(b), and in the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state), The scene which performed the variable display (special symbol winning/absence judgment) of the predetermined number of times (14 times) is shown.

FIG. 94(d) shows a jackpot game (second bonus) executed based on the jackpot shown in FIG. 93(a). During the final round of the big hit game or with the end of the last round, the defeat effect in which the enemy character defeats the teammate character is executed, and it is shown that the count effect mode (low accurate high base state) is set after the end of the big hit game. Has been done. In FIG. 94(e), a count mode (low-probability base state) is set after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 94(d) is completed, and a predetermined number of times (35 times) is set in the count mode (low-probability base state). It shows the scene where the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol winning/absence determination) is executed. As described above, the count mode shown in FIG. 94(e) is the first count effect mode 184, and the display screen is displayed until the end of the first count effect mode 184 (a predetermined number within the remaining 5 times). The remaining period display portion is not set in 7a. This is because the execution period set in the second count effect mode has two types of 50 times or 100 times, whereas the execution period set in the first count effect mode is only one type of 100 times. Depends on

FIG. 94(f) shows a scene in which the effect symbols are variably displayed a predetermined number of times from the count mode shown in FIG. 94(e), and the count mode is advanced. As shown in the first variation number display section 203 of the second display screen 71a, variation display of the effect symbol (special symbol determination) is executed 96 times from the end of the previous big hit game, and the count mode is being executed. Except for the variable display, the display is ended when the remaining 3 variable display of the effect design is performed. In order to indicate that the end time of this count mode is near, in the present embodiment, when the remaining number of times reaches 3, the display screen 7a is provided with the remaining period display portion 206, and the last 3 times, the last 2 times, and the last 1 time. Display. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the end time of the count mode.

As described above, according to the game situation, the game profit amount obtained during different periods of the special period (consecutive holiday period) is displayed on each of the plurality of display devices that are separately arranged, so that the player can obtain a desired period. It is possible to easily and surely grasp the game profit obtained in the (special period or unit special period). Further, by changing the display device to be displayed according to the game situation, it becomes possible to easily and surely grasp the game profit.

Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, depending on the game state, a left-handed game in which a game ball is shot by shooting a game ball in the left game area 3A (first game area, first launch area) and a right game are performed. There is a case where a right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is shot in the area 3B (second game area, second launch area). Specifically, low-probability low base state advances the game by left-handed game, low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state, high-probability low base state, jackpot game state advances the game by right-handed game I am supposed to. Then, when these game states change (when changing, in changing scenes), in order to notify the player of the shooting direction (launch area) of the game ball, a shooting direction notification effect (launch area notification effect, instruction effect, Execution of firing area instruction effect). In the present embodiment, a scene in which a game state in which a left-handed game is performed changes from a game state in which a right-handed game is performed, or a situation in which a specific condition (big hit) is established in a game state in which a right-handed game is performed and a right-handed game is continued. Alternatively, the production mode of the firing direction notification effect is diversified in a situation where the game state in which the right-handed game is performed is changed to the game state in which the left-handed game is performed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured with the same specifications as those of the first and second embodiments, and the low-probability low base state progresses the game by left-handed game, and the low-probability high base state, high-probability high base The state, the high-accuracy low base state, and the big hit game state are supposed to progress the game by a right-handed game. In the production mode, the normal production mode advances the game by left-handed game, and the super production mode, the first count production mode, the second count production mode, and the production mode among various bonuses progresses the game by right-handed game. To do. Further, the number of types of the game state (production mode) when performing the right-handed game is set to be larger than that in the game state (production mode) when the left-handed game is performed. In order to notify the player of the types of these game states (production modes) in advance so that the player can easily understand the types, or to notify the player that the types can be estimated to some extent in advance, a plurality of different presentation modes can be used. The direction of launch notification is provided.

That is, the number of types of the firing direction notification effect for notifying the right-handed game is set to be larger than that of the firing direction notification effect for notifying the left-handed game. As a result, when the right-handed game is executed, the player advances the game while estimating (recognizing) which game state (production mode) is to be executed thereafter. This enhances the fun of the game.

95 and 96 show a first firing direction notification effect 211 (first instruction effect) that is executed when the above-described first bonus or third bonus is executed. That is, the first firing direction notification effect 211 is executed when it is determined that the high-probability low-base state (super effect mode, second specific effect mode) advantageous to the player after the big hit game is determined. It As a result, the player who sees the first launch direction notification effect 211 can recognize that the subsequent game is advantageous to himself and can enhance the interest of the game.

FIG. 95(a) is a game state in which a left-handed game is performed (low-probability low-base state), the result of the special symbol hit determination (first special symbol hit determination) is a big hit (specific result), and the effect symbol (special symbol) ) Shows a scene in which the big hit symbol (“777”) indicating the first bonus is stopped and displayed. FIG. 95(b) is a game effect executed following FIG. 95(a), which is a first firing direction notification effect 211 that is started after the big hit (first bonus) is determined and before the big hit game is started. The start time of the first firing direction notification effect 211 is a predetermined timing before the big hit game starts after the big hit symbol is fixedly stopped. Also, the end time of the first launch direction notification effect 211 is when it is confirmed that a game ball has been launched in the launch direction indicated by the first launch direction notification effect 211 (for example, when a big hit game starts, a game ball). Has passed through the start gate 29). Further, the end time may be a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the big hit game was started.

As described above, the first firing direction notification effect 211 is also a notification effect for notifying that the game state will shift to the (most) advantageous game state (effect mode indicating that it is advantageous) for the player after the big hit game is over. .. Therefore, the display screen 7a (middle display part) of the first image display device 7, the display screen 71a (left display part) of the second image display device 71, and the display screen 72a (right display part) of the third image display device 72. Using the display screens of the three display devices, the firing direction notification effect is executed. As shown in FIGS. 95B to 95D, the first firing direction notification effect 211 is composed of a character image 211a and a pictorial image 211b. The character image 211a forming the first firing direction notification effect 211 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device among the three display devices. The first image display device 7 is a second image display device 71 and a third image which are display devices for other effects, such as variable display (decision stop display) of effect symbols, display of effect hold, and reach effect. It is displayed mainly by the display device 72. Therefore, the first image display device 7 is also referred to as a main effect display device, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are also referred to as sub effect display devices.

By displaying a character image that directly conveys the firing direction (firing area) to the player by letters on the first image display device 7, which is the main effect display device that the player pays the most attention to, the player can be sure of the firing direction. Can be made to recognize. Further, this makes it possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the launch direction and causing an unexpected disadvantage. In addition, by displaying the specific character 144 (the picture image 211b) together with the character image 211a, the effect of the effect is enhanced and a highly attractive game effect is provided.

In addition, the pictorial image 211b forming the first firing direction notification effect 211 is displayed using all three display devices. The picture image 211b is an arc-shaped (semi-circular) effect image using the display areas (71a, 7a, 72a) of the three display devices. In addition, with the passage of time, on the arc, from left to right (second display screen 71a→first display screen 7a→third display screen 72a), a direction suggestion image 211c (a plurality of upper images of the arc-shaped image) is displayed. By repeatedly running the (substantially triangular image), it is possible to suggest to the player that the firing direction is the right direction, and to let the player recognize the firing direction. 95(b), (c) and FIG. 96(d) are diagrams showing scenes proceeding in time series. In FIG. 95(b), the direction suggestion image 211c is displayed on the second display screen 71a and the first display screen 7a. In FIG. 95(c), the direction suggestion image 211c moves to the right and 1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in FIG. 96(d), the direction suggestion image 211c is further moved to the right and is displayed on the first display screen 7a and the third display screen 72a. Thereafter, the firing direction notification effect of FIGS. 95(b), (c) and 96(d) is repeated with the lapse of time.

As described above, the character image 211a is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 in order to surely inform the player of the firing direction, and the pictorial image 211b indicates that the advantageous jackpot has been achieved. In order to convey the message to the user, more display devices (three display devices) are used than the other jackpots, and the display is executed in a flashy and conspicuous manner. As a result, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game and increase the player's expectation for obtaining a large amount of game profit. FIG. 96(e) shows that the player shoots a game ball in the right game area 3B (second game area) in accordance with the first launch direction notification effect 211, and the game ball passes through the start gate 29. , Shows the scene where the big hit game (first bonus) shown in FIG. 95(a) is started. During the jackpot game shown in FIG. 96(e), the fifth firing direction notification effect 215 is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. The fifth firing direction notification effect 215 is executed during the big hit game started by the first firing direction notification effect 211, and is displayed in pink (first specific display mode).

Moreover, since the big hit game is started by performing the right-handed game according to the first firing direction notification effect 211, and only the right-handed game is continued thereafter, the fifth firing direction notification effect 215 is confirmed with a relatively small size. Is displayed. Incidentally, in the first firing direction notification effect 211, unlike other firing direction notification effects that accompany a big hit game, a pictorial image suggesting the passage of the start gate 29 is not provided. The character representation of the character image is also different. Further, the specific character 144 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the special firing direction notification effect is different from the other ones and to notify the player that a jackpot that is (most) advantageous to the player has occurred.

97 and 98 show the second firing direction notification effect 212 (second instruction effect) executed when the above-described second bonus is executed. That is, the second firing direction notification effect 212, when the big hit game is over, shifts to a high-accuracy low base state (super effect mode, second specific effect mode) and a low-accuracy high base state (count mode (first count) It is executed when the player shifts to the effect mode)) and when there is a certain second bonus. In addition, the low accurate high base state (first count effect mode) is more advantageous than the low accurate low base state (normal effect mode), but is less advantageous than the high accurate low base state (super effect mode) in the game state ( Production mode). As a result, the player who sees the second firing direction notification effect 212 can increase the sense of tension and the enjoyment of the game, expecting that the subsequent game will be advantageous to himself.

In addition, after executing the second firing direction notification effect 212, the player determines whether to move to the low accuracy high base state (count mode) or the high accuracy low base state (super effect mode). This is notified by the game effect during the big hit game (second bonus), which is started by performing the right-handed game according to the notification effect 212. For example, in the battle effect (purpose achievement effect) executed during the big hit game, if the teammate character defeats the enemy character (if the purpose is achieved), the game state after the big hit game (effect mode) is a highly accurate low base state. (Super production mode) is set. On the other hand, in the battle effect (purpose achievement effect) executed during the big hit game, if the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character (if the purpose cannot be achieved), the game state after the big hit game (effect mode) is low and accurate. It is set to the base state (count mode).

FIG. 97(a) is a gaming state in which a left-handed game is performed (low-probability low base state), the result of the special symbol hit determination (first special symbol hit determination) is a big hit (specific result), and the effect symbol (special symbol) ) Shows a scene where the big hit symbol (“666”) indicating the second bonus is stopped and displayed. 97(b) is a game effect executed subsequent to FIG. 97(a), which is a second firing direction notification effect 212 that is started after the big hit (second bonus) is determined and before the big hit game is started. The start time of the second firing direction notification effect 212 is, like the first firing direction notification effect 211, a predetermined timing after the big hit symbol has been settled and before the big hit game is started. Further, the end time of the second firing direction notification effect 212 is the same as that of the first firing direction notification effect 211.

As described above, in the second firing direction notification effect 212, after the jackpot game is over, the case where the player shifts to the highly accurate low base state (super effect mode), which is (most) advantageous to the player, and the highly accurate low base state, It is also a notification effect for notifying that there is a case where there is a disadvantageous low certainty high base state (count mode). That is, since it is a disadvantageous notification effect compared with the first emission direction notification effect 211, the display screen 7a (middle display section) of the first image display device 7 and the display screen 72a (right display) of the third image display device 72 are displayed. Partial) display screens of the two display devices are used to execute the firing direction notification effect. The second firing direction notification effect 212 has a smaller number of display devices used in the firing direction notification effect than the first firing direction notification effect 211.

This indicates that the second launch direction notification effect 212 is a disadvantage effect for the player when compared with the first launch direction notification effect 211. Further, since the number of display devices to be used is different, the player can clearly recognize the difference in the firing direction notification effect. Further, in order to inform the right-handed game, not the display screen 71a (left display section) of the second image display device 71, but the display screen 7a (middle of the first image display device 7 provided to the right of the game area. The display direction) and the display screen 72a (right display part) of the third image display device 72 are used to execute the firing direction notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 97(b), 97(c) and 98(d), the second firing direction notification effect 212 is composed of a character image 212a and a pictorial image 212b. Further, as shown in FIG. 97(b) and the like, the second firing direction notification effect 212, unlike the first firing direction notification effect 211, displays the character image 212a and the pictorial image 212b in a superimposed manner. On the other hand, the first firing direction notification effect 211 displays the character image 211a and the pictorial image 211b so as not to overlap each other. Also in this display position relationship, the display mode of the notification effect is different.

The character image 212a forming the second firing direction notification effect 212 is displayed by the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device among the three display devices, as in the first firing direction notification effect 211. Displayed on the screen 7a. By displaying a character image that directly conveys the firing direction (firing area) to the player by letters on the first image display device 7, which is the main effect display device that the player pays the most attention to, the player can be sure of the firing direction. Can be made to recognize.

Moreover, the pictorial image 212b which comprises the 2nd firing direction notification production|presentation 212 is displayed using two display devices of a center and a right side. The picture image 212b is composed of a curved arrow effect image indicating the right direction (right game area) using the display areas (7a, 72a) of the two display devices. As shown in FIG. 97( b ), the effect image extends downward from the upper part of the display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7 toward the center, and extends from there to the upper right direction, and the third image display device 72. Has a curved arrow shape (arrow image) extending to the display screen 72a.

In addition, with the passage of time, the arrow image is repeatedly run from left to right (first display screen 7a→third display screen 72a), and a direction suggestion image 212c (a portion indicated by diagonal lines) is played. It is possible to suggest to the player that the launch direction is the right direction and let the player recognize the launch direction. 97(b), (c) and FIG. 98(d) are diagrams showing scenes proceeding in time series. In FIG. 97(b), the direction suggestion image 212c is displayed on the left side (the starting end side of the arrow) of the first display screen 7a, and in FIG. 97(c), the direction suggestion image 212c moves to the right. Is displayed to the right of the first display screen 7a (middle of the arrow). Further, in FIG. 98(d), the direction suggestion image 212c is further moved rightward and is displayed on the third display screen 72a. Thereafter, the firing direction notification effect of FIGS. 97(b), (c) and 98(d) is repeated with the lapse of time.

As described above, the character image 212a is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 in the same manner as the first firing direction notification effect 211 in order to surely inform the player of the firing direction. Then, in order to show that the pictorial image 212b may be in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state, it is determined that the pictorial image 212b is in the relatively advantageous state. Display is executed in a conspicuous manner using a smaller number of display devices (two display devices) than the effect. As a result, the player's sense of tension and expectation for the subsequent game is enhanced, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for obtaining a large amount of game profit. Further, the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the second firing direction notification effect 212 are effects that similarly notify the rightward firing, but the number of display devices used for the firing direction notification effect is different, and The display modes of the image 212a and the pictorial image 212b (display form, traveling angle of image showing right direction, traveling path of image showing right direction) are also different.

In FIG. 98(e), the player shoots a game ball in the right game area 3B (second game area) in accordance with the second launch direction notification effect 212, and the game ball passes through the start gate 29. , The scene where the big hit game (second bonus) shown in FIG. 97(a) is started. During the jackpot game shown in FIG. 98(e), the sixth firing direction notification effect 216 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The sixth firing direction notification effect 216 is executed during the jackpot game started by the second firing direction notification effect 212, has the same display mode as the fifth firing direction notification effect 215, and is pink (first identification). Display mode).

Moreover, since the big hit game is started by performing the right-handed game according to the second firing direction notification effect 212, and only the right-handed game is continued thereafter, the sixth firing direction notification effect 216 is confirmed with a relatively small size. Is displayed. In the second firing direction notification effect 212, unlike the first firing direction notification effect 211, a ball entry suggestion image 212d that is a pictorial image that suggests passage through the start gate 29 is provided. Further, the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the second firing direction notification effect 212 have different character representations of character images. Moreover, the specific character 144 is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a special firing direction notification effect different from the others, and to inform the player that the second bonus has been generated.

99 and 100 show the third firing direction notification effect 213 (third instruction effect) that is executed when the aforementioned fourth bonus is executed. That is, the third firing direction notification effect 213 is executed at the time of the fourth bonus when shifting to the count mode (second count effect mode) after the jackpot game is over. In addition, as described above, the fourth bonus is executed when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, 2R eighth big hit. In addition, the second count effect mode has a low-probability-high base state and a high-probability-high base state. In the high-probability-high base state, if a predetermined number of variable displays have elapsed, it is advantageous to the player. It will shift to a high accurate low base state. However, in many cases of the second count effect mode, the low accurate high base state is set (7/9), and the possibility of the high accurate high base state is set to 2/9. When returning from a right-handed game, which is relatively advantageous to the player, to a left-handed game (normal state), which is disadvantageous to the player, the player always returns via this count mode (second count effect mode).

Therefore, the count mode (second count effect mode) is recognized as a disadvantageous effect mode for notifying that the game state advantageous for the player is over. Actually, of the three types of right-handed notification effects (first firing direction notification effect 211, second firing direction notification effect 212, and third firing direction notification effect 213), there is the highest possibility of being in a disadvantageous state. This is an effect that notifies the occurrence of a bonus. As a result, the player seeing the third firing direction notification effect 213 recognizes that the advantageous game state is approaching the end, and is promoted from the count mode to the super effect mode, or the high base state is counted. With the expectation that a big hit will be generated again during the mode, it is possible to increase the sense of tension and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 99(a) is a game state in which a right-handed game is performed (high-probability low base state), the result of the special symbol hit determination (second special symbol hit determination) is a big hit (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R 7th big hit or 2R 8th big hit), it shows the scene where the effect design (special design) is stopped and displayed with the design (“212”) showing the fourth bonus. The fourth bonus is set to have a shorter opening time of the special winning opening during the big hit game and a smaller game profit that can be acquired, as compared with the first bonus, the second bonus, and the third bonus. Therefore, like the first bonus, the second bonus, and the third bonus, instead of stopping display of the same three-digit effect symbol, at least one of the three-digit effect symbol is a combination of different effect symbols. The display is stopped. That is, the same effect design (disengagement effect design) as at the time of disengagement is stopped and displayed, and the player is not positively notified that a big hit has occurred. At this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol showing a big hit. Due to the stop display of such a deviation effect design and the defeat effect that defeats the battle, the subsequent effect mode (game state) shifts to the disadvantageous effect mode (game state), or it becomes an unfavorable jackpot. Notify you of such things.

FIG. 99(b) is a game effect executed subsequent to FIG. 99(a), which is a third firing direction notification effect 213 that starts after the big hit (fourth bonus) is confirmed and before the big hit game is started. The start time of the third firing direction notification effect 213 is, like the first firing direction notification effect 211, a predetermined timing after the big hit symbol (special symbol) is fixedly stopped and before the big hit game is started. Further, the end time of the third firing direction notification effect 213 is different from the first firing direction notification effect 211, and is set to be after the end of the big hit game (fourth bonus).

As described above, the third firing direction notification effect 213 is advantageous after the end of the big hit game, when it shifts to a low certainty and high base state (count mode), which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and after a predetermined number of times of variable display. It is also a notification effect for notifying that there is a case where there is a case where the high accurate high base state (count mode) that can be promoted to the high accurate low base state exists. However, the possibility of the low accurate and high base state is higher than the possibility of the high accurate and high base state. That is, compared with the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the second firing direction notification effect 212, one display device of the display screen 7a (middle display section) of the first image display device 7 is a disadvantageous notification effect. Using the display screen of, the firing direction notification effect is executed. The number of display devices used in the third firing direction notification effect 213 is smaller than that of the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the second firing direction notification effect 212. This indicates that the third firing direction notification effect 213 is a disadvantageous effect for the player when compared with the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the second firing direction notification effect 212. Further, since the number of display devices to be used is different, the player can clearly recognize the difference in the firing direction notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 99(b), 99(c) and 100(d), the third firing direction notification effect 213 includes a character image 213a and a pictorial image 213b. Further, as shown in FIG. 99B, etc., the third firing direction notification effect 213, similar to the first firing direction notification effect 211, displays the character image 213a and the pictorial image 213b so as not to overlap. .. On the other hand, although the characters of the character image 213a are the same as those of the character image 212a, the second firing direction notification effect 212 displays the character image 212a and the pictorial image 212b in a superimposed manner, while the third firing direction notification is displayed. The effect 213 does not superimpose and display the character image 213a and the picture image 213b. Also in this display position relationship, the display mode of the notification effect is different.

The character image 213a that constitutes the third firing direction notification effect 213 is the main effect display device among the three display devices, similarly to the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the second firing direction notification effect 212. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. By displaying a character image that directly conveys the firing direction (firing area) to the player by letters on the first image display device 7, which is the main effect display device that the player pays the most attention to, the player can be sure of the firing direction. Can be made to recognize. That is, in each of the first firing direction notification effect 211, the second firing direction notification effect 212, and the third firing direction notification effect 213, a character image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7. Further, neither of the character images is displayed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72.

Further, the pictorial image 213b forming the third firing direction notification effect 213 is displayed using only one display device (display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) in the substantially central portion. The picture image 213b is composed of a curved arrow effect image indicating the right direction (right game area) using the display area (7a) of one display device. As shown in FIG. 99( b ), etc., the effect image has a shape of a curved arrow extending in an arc bulging upward from the lower left to the upper right of the display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7 ( (Arrow image).

In addition, with the passage of time, the arrow image is repeatedly run from left to right in the direction suggestion image 213c (the portion shown in black) to indicate to the player that the launch direction is the right direction. , It becomes possible to make the player surely recognize the firing direction. 99(b), (c), and FIG. 100(d) are diagrams showing scenes proceeding in time series. In FIG. 99(b), the direction suggestion image 213c is displayed at the lower left of the first display screen 7a (on the side where the arrow starts), and in FIG. 99(c), the direction suggestion image 213c moves to the right. Is displayed near the center of the first display screen 7a (middle of the arrow). Further, in FIG. 100(d), the direction suggestion image 213c is further moved to the right and is displayed on the upper right side of the first display screen 7a (the end side of the arrow). Thereafter, the firing direction notification effect of FIGS. 99(b), 99(c) and 100(d) is repeated with the lapse of time.

As described above, the character image 213a surely informs the player of the firing direction, and thus the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 is similar to the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the second firing direction notification effect 212. To display. Then, the pictorial image 213b has been determined to shift to the count mode, which is a relatively unfavorable effect mode, and the number of display devices is smaller than the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the second firing direction notification effect 212. Display is performed in an easy-to-understand manner by using one display device. Incidentally, the count mode is a production mode in which the advantageous state (right-handed game) is ended and the game can be shifted to the normal production mode by the left-handed game.

As a result, the player's sense of tension regarding the end of the advantageous state in the subsequent game and the expectation for pulling back the big hit in the count mode are enhanced, and the interest of the game is enhanced. The first firing direction notification effect 211, the second firing direction notification effect 212, and the third firing direction notification effect 213 are all effects for notifying the rightward firing, but a display device used for the firing direction notification effect. The number of images used is different from each other, and the display modes of the picture images 212a and 212b (display form, advancing angle of image showing right direction, advancing path of image showing right direction) are also different.

In FIG. 100(e), the player shoots a game ball in the right game area 3B (second game area) according to the third launch direction notification effect 213, and the game ball passes through the start gate 29, and , Shows a scene where the count mode (second count effect mode) is started after the jackpot game (fourth bonus) generated in FIG. 99(a) is finished. The 4th bonus is a bonus that the opening time of the special winning opening is set in a short period of time compared to other bonuses, and it is a bonus that does not plan to acquire a large amount of game profit, so until the end of the big hit game, 99(b), (c) and the third firing direction notification effect 213 shown in FIG. 100(d) are continued, and when the big hit game ends, the count mode shown in FIG. 100(e) is displayed.

During the count mode shown in FIG. 100(e), the seventh firing direction notification effect 217 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The seventh firing direction notification effect 217 is executed during the effect mode started by the third firing direction notification effect 213 after the jackpot game is over, and the fifth firing direction notification effect 215 and the sixth firing direction notification effect 216. The display mode is different from, and is displayed in blue (second specific display mode).

Moreover, since the big hit game is started by performing the right-handed game according to the third firing direction notification effect 213, and only the right-handed game is continued thereafter, the seventh firing direction notification effect 217 is confirmed with a relatively small size. Is displayed. In the third firing direction notification effect 213, unlike the first firing direction notification effect 211, a ball entry suggestion image 212d, which is a pictorial image that suggests passage through the start gate 29, is provided. Further, the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the third firing direction notification effect 213 are different in the character representation of the character image. Moreover, the specific character 144 is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a special firing direction notification effect different from the others, and indicate to the player that the effect mode is disadvantageous to the player (the fourth bonus has occurred).

The above-described first launch direction notification effect 211, second launch direction notification effect 212, and third launch direction notification effect 213 are all notification effects that prompt the launch to the right game area 3B (second game area), which is the same launch direction. Met. Next, a launch notification effect when changing from a right-handed game to a left-handed game, that is, a notification effect that prompts a launch to a different left game area 3A (first game area) will be described. The number of types of the left-handing notification effect is smaller than that of the right-handing notification effect, and only one is set. This is also because there is only one game state in which the game state in which the game is advanced by the left-handed game is the low-probability low-base state.

101 and 102, the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 (fourth instruction) executed when the above-described count mode (first count effect mode, second count effect mode) ends and the mode shifts to the normal effect mode. Show). That is, in the fourth firing direction notification effect 211, it is determined that the count mode set after the big hit game ends (the low-probability base state ends) and the effect mode shifts to the normal effect mode. If it is executed. As a result, the player who sees the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 recognizes that the advantageous state ends and the subsequent game becomes the normal state (low accurate low base state).

FIG. 101(a) is a count mode for performing a right-handed game (low accurate high base state), the result of the special symbol hit determination (second special symbol hit determination) of a preset number of times (50th) is out ( It is a non-specific result), and shows a scene in which the effect symbol (special symbol) is stopped and displayed with a symbol (“357”) indicating a detachment. 101(b) is a game effect executed subsequent to FIG. 101(a) and shows a scene in which the count mode ends and the total number of game profits acquired during the condominium is displayed. 101(c) is a game effect executed subsequent to FIG. 101(b), in which the effect mode is returned to the normal effect mode and the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 is executed.

The start time of the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 is a predetermined timing after the predetermined number of times (specific number of times) of variable display is executed in the count mode and the count mode end condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 is displayed after the end condition of the count mode is satisfied, and after the notification effect of the end of the count mode and the acquired game profit notification effect are finished. Further, the end time of the fourth launch direction notification effect 214 is when it is confirmed that the game ball has been launched in the launch direction indicated by the fourth launch direction notification effect 214 (for example, entering a predetermined entrance). Is detected). In addition, as the ending time, the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed a predetermined number of times (at least once), or a predetermined time may be elapsed from the start of the fourth firing direction notification effect 214.

As described above, the fourth firing direction notification effect 211 is a notification effect in which the normal state (low accurate low base state, normal effect mode) is entered, and the firing direction is changed from the right direction to the left direction. .. Therefore, the display screen 7a (middle display part) of the first image display device 7, the display screen 71a (left display part) of the second image display device 71, and the display screen 72a (right display part) of the third image display device 72. Using the display screens of the three display devices, the firing direction notification effect is executed. As shown in FIGS. 101(c), 102(d), and (e), the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 is composed of a character image 214a and a pictorial image 214b. The character image 211a forming the fourth firing direction notification effect 211 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device among the three display devices, and on the second image display device 71. It is displayed on the screen 71a and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72.

Displaying a character image 214a that directly conveys the shooting direction (launch area) to the player by characters on all three display devices including the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device that the player pays the most attention to. Thus, it becomes possible for the player to surely recognize the change in the firing direction. In addition, the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 is displayed by using all three display devices in order to make the firing direction more conspicuous in order to switch the state from the right-handed game to the left-handed game so far. Further, since the game state is the most unfavorable low-probability low base state for the player, it is necessary to surely prevent the player from firing in the wrong firing direction to cause an unexpected disadvantage. If such an erroneous firing occurs, the player may have less interest in the game and the player may end the game.

In addition, the picture image 214b forming the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 is displayed using all three display devices, similarly to the character image 214a. The pictorial image 214b is a strip-shaped (straight line having a predetermined width) effect image using the display areas (72a, 7a, 71a) of the three display devices. In addition, with the passage of time, on the belt from right to left (third display screen 72a→first display screen 7a→second display screen 71a), a direction suggestion image 214c (arrows in the belt-shaped image, characters By repeatedly running the image itself), it is possible to suggest to the player that the firing direction is the left direction, and to let the player recognize the firing direction. Specifically, the character image 214a ("Please return to the left") superimposed on the band is scroll-displayed on the band from right to left. Further, the arrow in the band-shaped image is displayed blinking on the spot.

101(c), 102(d), and (e) are diagrams showing scenes proceeding in time series, in which the character image 214a, which is the direction suggestion image 214c, changes from the third display screen 72a to the first display screen 7a. To the second display screen 71a from the first display screen 7a to the left to be displayed (scroll display to the left). After that, the firing direction notification effect of FIG. 101(c), FIG. 102(d), and (e) is repeated with the passage of time.

As described above, the character image 214a is displayed on the display screens of the three display devices including the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 and the pictorial image 211b is also displayed in order to surely inform the player of the firing direction. Similarly, the display is conspicuously executed by using three display devices similar to the notification effect that uses the largest number of display devices among the other emission direction notification effects. This makes it possible for the player to reliably recognize that the firing direction has changed. 102 (e), the game ball is fired in the left game area according to the fourth launch direction notification effect 214, the game ball enters the first starting opening 20, and the effect symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable display. Show the scene that started. Even after the start of the variable display, the display of the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 is maintained for a predetermined time. Further, FIG. 102(f) is a scene following FIG. 102(e) and shows a scene in which the display of the fourth firing direction notification effect 214 is finished when the effect symbol continues to be displayed for a predetermined period of time.

As described above, the number of firing direction notification effects for notifying the execution of the left-handed game is set to be smaller than the number of firing direction notification effects for notifying the execution of the right-handed game. In addition, a plurality of types (three or more) of firing direction notification effects for informing the execution of the right-handed game are set, and these display modes are different. Further, these differ in the character image indicating the firing direction, the picture image, the positional relationship between the character image and the picture image, the number of display devices used for the notification effect, etc., and a large number of firing direction notification effects are provided. Even so, the player can easily identify these. In addition, since the launch direction notification effect is made to correspond to the type of jackpot (type of effect mode), the player can guess the subsequent game state and effect mode by watching the emission direction notification effect. It becomes possible to grasp. Further, this makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit) that executes the above-described instruction effect for instructing the firing direction (firing area) is referred to as "firing area instruction means". Further, the above-described first bonus and third bonus are also referred to as "first special game", the second bonus is referred to as "second special game", and the fourth bonus is also referred to as "third special game". Further, the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit) for setting the effect mode (normal effect mode, count mode, super effect mode, etc.) is also referred to as "effect mode setting means". Further, the count mode is also referred to as a "first specific effect mode", the super effect mode is referred to as a "second specific effect mode", and the normal effect mode is referred to as a "third specific effect mode".

Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. In the present embodiment, one mode of displaying the number of times of variable display (execution number) of effect symbols (special symbols) will be described. FIG. 103A shows a scene during execution of the super effect mode (second super effect mode). On the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the first variation count display section 203 ("the first bonus variation count display, which indicates the number of variations of the effect symbol (special symbol) after the last big hit game is finished. “Part”, “execution period display unit”, and “variation number display unit”) are provided. "22 times" is displayed on the first variation count display unit 203, and 22 variations of the effect symbol are displayed after the jackpot game is over. Currently, the display screen 7a (first display) of the image display device 7 is displayed. On the screen), the 23rd effect design (special design) variable display (simply referred to as “variable display”) is being executed.

FIG. 103(b) is a scene in which the second super effect mode shown in FIG. 103(a) is being continued, and the variable display is performed 23 more times from the scene shown in FIG. 103(a), and the second super effect mode is displayed. This is the scene where the 46th variation display is being performed. As shown in FIG. 103(b), a predetermined reach effect 221 (game effect, specific game effect) is executed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. When the reach effect 221 shown in this example is executed, the first display screen 7a (first display unit), the second display screen 71a (second display unit), and the third display screen 72a (shown in FIG. 103(a)) In (), a part of the game information that has been displayed until then is kept displayed, and the other game information is hidden. As a result, it is possible to secure the display area of the reach effect 221 (game effect), enhance the visibility, and execute the game effect having a higher taste.

As the game information that is still displayed when the reach effect 221 (specific game effect) shown in FIG. 103(b) is executed, the first change number display section 203 (change number display section) displayed on the second display screen 71a. There is. Further, as game information to be hidden, a firing direction display unit 162 displayed on the first display screen 7a, a second effect hold display area 9d (effect hold display area), a total gained profit display unit (second profit information display). Part) 164, the second effect mode display part (selection mode display part) 202 displayed on the second display screen 71a, the effect mode display part (first effect mode display part) 171, and the third displayed on the third display screen. There is a 2 gained profit display unit 204 (first profit information display unit) and a second variation count display unit 205 (second bonus variation count display unit, period information display unit).

In this way, when the reach effect 221 is performed, the game information other than the effect symbol used for the reach effect 221 is provided from the first display screen 7a which is provided in the substantially central portion of the game area and in which the player constantly watches the game. Is hidden and the reach effect 221 is displayed preferentially. Further, the reach effect 221 is the display screen of the second image display device 71 provided around the first image display device 7 (outside the game area, outside the game area) together with the display screen 7a of the first image display device 71. 71a and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 is also executed. Then, a part of the game information is left on the display screen of the sub-image display device (the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or/and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72), and the reach is reached. It is possible to confirm the game information while the performance is being executed.

In this way, the game information (first variation number display unit 203) which is kept displayed during the execution of the reach effect 221 is displayed around the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device (outside the game area). Display on a sub-display device provided outside the game area). As a result, it is possible to always check the game situation without obstructing the visibility of the reach effect 221 as much as possible. On the second display screen 71a, both the first variation count display unit 203 and the reach effect 221 are displayed, and when both are superimposed (superposed) and displayed, the first variation count display unit 203 is displayed on the front side in preference to the reach effect 221. As a result, the first variation count display unit 203 can always check the game status without the visibility being hindered by the reach effect. It should be noted that FIG. 103B shows a scene in which the defeat effect is executed as a result of the reach effect 221, and shows that the above-described fourth bonus is generated by the defeat effect.

In FIG. 103(c), the defeat effect is confirmed by the reach effect shown in FIG. 103(b), the variable display of the effect symbol is confirmed (“212”), and the special symbol indicates the execution of the fourth bonus. The scene in which the symbol is definitely stopped is shown. In the first variation number display section 203, the display of "46 times" is made because the variation display of the effect symbol shown in FIG. 103(b) is confirmed. Further, on the first display screen 7a, a third firing direction notification effect 213 is executed, which suggests (instructs) that the game ball is shot to the right game area and the game ball is passed (entered) to the start gate 29. ing. In this way, after the big hit is confirmed, even in the game state before the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (big hit standby state), the first variation count display unit 203 is in the display state on the second display screen 71a. ..

In FIG. 104(d), from the scene shown in FIG. 103(c), the player shoots a game ball in the right game area and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 to execute the big hit game (fourth bonus). , The scene in which the second count effect mode is set after the end of the fourth bonus is shown. The numbers (the number of times of display, the number of times) displayed on the first fluctuation number display unit 203 are initialized (reset to "0") based on the fact that the big hit game is executed. Further, the timing of resetting the display count to "0" is the timing of ending the big hit game. Further, the reset display timing may be performed based on the end of the big hit game, or may be performed based on that the effect mode set after the end of the big hit game is displayed. In FIG. 104(d), since the first variation display after the jackpot game (fourth bonus) is finished, "0" is displayed in the first variation number display section 203, and the remaining period is displayed. “49 times” is displayed on the display unit 206. That is, the display of the first fluctuation number display unit 203 is updated (added) each time the fluctuation display is confirmed, and the display of the remaining period display unit 206 is updated (subtracted) each time the fluctuation display is started. To be done.

The second count effect mode (which is set after the end of the fourth bonus) shown in FIG. 104(d) (low-probability-high base state or high-probability-high base state) is, as described above, (the result of the special symbol hit determination is When the variable display of the effect symbol is executed 50 times (in some cases, 100 times) without ending with a big hit, it ends and shifts to another effect mode. In addition, when the game state of the second count effect mode is a low accurate high base state, the display shifts to the normal effect mode based on the fact that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed 50 times (specific number of times), In the case of the high accuracy base state, the display shifts to the super production mode based on the fact that the variable display of the production symbol is executed 50 times (specific number of times).

In the second count effect mode shown in this example, the first number-of-changes display section 203 is displayed on the second display screen 71a in the same manner as described above, and the second count effect mode being executed on the first display screen 7a ( The remaining period display unit 206 that allows the user to grasp and recognize the remaining period of the special effect mode) is displayed. As a result, during execution of the second count effect mode (special effect mode), the remaining period (remaining number of times of fluctuation display) of the effect mode (game state) in execution is grasped and fluctuation from the previous big hit game. It is possible to grasp the number of times of display (the number of times of determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid). It should be noted that the number of times of display on the first fluctuation number display unit 203 is the number of times that the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol are added. Further, various game information shown in FIG. 104(d) is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a.

FIG. 104(e) is a scene in which the second count effect mode in FIG. 104(d) is continuously executed, and shows a scene in which the fifth variable display is being executed in the second count effect mode. In this scene as well, the first variation count display unit 203 and the remaining period display unit 206 are both displayed. FIG. 104(f) is a scene in which the second count effect mode shown in FIG. 104(d) and FIG. 104(e) is continuously executed, and is the 36th variation display in the second count effect mode. The scene in which the effect 221 is executed is shown. Similar to that described with reference to FIG. 103B, the reach effect is executed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. Then, in the game information that has been displayed until then, as shown in FIG. 104(e), a part of the game information is maintained and the other is hidden. As a result, it is possible to secure the display area of the reach effect 221 (game effect, specific game effect), improve the visibility, and execute the game effect having a higher taste.

As the game information for maintaining the display when the reach effect 221 (specific game effect) shown in FIG. 103(b) is executed, the first change number display section 203 (change number display section) displayed on the second display screen 71a. ). Further, as game information to be hidden, a firing direction display unit 162 displayed on the first display screen 7a, a second effect hold display area 9d (effect hold display area), a total gained profit display unit (second profit information display). Part) 164, effect mode display part (first effect mode display part) 171, remaining period display part 206, second acquired profit display part 204 (first profit information display part) displayed on the third display screen, second There is a variation count display unit 205 (a second bonus variation count display unit and a period information display unit). In this way, when the reach effect 221 (specific game effect) occurs in the second count effect mode (special effect mode), the remaining period display unit 206 indicating the remaining period of the second count effect mode being executed is not displayed. The first fluctuation number display unit 203 indicating the number of times of execution of variable display of effect symbols (special symbols) from the start of the second count effect mode maintains the display.

Similarly to FIG. 103(b), when the reach effect 221 is performed, an effect used for the reach effect 221 is provided from the first display screen 7a which is provided in the substantially central portion of the game area and in which the player constantly watches and plays the game. The game information other than the symbols is hidden and the reach effect 221 is displayed preferentially. Further, the reach effect 221 is the display screen of the second image display device 71 provided around the first image display device 7 (outside the game area, outside the game area) together with the display screen 7a of the first image display device 71. 71a and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 is also executed. Then, a part of the game information is left on the display screen of the sub-image display device (the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or/and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72), and the reach is reached. It is possible to confirm the game information while the performance is being executed.

In this way, the game information (first variation number display unit 203) which is kept displayed during the execution of the reach effect 221 is displayed around the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device (outside the game area). Display on a sub-display device provided outside the game area). As a result, it is possible to always check the game situation without obstructing the visibility of the reach effect 221 as much as possible. Further, even if the display of the remaining period of the effect mode (second count effect mode) that is being executed disappears, the display of the first variation number display unit 203 that displays the number of times of variation display from the start of the effect mode is maintained. To do. Thereby, even if the remaining period display unit 206 is not displayed, by confirming the display of the first variation number display unit 203, the remaining period of the effect mode (second count effect mode) being executed is grasped (estimated). ) Is possible.

As shown in FIG. 104(f), on the second display screen 71a, both the first variation count display unit 203 and the reach effect 221 are displayed, and both are displayed in a superposed (superposed) manner. In this case, the first variation count display unit 203 is displayed on the front side in preference to the reach effect 221. As a result, the first variation count display unit 203 can always check the game status without the visibility being hindered by the reach effect. It should be noted that FIG. 103B shows a scene in which the defeat effect is executed as a result of the reach effect 221, and shows that the above-described fourth bonus is generated by the defeat effect.

FIG. 105(g) is a scene showing that the result of the reach effect 221 is a big hit (first bonus, “777”) in the same variable display as that shown in FIG. 104(f). At this time as well, the first variation count display unit 203 (displaying “35 times” because it is before confirmation stop) is displayed on the second display screen 71a, and the remaining period display unit 206 is not displayed on the first display screen 7a. It remains as it is. In addition, an effect indicating a big hit is executed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a.

In FIG. 105(h), the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) being executed in FIG. 105(g) is fixedly stopped and the big hit (first bonus, “777”) is fixed, and the big hit standby state is set. It shows the scene. As shown in FIG. 105(h), the first firing direction notification effect 211 is executed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. Even in the big hit standby state, the first variation count display unit 203 is displayed on the second display screen 71a, and the variation display shown in FIG. 105(g) is confirmed. "36 times" is displayed.

Further, on the second display screen 71a, when both the first fluctuation number display unit 203 and the first firing direction notification effect 211 are displayed and both are displayed in a superimposed (superposed) manner, the first The number-of-changes display unit 203 is displayed on the front side in preference to the first firing direction notification effect 211. As a result, the player can grasp the number of times of variable display after the last big hit game is finished, even in the big hit standby state.

FIG. 105(i) shows the big hit game (first bonus) by allowing the player to shoot a game ball to the right game area and pass the game ball to the start gate 29 in the big hit waiting state shown in FIG. 104(h). It shows the scene that started. The first variation count display unit 203 is displayed on the second display screen 71a even during the big hit game, and during the big hit game, it is possible to grasp the number of times of the fluctuation display after the last big hit game is finished.

Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. In the fifth embodiment, various reach effects and precursor effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Here, FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the flow of effects performed in the low accurate low base state. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for describing the execution condition of the precursor effect. 108 and 109 are screen diagrams showing a specific example of the indication effect. FIG. 110 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the effect control RAM 913. FIG. 111 is a flowchart exemplifying the indication effect pattern setting process.

[Regarding the flow of production in the low-precision low-base state]
First, based on FIG. 106, a flow of effects in the low accurate low base state will be described. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 when the game is controlled in the low accurate low base state, the first special symbol winning/judging determination is executed. Then, when the first special symbol determination is executed, in the first special symbol display 41a, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol hit determination is stopped and displayed. .. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, as variable display of the first special symbol is started, variable display of three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3) is started ( See FIG. 106A). Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 7b, a part of the symbol strings of the effect symbols in which the numbers "1" to "9" are continuously written in the vertical direction from bottom to top are three rows in the horizontal direction. It is displayed, and as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, scroll display of three symbol columns is started so that these symbol columns scroll from top to bottom (for example, FIG. 108). (See (A)).

Here, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination performed at the start of variable display of the first special symbol is "miss" and it is decided not to execute the reach effect, the variable display of the first special symbol At the end of the game, the three effect symbols indicating the broke (for example, "458") are pseudo-stopped, and the three special symbols are stopped as the first special symbol is displayed. (See FIG. 106B) is performed. Here, "pseudo stop" means to swing the effect symbol on the spot with almost no movement, and "main stop" means to completely stop the effect symbol.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination is "big hit", or if it is determined to perform reach production of "miss", during the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, production A predetermined left symbol (eg, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column of the symbol display area 7b, and subsequently, a right symbol (eg, 4 symbols) showing the same effect symbol as the left symbol is generated in the right column of the effect symbol display area 7b. A pre-reach effect that causes a pseudo stop is performed. Then, as a result of such pre-reach effect, when the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo stopped, the reach is established (see FIG. 106(C)).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, so-called pseudo continuous production may be performed as such pre-reach pre-reach production. This pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is variably displayed multiple times in the effect symbol display area 7b during one variable display of the special symbol. When this pseudo continuous effect is executed before the reach is established, for example, the following effect display is performed.

That is, although not shown in the figure, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol was started, for example, first the left symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the right symbol A right symbol different from (for example, one symbol) is pseudo-stopped, and thereafter, seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row as a middle symbol for notifying the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is notified by pseudo stopping 7 symbols in the middle row, but in another embodiment, the player performs a pseudo continuous effect such as "NEXT". The recognizable special symbol may be pseudo-stopped in the middle row to notify the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

As described above, after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, when the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the variation effect of the pseudo second station following the variation effect of the pseudo first station is started. It Specifically, after the character "x2" that suggests the start of the pseudo second-order variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x2" is first displayed. A small display is made in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and along with this, scroll display of the three symbol rows is restarted. In addition, in FIG. 109 (F) to be described later, as the pseudo continuous effect is started twice during the variable display of the first special symbol once, it is suggested that the pseudo third continuous effect is started. The state where the character "x3" is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a is illustrated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed than in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Is configured. Further, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice within the same change (when the reach effect is executed by developing to the pseudo third continuous time), the pseudo continuous effect is executed only once within the same change. The jackpot reliability is higher than in the case (when the reach effect is executed by developing to the pseudo second consecutive game).

Up to this point, the case where "pre-reach pseudo-ream" is performed in which seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row and a pseudo-reproduction is performed before the reach is established has been described, but the same symbol is used as the left symbol and the right symbol. In some cases, after the production symbols are pseudo-stopped, “post-reach pseudo-relation” is performed in which the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row and the pseudo-reproduction is executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 106, when the variation effect pattern for executing the reach effect is set during the variation display of the first special symbol this time, a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Then, for example, first, the left symbol (for example, two symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column, and subsequently, the same right symbol (for example, two symbols) as the left symbol is pseudo-stopped in the right column and the reach is established (Fig. 106 ( See C)). Although not shown in the figure, after the right symbol is pseudo-stopped (the same as the right symbol), the left symbol is pseudo-stopped and the reach is established, or the same left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped at the same time. In some cases, reach is established.

In this way, when the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo stopped and the reach is established, the player is expected to expect the same effect symbol as these effect symbols (reach symbol) to stop in the middle row. A predetermined reach effect is performed. In the fifth embodiment, as a reach effect that can be executed along with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state, a normal short reach (see FIG. 106D) and a normal long reach (FIG. 106(F)). Five types of reach effects are prepared: a first SP reach (see FIG. 106G), a second SP reach (see FIG. 106H), and an SPSP reach (see FIG. 106J).

The normal short reach (see FIG. 106(D)) is a reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). This normal short reach is a reach production in which the production execution time is shorter than that of a normal long reach described later, and when the reach is established, the normal short reach is first performed. When this normal short reach is performed, when the reach is established, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases, and the same middle symbol or reach symbol as the reach symbol is formed between the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach. A scroll display of a middle symbol row for pseudo-stopping a different middle symbol is performed.

Here, when the variation effect pattern for notifying the winning by the normal short reach (see FIG. 106(D)) is set, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 106(E)) is performed by the normal short reach. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination of this time is "big hit", the medium symbol same as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the activated line to make a doublet (for example, "222"). After the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, a hit notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination this time is "miss", the reach symbol (for example, "232") is produced by virtually stopping the middle symbol different from the reach symbol on the activated line. After the pseudo stop, a loss notification effect for permanently stopping these effect symbols is performed.

On the other hand, when a variation effect pattern that develops from normal short reach to another reach effect is set, the following effect is performed. For example, in the case where a variation effect pattern for notifying a win or loss is set in the normal long reach by expanding from the normal short reach (refer to FIG. 106D) to the normal long reach (refer to FIG. 106(f)), the normal short reach is set. At the end of the reach, development suggestion production that suggests the development to normal long reach is performed and high speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols is resumed, and reach production develops to normal long reach. In this normal long reach, for example, an effect display is displayed in which a predetermined character expects the symbol alignment in the central area of the first display screen 7a.

Note that the normal long reach is a reach effect having the next highest jackpot reliability among the five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 5%). In most cases, the normal long reach is reached. From other to the other reach production is not extended to the normal long reach, notification of the loss is performed (see FIG. 106(E)), but if the result of this time's first special symbol judgment is a big hit, normal long reach In some cases, a hit notification effect (see FIG. 106(E)) is performed. Further, when a variation effect pattern that develops from normal long reach to another reach effect is set, normal long reach to the first SP reach (see FIG. 106(G)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 106(J)). ), reach production will be developed.

Here, the 1st SP reach (see FIG. 106(G)) is a reach effect having the second highest jackpot reliability after the normal long reach (eg, jackpot reliability: about 11%), and the normal long reach to the 1st SP reach. In the case of the development, the following effect display is performed. That is, the high-speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols is restarted after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the activated line, and the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) that is pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b, While moving down while maintaining the reach state, the area is moved to the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Then, in the central area of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display that expects a big hit is performed.

In this way, when the first SP reach is developed, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 106(I)) for notifying the winning is performed in the first SP reach, and when the first SP reach reaches the SPSP reach (FIG. 106(J ) See) in some cases.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, in addition to the flow of the reach effect described above, the first SP reach (FIG. 106(G)) or a normal short reach to a second SP reach (see FIG. 106(H)).

Here, the second SP reach (see FIG. 106(H)) is a reach effect in which the jackpot reliability is slightly higher than that of the first SP reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 12%), and the normal short reach to the second SP reach. In the case of the development, the following effect display is performed. That is, the high-speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols is restarted after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the activated line, and the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) that is pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b, While moving down while maintaining the reach state, the area is moved to the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Then, in the central area of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display that expects a big hit is performed.

In this way, the first SP reach and the second SP reach have the same screen configuration and perform the effect display that expects a big hit, but these reach effects have different effect contents. Specifically, in the 1st SP reach (see FIG. 106(G)), if the own character can prevent the enemy character from attacking, it will be a big hit, and conversely, if the own character cannot prevent the enemy character from attacking, it will be lost. Performance display is performed. On the other hand, the second SP reach (see FIG. 106(H)) is configured as a mission effect, and if the player character succeeds in the mission, it becomes a big hit, and conversely, if the player character fails in the mission, an effect display is displayed. ..

When the 1st SP reach and the 2nd SP reach are developed, since the jackpot reliability of these reach effects is relatively low, the hit notification effect is better than the hit notification effect as the winning notification effect (see FIG. 106(I)). Is also easy to execute. Therefore, when the player develops into the first SP reach or the second SP reach, the player expects to develop the SPSP reach (see FIG. 106(J)) by pretending that the first SP reach (or the second SP reach) is lost. Will be done.

Here, SPSP reach (see FIG. 106(J)) is a reach effect having the highest jackpot reliability among the above-mentioned five types of reach effects. In the fifth embodiment, when the reach is established and the SPSP reach is directly developed (see FIGS. 106C and J), the normal short reach (see FIG. 106D) to the normal long reach (see FIG. 106). (F)) to SPSP reach, normal short reach to SPSP reach (see FIG. 106G), and normal short reach to second SP reach. In some cases, the SPSP reach is developed via the reach (see FIG. 106(H)).

In the fifth embodiment, four types of SPSP reach are prepared, and when the SPSP reach is developed, first, a title display for notifying the type of SPSP reach is performed. For example, a title display suggesting that the player character develops into an SPSP reach (A battle) in which the player character battles with the enemy character A is displayed. In addition, in the title display performed at the start of SPSP reach, there are a case where the characters forming the title display are displayed in white, a case where they are displayed in red, and a case where they are displayed in rainbow.

On the other hand, after the title is displayed and before the end of the SPSP reach, the effect display is displayed in which the self character and the enemy character (here, the enemy character A) repeatedly attack and defend. Then, when the end of the SPSP reach is reached, a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed. Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are displayed.

In this first effect button operation promotion effect, the first operation is performed at the timing when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period, or when the effective period ends without operating the first effect button 63a. An effect called cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. This cut-in is a notice effect that suggests how big the jackpot reliability is, and in the present embodiment, a case where a green cut-in for displaying a green cut-in image is performed and a case where a red cut-in is performed are performed. There are a case where a red cut-in for superimposing an image is performed and a case where a gold cut-in for superimposing a gold cut-in image is performed.

When the cut-in occurs in this way and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the second effect button operation promotion effect (for example, refer to FIG. 108(A)) that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b is performed. During the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, a second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b, characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b of "press!", and an effective period. The validity period gauge that indicates the remaining time is displayed. In the fifth embodiment, as the second effect button image, the second effect button image showing the small second effect button 63b is displayed, and the second effect button image showing the second effect button image 63b having the medium size is displayed. There are cases where the effect button image is displayed (see FIG. 108(A)) and cases where the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b is displayed.

When the player operates the second effect button 63b during the effective period of such second effect button operation promotion effect, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 106(K)) is an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation. Done. That is, when the result of the first special symbol hit/miss determination this time is a big hit, a victory effect showing that the own character wins over the enemy character and the effect symbol showing the double eyes are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped. A hit notification effect is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss determination this time is a loss, the defeat effect that shows how your character is defeated by the enemy character, and the effect symbol that shows the reach loss pattern are pseudo-stopped and then stopped. Loss notification production is performed.

It should be noted that the size of the second effect button 63b indicated by the second effect button image displayed during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect corresponds to the jackpot reliability, and the second size of the medium size. When the second effect button image showing the effect button 63b is displayed, the hit notification effect is executed as an operation corresponding effect as compared with the case where the second effect button image showing the small second effect button 63b is displayed. There is a feature that it is easy to be done. Further, when the second effect button image showing the small second effect button 63b is displayed, compared with the case where the second effect button image showing the second effect button 63b having a medium size is displayed. There is a feature that a loss notification effect is easily executed as an operation corresponding effect.

Further, the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b can be displayed when the result of the first special symbol hit/miss determination this time is a hit, but is not displayed when it is a loss. There is. Therefore, the second effect button operation promotion effect that displays the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b can be said to be a notice effect with a jackpot reliability of 100%.

[Foreshadowing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the indication effect executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described. By the way, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state, for example, reach production with higher jackpot reliability than normal short reach such as normal long reach, first SP reach, second SP reach, SPSP reach. If the situation in which the hit notification effect is not executed despite the fact that it was broken continues for a long time, the player's expectation for the big hit decreases, and as a result, the operating rate of the game machine may decrease. is there. Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, for example, it is possible to frequently perform an effect that expects a big hit, but it is the opposite to do such an effect frequently in a situation where the possibility of being a big hit is extremely low. This is an effect, and on the contrary, there is a possibility that the player is made uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, when the loss notification effect is executed by a reach effect other than the normal short reach, the first special symbol winning/holding held at the time when the loss notification effect is executed. The jackpot game is executed on the condition that the right to judge is to include a hit notification effect or a variable effect that may lead to a jackpot. A sign effect (an example of an expected effect) that makes a player expect is executed. Specifically, it is as follows.

That is, when the loss notification effect is executed in the normal long reach (see FIG. 107(A)), when the loss notification effect is executed in the first SP reach (see FIG. 107(B)), or in the second SP reach. When the notification effect is executed (see FIG. 107(C)), in the right of the first special symbol winning/discarding determination that is held at the time when any of these three loss notification effects is executed, the corresponding first The precursor effect is provided on condition that the pseudo effect is performed twice during the variable display of the 1 special symbol and the variable effect develops into the pseudo third effect (see FIG. 107(E)). I'm going to do it. In this way, when the variation effect develops up to the pseudo third series after the precursor effect is performed (see FIG. 107(E)), as illustrated in FIGS. 107(F) and (G), in most cases, Eventually, a reach effect of SP reach or higher (first SP reach, second SP reach, or SPSP reach) is developed, and a hit notification effect (or a loss notification effect) is executed.

In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 107A to 107C, when any of the three loss notification effects described above is executed, the hold is performed at the time when any of these three loss notification effects is executed. In the right of the first special symbol right or wrong determination that is being performed, during the variable display of the corresponding first special symbol, the pseudo continuous production is developed into SPSP reach without being executed, and the hit notification production (or the lost notification production is performed). ) Is to be executed (see FIGS. 107(H), (J), and (G)), or a second notification from a pseudo second to SPSP reach and a hit notification effect (or a loss notification effect) is executed. The precursor effect is to be executed on condition that what is to be performed (see FIGS. 107(I), (J), and (G)) is included.

As is apparent from these configurations, when the precursor effect is executed in response to the execution of any of the above-mentioned three loss notification effects, the first special symbol win/loss determination held at the time when the loss notification effect is executed There is a case where the fluctuating effect develops in the pseudo third succession (big hit reliability: about 15%) in accordance with the fact that the player performs the big hit by the synergistic effect of the precursor effect and the pseudo continuous effect. It is possible to effectively improve the expectation of.

In addition, when the precursor effect is executed in response to the execution of any of the three loss notification effects, depending on the determination of the first special symbol winning/holding being held when the loss notification effect is executed. Even if the fluctuating effect does not develop to the pseudo third consecutive game, SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach effect, is executed. Therefore, the synergistic effect of the precursor effect and these reach effects results in a game for a jackpot. It is possible to effectively improve the expectation of the person. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which the variation effect does not develop into the third pseudo sequence and develops into SPSP reach. Not limited to this, for example, when the fluctuating effect does not develop to the pseudo third consecutive game, a special reach (which is different from SPSP reach) that is a highly reliable reach effect may be developed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the loss notification effect is executed in the normal long reach, the first SP reach, or the second SP reach, it is suspended at the time of executing the loss notification effect. (Maximum of 4) In the right of the first special symbol hit determination, in response to the first special symbol hit determination (suggest that the jackpot game is relatively likely to be executed ) When the "implication effect" is executed, the precursor effect is executed.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 107(K) to (M), the SPSP reach loses due to the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state. When the notification effect is executed (see FIG. 107(K)), in the right of the first special symbol right/wrong judgment that is held at the time when this loss notification effect is executed, the variation of the corresponding first special symbol A configuration is also adopted in which the precursor effect is executed on condition that the hit notification effect is included in the display. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which, if a precursor effect is generated in response to the execution of the loss notification effect in the SPSP reach effect, the jackpot in the hold is determined. Therefore, the precursor effect may function not only as an expected effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed but also as a confirmed notification effect that definitely informs that the jackpot game will be executed. is there.

By adopting these configurations, it is possible to let the player pay attention to which reach effect the loss notification effect has been executed, and after the precursor effect is started, the player wins the jackpot. In the fluctuating effect that is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol winning/holding judgment that is being held, the number of pseudo-staffs in which the fluctuating effect develops (how many times the pseudo-consecutive effect is executed. You can enjoy the game while paying attention to (Ruka).

In addition, when the hit notification effect is executed in any of the reach effects, the effect pattern of the double-eye effect that notifies the "big hit" is stopped after the pseudo stop, and the big hit game according to the "big hit" is played. Will be executed. For this reason, temporarily, in the right of the first special symbol hit determination held at the time when the hit notification effect is executed, the hit notification effect is to be executed, and the three types of " Even if one of the “implication effects” is to be executed, the need to execute the precursor effect can be said to be low. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, even if the execution condition of the predictive effect (for the hit notification effect or the suggestive effect performed after the predictive effect) is satisfied at the time when the hit notification effect is executed, the predictive effect is not executed. The configuration is adopted.

By the way, in the case of comparing the loss notification effect of pseudo-stopping the production design showing the streak and then the stop notification production of pseudo-stopping the production design showing the reach loss eye, the former is more The appearance rate is higher than the latter. For this reason, if it is possible to execute the predictive effect even when the loss notification effect of performing a pseudo stop of the effect symbol indicating the streak and then the main stop is performed, the appearance rate of the predictive effect becomes too high, As a result, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to expect a big hit even if the precursor effect appears. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, the omen effect (related to the hit notification effect or the suggestion effect performed after the omen effect) is performed at the time when the loss notification effect of pseudo-stopping the effect symbol indicating the streak and then stopping the effect is executed. Even if the execution condition of is satisfied, a configuration that does not execute the precursor effect is also adopted.

(Specific example of precursor production)
108 and 109, the loss notification effect is executed in the final stage of the SPSP reach, and it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed in the right of the first special symbol hit/miss determination held at the time when this loss notification effect is executed. It is a screen figure which shows the specific example of the aura effect performed when what is to be performed is included. In the following description based on FIGS. 108 and 109, for convenience of description, the first effect holding 9a indicating that the first special symbol winning/disabling determination is held is simply called a “holding icon”, and this holding icon is displayed. The display area is referred to as a hold icon display area 9c (in place of the first effect hold display area 9c). Also, the “corresponding icon” as a variation suggesting image that suggests that the first special symbol and the first effect symbol 8 are being displayed in variation is displayed in the icon display area 9e (see, for example, FIG. 68(A)). It will be described as a thing.

During the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state, when the cut-in occurs and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 108(A)). FIG. 108(A) shows a second effect button 63b of a medium size during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect in a state where the red icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. An example is shown in which the two effect button images, characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "Press!", and the effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the first display screen 7a. There is.

When the determination result of the first special symbol hit/miss determination this time is “miss”, for example, “343 The three effect symbols showing the reach lost eyes of "" are pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then are stopped as they are (see FIG. 108(B)). Along with this, the icon (here, the red icon) displayed in the icon display area 9e is deleted from the first display screen 7a.

When the predetermined confirmation time (eg, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed after the three effect symbols indicating the reach lost eye of "343" have been completely stopped, the first special symbol hit determination corresponding to the first hold icon is executed. Then, along with this, shift processing is performed on each of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 108(C), the first hold icon (here, white icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon. At the same time, the remaining two hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c are shifted (in the hold icon display area 9c) to the icon display area 9e side. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit determination, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIG. 108(C)). ..

In this way, when the next variation of the variation in which the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach is started, the above-mentioned precursor effect is started (see FIG. 108(D)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 108(D), an electrocardiogram image imitating an electrocardiogram is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and a precursor effect sound that directs the display of the electrocardiogram image such as "picone" is generated. It is output from the speaker 67. Although not shown in the figure, this precursor effect is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 seconds).

Here, the determination result of the first special symbol appropriateness determination corresponding to the icon illustrated in FIG. 108(C) is “miss”, and the variation time of the first special symbol is the variation pattern of the first special symbol. When a relatively short (for example, 4 seconds) variation pattern is set, as illustrated in FIG. 108(E), the left 4 symbols, the middle 5 symbols, and the right 3 symbols simultaneously stop in a pseudo manner. Specifically, the left 4 symbols, the middle 5 symbols, and the right 3 symbols that have been moved from above have finished moving at a position approximately in the center in the vertical direction of the first display screen 7a and have swung up and down, Accordingly, the number "4" that constitutes the left four symbols, the number "5" that constitutes the middle five symbols, and the number "3" that constitutes the right three symbols are counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. One rotation at a time (see FIG. 108(E)). Then, along with the stop display of the first special symbol, these three effect symbols showing the stagger are stopped as they are (see FIG. 108(F)).

When a predetermined settling time (eg, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the three effect symbols showing “453” are actually stopped, the first special symbol hit determination corresponding to the first hold icon is executed. Then, along with this, shift processing is performed on each of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 108F and 108G, the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is the icon display area 9e. And the remaining one hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e side and displayed as the first hold icon. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit determination, scroll display of three symbol columns is started (see FIG. 108(G)). ..

During this second symbol change (after the loss notification effect is executed in SPSP reach), the precursor effect is performed as in the first symbol change (see FIG. 108(H)). In addition, in FIG. 108(I), after the left eight symbols are pseudo-stopped, the sign effect is performed at the timing when the right two symbols are pseudo-stopped.

During the second symbol fluctuation after the loss notification effect is executed in SPSP reach, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the right two symbols are pseudo stopped, the middle 1 symbol is pseudo stopped (see FIG. 109(A)). ) After that, the left 8 symbols, the middle 1 symbol, and the right 2 symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 109(B)). Then, when the second symbol variation is completed in this way, the third symbol variation is started. Specifically, when a predetermined settling time (eg, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the three effect symbols showing “812” are randomly stopped, the first special icon corresponding to the first hold icon. A symbol right/wrong determination is executed, and accordingly, the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon (FIG. 109(B)). And (C)). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit determination, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIG. 109(C)). ..

In this way, during the third symbol variation after the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach, the predictive effect is intermittently executed in the same manner as described above (FIGS. 109(D) and (D). See E)). Although not shown in FIG. 109, the precursor effect here is continued from the start of the third symbol variation to the execution of the first pseudo continuous effect.

In addition, since the determination result of the first special symbol win/loss determination performed when the third symbol variation is started is “big hit”, for example, the pseudo continuous production is executed twice and the pseudo 3 At the timing when the variation production of the consecutive stations is started, the icon changes from the white icon to the red flying icon (the icon imitating a red airplane) (see FIG. 109(F)), and the SPSP at this pseudo third station. It develops into a C battle of reach (see FIG. 109(G)). Then, in response to the second effect button 63b being operated during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 109(H)) at the end of the C battle, the hit notification effect is executed (FIG. 109(I)). FIG. 109(I) exemplifies a state in which three effect symbols showing the doublet of “111” are pseudo-stopped, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, these three effect symbols are permanently stopped as they are.

Up to this point, the sign effect is produced over the first symbol change, the second symbol change, and the third symbol change (where the hit notification effect is performed) after the loss notification effect is executed in SPSP reach. Although the case of performing it has been described as an example, the third symbol variation is, for example, the first symbol variation and the second symbol variation so that the player can easily recognize that the symbol variation for which the hit notification effect is performed. In the eye symbol variation, the time interval of the aura effect is fixed to, for example, 2 seconds, while in the third symbol variation, the time interval in which the aura effect is executed is gradually shortened as the end timing of the aura effect approaches. You may do so.

Although not shown in the drawing, the precursor effect started in response to the loss notification effect in the normal long reach, the first SP reach, or the second SP reach is also next to the symbol variation in which the loss notification effect is performed. It is started as the symbol variation is started. Then, for example, in the second symbol variation (after the above-mentioned loss notification effect is performed), when the reach effect of SP reach or more is executed at the pseudo third consecutive time (FIGS. 107(E) and (F)). (See), when the precursor effect is intermittently executed until the first pseudo continuous effect is executed, and the SPSP reach (or the special reach) is executed at the second pseudo continuous effect (FIGS. 107(I) and (I)). (See J)), the precursor effect is intermittently executed until the first pseudo continuous effect is executed, and the SPSP reach (or the special reach) is executed without the pseudo continuous effect (FIG. 107(H)). And (J)), the precursor effect is intermittently executed until the reach is established.

(Example configuration of effect control RAM 913)
FIG. 110 is a block diagram for explaining storage areas of the effect control RAM 913 included in the effect control microcomputer 91 and information stored in the storage areas. When receiving the variation start command from the main control board 80, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the variation production pattern of the variation production using the production design. Specifically, the received variation start command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the presence/absence of the reach effect, the presence/absence of the pseudo-relation effect, the type of the effect symbol forming the reach symbol, the reach effect. The type and content, the content of the pseudo-relational effect, the type of the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the like are set.

As illustrated in FIG. 110A, the effect control RAM 913 is provided with a change effect pattern storage area 9130 as a storage area for temporarily storing the change effect pattern set in the change effect pattern setting process. Has been. In addition, in the effect control RAM 913, as a storage area for storing the information included in the special figure 1 starting ball entering command when the special figure 1 starting ball entering command from the main control board 80 is received, 1 and the first reserved storage area 9131, the special figure 1 and the second reserved storage area 9132, the special figure 1 and the third reserved storage area 9133, and the special figure 1 and the fourth reserved storage area 9134 are provided. Further, in the effect control RAM 913, a special figure 1/reserved number storage area 9135 is provided as an area for storing the reserved number of the first special symbol winning/discarding determination.

The special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131 to the special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 9134 are storage areas for storing the information included in the special figure 1 start entering command, and are shown in FIG. 110(B). As illustrated in, the judgment result and the fluctuation pattern information are stored. The winning/judgment determination result is information included in the special figure 1 starting entrance command as a preliminary determination result, and is information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol winning/judgment is a “big hit”. Further, the fluctuation pattern information is information included in the special figure 1 starting entrance ball command as a preliminary determination result, and is information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the game ball wins the first starting opening 20 during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low-base state, and the right of the first special symbol hit determination is reserved. Then, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a preliminary determination process. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a jackpot random number in response to the game ball winning the first starting opening 20, and based on the obtained jackpot random number, at the start of variable display of the first special symbol. The same big hit determination process is performed prior to the big hit determination process in the first special symbol hit/miss determination that is performed, and it is determined in advance whether or not it will be determined as a "big hit" when the first special symbol hit/miss determination is executed. To judge. In addition, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the same processing as the variation pattern selection processing performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and when the first special symbol hit determination is executed. It is determined in advance which variation pattern will be selected.

When the game control microcomputer 81 executes such a pre-determination process, the information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol win/loss determination is a “big hit” (win/win determination result) and the first special symbol A special figure 1 starting ball entry command including a preliminary determination result such as variation pattern information indicating a variation pattern is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 receives two special information (special characteristics) shown in FIG. (Fig. 1 winning judgment result and fluctuation pattern information included in the start-up ball entering command) in order from the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131 It is stored in any of the storage areas 9134.

For example, when the special figure 1 start entering command is received in a state where no information is stored in any of the special figure 1/first pending storage area 9131 to the special figure 1/fourth pending storage area 9134, the special figure Two pieces of information included in the one-start entering ball command are stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131. Further, for example, when the special figure 1 start entering command is received in a state where the information is stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131 and the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 9132, the special figure 1 start Two pieces of information included in the ball entry command are stored in the special figure 1/third reserved storage area 9133.

In addition, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the variation start command relating to the first special symbol hit determination that has been held, the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131 to the special figure 1/four reserved storage area 9134 are stored. Shift the stored information. For example, when a fluctuation start command is received in a state where information is stored in each of the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131 to the special figure 1/third reserved storage area 9133, the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131 is received. The information stored in the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 9132 is shifted to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131, and the special figure 1/third reserved storage area is changed. The information stored in 9133 is shifted to the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 9132.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 adds "1" to the number of reservations for the first special symbol winning/discarding determination stored in the special figure 1/number of holdings storage area 9135 each time the special figure 1 start ball entry command is received. It updates to the value, and each time the variation start command related to the first special symbol hit determination is received, it is updated to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the number of holding of the first special symbol hit determination.

(Regarding the process for realizing the precursor effect)
Next, an example of the process executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 to realize the precursor effect will be described. Although not shown in the figure, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the variable effect pattern information indicating the variable effect pattern in the variable effect pattern storage area 9130 when the variable effect pattern is set by the variable effect pattern setting process. .. At that time, if the variation effect pattern information relating to the previous symbol variation is stored, the variation effect pattern information is rewritten to new variation effect pattern information.

The effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing, for example, when a variable effect end command for instructing stop display (main stop) of reach-missed eyes is set in the sub output buffer. Specifically, when a variation effect end command for instructing the stop display of reach-missed eyes is set in the sub output buffer, the reach effect is lost in any reach effect based on the change effect pattern stored in the change effect pattern storage area 9130. It specifies whether the notification effect has been executed. Here, when it is specified that the loss notification effect has been executed in the normal long reach, the normal long reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is set to “ON”, and the first SP reach (or When it is specified that the loss notification effect has been executed in (2SP reach), the SP reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is set to “ON”. Further, when it is specified that the loss notification effect has been executed in the SPSP reach, the SPSP reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is set to “ON”.

On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following process in the notice effect setting process executed based on the reception of the variation start command. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 111, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the loss notification effect in the SPSP reach in the previous symbol change based on whether the SPSP reach loss flag is set to “ON”. It is determined whether it has been done (step S6000). Here, when it is determined that the loss notification effect has been executed in the SPSP reach in the previous symbol change (step S6000: YES), it is specified whether or not the present symbol change leads to a big hit (step S6001). Specifically, based on whether or not the variation effect pattern indicated by the information stored in the variation effect pattern storage area 9130 is the variation effect pattern that finally executes the hit notification effect, the symbol variation of this time is changed. Identify whether or not it will lead to a jackpot.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 identifies whether or not there is a "big hit" in the hold (step S6002). Specifically, whether or not there is a storage area in which the hit/miss determination result indicating “big hit” is stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131 to the special figure 1/third reserved storage area 9133. Based on, identify whether there is a "big hit" in the hold.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a "big hit" is included, based on the identification result of step S6001 and the identification result of step S6002 (step S6003). In other words, with regard to the current variation effect and the variation effects related to the determination of the maximum of the three first special symbols which are held at the time of starting the current variation effect, the winning notification effect is finally executed. It is determined whether or not Here, when it is determined that the "big hit" is not included (step S6003: NO), a series of the indication effect pattern setting processing ends, and the setting processing related to the other notice effect is executed. ..

On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that a "big hit" is included (step S6003: YES), it sets the sign effect setting information in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM 913 (step S6004). ). Specifically, for example, when it is specified in the process of step S6001 that the current symbol variation leads to a "big hit", the precursor effect is started along with the start of the current variation effect, and the current variation effect is also generated. Until the first pseudo continuous effect is executed (or until reach is established if the pseudo continuous effect is not executed), the effect pattern of the predictive effect that continues the predictive effect intermittently is set. It is set in the effect control RAM 913 as setting information. In addition, when it is specified in the processing of step S6002 that there is a "big hit" in the hold, the precursor effect is started along with the start of the current variation effect, and the first special symbol winning/holding judgment that is held is determined. Until the first pseudo continuous effect is executed during the variable effect that is performed according to the determination that the jackpot is a big hit (or until reach is established if the pseudo continuous effect is not executed). ) The effect pattern of the predictive effect for continuing the predictive effect is set in the effect control RAM 913 as setting information of the predictive effect.

In this way, the setting information of the precursor effect set in the effect control RAM 913 is included in the variable effect start command, and the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106 are included in the command transmission process executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Sent to. As a result, the precursor effect in which the effect pattern is set by the effect control microcomputer 91 is realized by the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106. In addition, in the SPSP reach effect, when the precursor effect is executed after the loss notification effect is executed, the jackpot is confirmed in the hold at the time when the loss notification effect is executed (FIG. 107(K) to ( The configuration described above is realized based on M).

On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the loss notification effect in the SPSP reach has not been executed in the previous symbol variation (step S6000: NO), the SP reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is set. Based on whether or not it is set to "ON", it is determined whether or not the loss notification effect has been executed in SP reach in the last symbol variation (step S6005). Here, when it is determined that the loss notification effect in the SP reach has not been executed in the previous symbol variation (step S6005: NO), the normal long reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is set to “ON”. Based on whether or not it is determined whether or not the loss notification effect has been executed in the normal long reach in the last symbol variation (step S6006). Here, when it is determined in the previous symbol variation that the loss notification effect in the normal long reach is not executed (step S6006: NO), a series of precursor effect pattern setting processing ends, and another notice effect is involved. The setting process is executed.

The effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the loss notification effect has been executed in the SP reach in the last symbol variation (step S6005: YES), or that the loss notification effect has been executed in the normal long reach in the last symbol variation. When it is determined (step S6006: YES), the variation effect pattern is specified with respect to the right of the first special symbol hit/miss determination that was held at the time when these loss notification effects were executed (step S6007). Specifically, based on the variation pattern information stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131 to the special figure 1/third reserved storage area 9133, the first special symbol winning/holding judgment that is held is executed. The variation pattern of the first special symbol that is to be selected when specified is specified. Then, with reference to the variation effect pattern determination table corresponding to the identified variation pattern, when the variation effect pattern is selected based on the variation effect pattern determination table, whether the pseudo consecutive effect is executed or not is determined. When the performance is executed, it is specified how many pseudo-decades will be developed, whether SPSP reach will be finally developed, and whether special reach will be finally developed. When the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the variation effect pattern in the hold in this way, the following processing is executed based on the specification result.

Following the processing of step S6007, the effect control microcomputer 91 has actually executed the first special symbol hit determination in the pending (up to three) right of the first special symbol hit determination. According to the variable display of the first special symbol which is performed according to, it is determined whether or not the one in which the variation effect that develops to the pseudo third consecutive is performed is included (step S6008). Here, when it is determined that there is no variation effect that extends to the pseudo third consecutive game (step S6008: NO), that is, the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed in any variation effect, or If the continuous production is executed but develops only up to the pseudo second series, the first special symbol hit determination is actually executed in the right of holding (up to three) first special symbol hit determination. Along with the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed according to the fact, it is determined whether or not a variable that finally develops into SPSP reach is included (step S6009).

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the variable effect that eventually develops into SPSP reach is not included (step S6009: NO), it is suspended (up to three) first special. In the right of the symbol right or wrong determination, along with the variable display of the first special symbol performed in response to the fact that the first special symbol right or wrong determination is actually executed, a variable effect that finally develops into a special reach is performed. It is determined whether or not the data to be displayed is included (step S6010).

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that a variable effect that develops to the third pseudo sequence is included (step S6008: YES), it does not develop to the third pseudo sequence, but finally reaches SPSP reach. When it is determined that the development effect that develops is included (step S6009: YES), or the development effect that eventually develops into a special reach is included, although it does not develop in the third pseudo sequence. When it is determined that the effect is set (step S6010: YES), the setting information of the indication effect is set in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM 913 (step S6011). Specifically, in the right of the first special symbol hit determination (up to three) that is withheld, of the first special symbol that is actually performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit determination In the case where a variation effect that expands to the pseudo third consecutive is included in association with the change display, the precursor effect is started along with the start of the current fluctuation effect and the variation that develops to the pseudo third consecutive The effect pattern of the predictive effect that continues the predictive effect until the first pseudo continuous effect is executed in the effect is set in the effect control RAM 913 as the setting information of the predictive effect.

Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 is performed in response to the fact that the first special symbol hit determination is actually executed in the right of holding (up to three) first special symbol hit determination. With the variation display of 1 special symbol, if the variation effect that develops to SPSP reach without developing to the pseudo third row is included, start the indication effect with the start of this variation effect At the same time, the presentation pattern of the precursor effect that continues the precursor effect until the first pseudo-rear effect is executed (or until the reach is established if the pseudo-rear effect is not executed in the variable effect that develops into the SPSP reach). Is set in the effect control RAM 913 as setting information of the indication effect.

In this way, the setting information of the precursor effect set in the effect control RAM 913 is included in the variable effect start command, and the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106 are included in the command transmission process executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Sent to. As a result, the precursor effect in which the effect pattern is set by the effect control microcomputer 91 is realized by the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106. In addition, when the precursor effect is executed after the normal long reach loss, or when the precursor effect is executed after the first SP reach (or second SP reach) loss, the variable effect that develops up to the pseudo third consecutive The configuration described above based on FIGS. 107(A) to (G), which is executed or a variation effect that develops from the second pseudo sequence to SPSP reach is executed, is realized.

As is apparent from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) in the low accurate low base state. Loss notification effect is executed by SPSP reach, and, at the time when this notification information is executed, if the right of the first special symbol hit determination to be executed hit notification effect is suspended, a big hit A precursor effect (an example of expected effect) that expects the game to be executed is executed (see FIGS. 107(K) to (M)).

Further, the production control microcomputer 91, the reach production performed in the variable display of the first special symbol (and the production symbol) in the low accurate low base state (in the fifth embodiment, the normal long reach, the first SP reach, or the Loss notification effect is executed by (2SP reach), and, if the first special symbol winning/absence determination is performed (indicating that the jackpot game is relatively likely to be executed), as a suggesting effect, within the same fluctuation Pseudo continuous production of two times (variable production that develops in the pseudo third continuous production), or the right of the first special symbol hit determination to be executed SPSP reach is suspended at the time when the above-mentioned loss notification production is executed. In the case where the jackpot game is executed, a precursor effect (an example of expected effect) that expects that the jackpot game is to be executed is executed (see FIGS. 107(A) to (J)).

In addition, when the icon change effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon is executed when the aura effect is executed, the player can easily recognize which of the hold icons until the aura effect continues to change the symbol. Instead, the player's gazing at the hold icon that is the target of the icon change effect may reduce the effect of the indication effect. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed, the execution of the icon change effect is restricted from the start to the end of the predictive effect so that the predictive effect is generated. After the end, execution of the icon change effect is permitted (see FIGS. 109(E) and 109(F)).

(Functional effect of the precursory effect)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present Example 5, the loss notification effect is executed by the SPSP reach during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low accurate low base state, and at the time when this loss notification effect is executed. In the case where the right of the first special symbol hit determination that the hit notification effect is to be executed is suspended, a precursor effect that causes the player to expect the jackpot game to be executed may be executed. For this reason, it is possible to expect the player to execute the precursor effect when the loss notification effect is executed, and it is possible to reduce the player's expectation for the jackpot game being executed. Can be suppressed. Further, in order to generate the aura effect, it is necessary to suspend the right of the first special symbol hit determination, so a player who expects the occurrence of the aura effect temporarily stops the launch of the game ball, so-called stop It is possible to suppress hitting.

By the way, when comparing SPSP reach and reach effects other than SPSP reach (other reach effects such as SP reach), the SPSP reach is easier to execute the hit notification effect than the other reach effects. Therefore, when the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach, the player's expectation for the jackpot game being executed is likely to be lower than when the loss notification effect is executed in the other reach effects. Conceivable. On the other hand, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the loss notification effect is executed by the SPSP reach, and the right of the first special symbol hit/miss determination in which the hit notification effect is executed is reserved. If so, the precursor effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the precursor effect and effectively suppress a significant decrease in the sense of expectation due to the loss notification effect being executed by the SPSP reach.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the loss notification effect is executed by the predetermined reach effect such as the normal long reach, the first SP reach, or the second SP reach, and the first special symbol winning/absence judgment is performed. If the right of the first special symbol hit determination is to be executed (indicating that the jackpot game is likely to be executed is relatively high) is executed, the jackpot game is executed A precursor effect that is expected to be performed is executed. For this reason, it is possible to expect the player to execute the precursor effect when the loss notification effect is executed, and it is possible to reduce the player's expectation for the jackpot game being executed. Can be suppressed.

By the way, when comparing SPSP reach and other reach effects other than SPSP reach (for example, normal long reach, 1st SP reach, or 2nd SP reach), SPSP reach has a better notification effect than other reach effects. Easy to execute. Therefore, even if another reach effect is executed, the player is unlikely to expect the jackpot game to be executed. On the other hand, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the loss notification effect is executed by another reach effect, and the right of the first special symbol hit/miss determination in which the suggestion effect is executed is given. If it is on hold, the precursor effect is executed. Therefore, by executing the precursor effect, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed.

(Modifications related to the indication effect)
The following configurations may be adopted for the sign presentation.
That is, in the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the above-mentioned “implication effect” is a variable effect (see FIG. 107(E)) and SPSP reach (see FIG. 107(J)) that develop into the third pseudo sequence. However, the “implication effect” is not limited to the one illustrated in the fifth embodiment as long as it is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is relatively likely to be executed. It may be a group notice or the like for performing an effect display showing that the player moves on the display screen 7a in a predetermined direction.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, at the time when the symbol variation next to the symbol variation in which any of the loss notification effects illustrated in FIGS. 107(A) to (C) and (K) is performed is started. One of the total 4 fluctuations of the symbol fluctuation and the maximum of 3 first symbol fluctuations corresponding to the right of the maximum 3 first special symbol judgments held at the time when the symbol fluctuation starts The case where the precursor effect is executed when the execution condition is satisfied has been described. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since the precursor effect is started in association with the start of the symbol variation subsequent to the symbol variation in which any of the above-described defect notification effects has been performed, the loss notification is performed. There is a possibility that one more right related to the first special symbol winning/disapproving determination may be withheld from the time the effect is performed to the time the precursor effect is started. For this reason, in another embodiment, at the time when the symbol variation next to the symbol variation for which any of the above loss notification effects has been performed is started, the symbol variation and the symbol variation are suspended at the time when the symbol variation is started. There is a configuration in which the precursor effect is executed when any of a total of 5 fluctuations, that is, a maximum of 4 symbol fluctuations corresponding to the right of the first 4 special symbol right/wrong determination, satisfy the execution condition of the predictive director effect. May be adopted.

Further, since the appearance rate of the normal short reach is higher than that of the normal long reach, the first SP reach, and the second SP reach, in the fifth embodiment, when the loss notification effect is executed in the normal short reach, the precursor effect is produced. The example has been described in the case where is not executed. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the loss notification effect is executed in the normal short reach, the processing from step S6007 is performed, and if the execution condition of the aura effect is satisfied, the aura effect is executed. May be. In this way, by enabling the precursor effect even when the loss notification effect is executed in the normal short reach, the appearance rate of the predictive effect is improved and the player's expectation that the jackpot game is executed. Can be further improved.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the case has been described as an example in which the precursor effect is started from the start of the next change when the loss notification effect is performed in the predetermined reach effect, but in another embodiment, the next change is started. The sign effect may be started before being performed. For example, in the process of three stop production of the reach lost eyes at the end of a predetermined reach production, and then the main production is stopped as it is, the precursor effect is started while the three production designs are pseudo-stopped, or It is also possible to start the precursor effect at the same time that the three effect symbols are stopped.

When adopting these configurations, it is conceivable to execute the following processing in order to execute the precursor effect. That is, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91, at a predetermined timing during the period during which the three effect symbols indicating the reach miss pattern are pseudo-stopped at the end of the SPSP reach, the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131-special feature. It is determined whether or not a hit/miss determination result indicating “big hit” is stored in any one of the first and fourth reserved storage areas 9134 in FIG. 1, and if an affirmative determination is made, a predictive effect start command for instructing execution of predictive effect is issued. It is transmitted to the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106. Further, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91, the predetermined effect during the period during which the three effect symbols showing the reach miss pattern are pseudo-stopped at the end of other reach effects such as normal long reach, first SP reach, or second SP reach. At the timing, with respect to the variation pattern information stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 9131 to the special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 9134, the same processing as that in step S6007 is performed to deal with each reservation. The variation effect pattern is specified. Then, the same processing as steps S6008 to S6010 is performed, and when the execution condition of the precursor effect is satisfied, the precursor effect start command for instructing the execution of the precursor effect is transmitted to the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106.

If such a configuration is adopted, the continuity (relevance) related to the performance is improved between the fluctuation in which the loss notification performance is executed in the predetermined reach performance and the fluctuation performed after the fluctuation, It is possible to execute a more effective precursor effect.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, a case has been described as an example where the indication effect is performed using the first display screen 7a and the speaker 67, but the effect means used for the indication effect is not limited to this, and the first display screen may be used, for example. The sign effect may be performed by using the light guide plate arranged in front of 7a with a predetermined interval, the first display screen 7a, and the speaker 67. In the fifth embodiment, the aura effect is an effect in which the electrocardiogram image is displayed on the first display screen 7a and the aura effect sound is output from the speaker 67 (see FIG. 108D) is intermittently repeated. Although the case has been described as an example, the precursor effect may be another effect. For example, in the aura effect, an effect of outputting the aura effect exclusive BGM from the speaker 67 instead of the normal BGM and a background image displayed on the first display screen 7a are provided on condition that the execution condition of the aura effect is satisfied. The effect may be changed to a background image dedicated to the indication effect, the effect of changing the display mode of the effect image displayed on the first display screen 7a, or the like.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the case has been described as an example in which the precursor effect is always executed when the execution condition of the precursor effect is satisfied, but in another embodiment, one case where the execution condition of the precursor effect is satisfied You may make it perform a sign production about a part. For example, when the execution condition of the precursor effect is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect lottery using a random number to determine whether or not to execute the predictive effect, and execute the predictive effect according to the lottery result. ..

[Other aspects]
In the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the effect symbol display portion are special symbols set as the main body of the game in the game state according to the game state (first special symbol described later). Alternatively, the variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display portion, and it is synchronized with the first special symbol by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state. It has a case and a case where it is synchronized with the second special symbol. By changing to such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Further, when displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the main subject of the game in the game state is displayed large (main May be displayed small), the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) which is not the subject of the game. Specifically, the display area is ⅕ or less. In addition, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed according to the game state or the game situation, and There may be a case in which one of the effect design and the second effect design (the main pattern) is displayed.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the above-mentioned gaming machine, a "variable ball entrance" that can be changed into a ball entry possible state in which a game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which a game ball cannot enter, When the result of the 1 hit determination or the 2 hit determination is a hit, the "special game executing means" capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter the ball can be provided. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode. In addition, a game state in which the game ball enters the variable starting port at a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the game ball enters the variable starting port more frequently than the game state. A state (second game state) and a "game state setting means" to be set can be provided. Here, 0 is included in the “predetermined frequency”.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened in one round is one. However, the opening number of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening in one round is It may be a plurality of times, or may have a round with a different opening frequency. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the control process of prioritizing the second special figure hold over the first special figure hold A so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure hold is given priority over the second special figure hold, and a so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, the priority is not set for the completion of the first special map reservation and the completion of the second special map reservation, and the first special map reservation and the second special map reservation are sequentially deleted from the oldest stored one. It may be a control process, that is, a so-called entrance order (memory order) digestion control process.

In addition, it is a type of pachinko game machine that does not have probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball entry possible state and game ball entry It is equipped with a special winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry state, and the big winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter for a predetermined time when the result of the success/failure determination based on the entry into the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters the special winning opening in the ball-possible state and the game ball passes through a specific area, it is a big hit, the big hit game is executed, and it is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko gaming machine is a so-called 1 type/2 type mixing machine, and when the result of the hit determination based on the ball entering the starting opening is a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. Further, as a privilege, there is a high base state in which the frequency of game balls entering the starting opening is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the big hit probability can be set to the low probability (first probability) or the high probability (second probability) by deactivating/activating the probability varying function, but the kind of jackpot probability (number) Is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Providing a plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, for example. Good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, for the preliminary determination based on the start-up ball, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read and the read acquisition random number value (acquisition information) is determined. (Preliminary determination) is performed (“Starting ball entry process (S205)” (see FIG. 11, FIG. 13 and the like)), but the method of the preliminary determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage unit) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired on the basis of a starting ball) to be pre-determined is provided as a main control unit or sub-control. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and determine (preliminary determination) the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit). In this case, the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in another storage area) can be erased by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Alternatively, the pre-determination may not be performed for the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, but may be pre-determined for the acquired information acquired based on the start-up ball. That is, the acquisition information may be preliminarily determined before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be subjected to the preliminary determination separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit for the preliminary determination. Absent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the production mode D (state C, specific game state), when the specific period is started under the situation where three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, during the specific period Displays the number of prize balls image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (second profit effect) based on the entry into the big winning hole for small hits, etc., and when the specific period ends, the prize is awarded. A production is performed in which the number of acquired prize balls indicated by the ball count image C2 is added to (added to) the number of acquired prize balls of the prize ball count image C1 (total number of acquired prize balls, total number of acquired prize balls). It was. On the other hand, when a new second special figure hold (ball entry into the third starting opening 26) occurs during the specific period, and the hold is determined to be a small hit hold by a preliminary determination (hold look ahead). The specific period currently being executed may be extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started under the condition that four small hits are held in succession, and two small hits are held after the start of the specific period. At this time, the special figure 2 reserve ball number is "2". Under that situation, when a new second special figure hold occurs and the special figure 2 hold ball count becomes "3", and it is pre-determined that the hold is a small hit hold, a specific period counter (see S5005) “+1” (1 is added). As a result, the specific period is extended until the newly generated (stored) small hit hold is exhausted and the small hit game relating to the small hit hold is completed. Or, in the same way, after the specified period has started, 2 small hits have been exhausted and the special map 2 reserved ball count has become "2", which corresponds to the special map 2 reserved ball count "3" It is assumed that the second special figure hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball number “4” occur in quick succession. Then, the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls "3" is out of hold, and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls "4" is small hit in advance It is assumed that the judgment is made. In this case, by adding "+2" (2 added) to the specific period counter (see S5005), the small hit hold corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball number "4" is exhausted and the small hit variation and small hit game are completed. Until then, the specific period can be extended. As described above, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period during which the display of the number of prize balls image S and the additional display of the number of prize balls count image C2 (second profit effect) are performed. Since it is extended, it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the two conditions of (1) that three or more small hit holdings are stored in succession and (2) that the winning lottery for the specific period is won are defined as the start of the specific period. However, the conditions for starting the specific period are not limited thereto. For example, a plurality (for example, 2 or more) of small hit holdings that are not continuous are stored, and a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of small hit holdings are stored regardless of whether or not they are continuous. That is, the starting condition for the specific period may be set. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared with the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to occur (start more easily). Further, the start condition for the specific period may be only (1) of (1) and (2) described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) occurs, a mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C before shifting to the state C. When the big hit is the 4R big hit (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit), the mode selection period occurs during the ending period of the big hit game, and the 15R big hit (15R big hit). In the case of three big hits), the mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (14R start to 15R midway in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the number of big hit rounds that triggers the setting of state C is, for example, one type of 10 rounds, if the game state when the 10R big hit occurs is state A (left-handed game), the ending period A mode selection period may occur during a period B or C (right hitting game), and the mode selection period may occur at a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R midway). Of these, in the latter case, the notification that the mode selection period will start from the next round (notification before selection period start) may be performed in the round before the mode selection period occurs. Further, the generation timing when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round which is the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, and may be, for example, 5R start to 6R end. , May be generated in any round, such as only in the final round. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the big hit ending period, a notification that the mode selection period will be started after this is given in the round effect of the final round before the ending period is started (before the start of the selection period). You may

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode selection (selection of effect mode C or D) in the mode selection period can be executed based on the operation of the effect button. On the other hand, for the effect mode selection in the mode selection period, any one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes may be automatically selected by lottery or the like on the sub-control side. In this case, for example, with the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one mode of the mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes in a roulette shape is displayed on the display screen of the image display device, and one of them is displayed. An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by roulette lottery may be performed as an effect (mode selection effect) during the mode selection period. Further, in the present embodiment, there are two types of effect modes in the state C (effect modes C and D), but there may be three or more kinds, and one effect mode may be selected from them.

Further, the mode (variation mode, stop mode, reach mode, etc.) relating to the variable display of the effect symbol shown in the above-described embodiment, the effect executed with the small hit in the state C (effect mode C, D). (Small hit prefetch effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.), notice effect (display of notice image) in effect mode D, notification screen for mode selection period, mode selection screen, etc. The modes of various effects are merely examples, and the modes of effects according to the present invention are not limited to the embodiments.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the notice image is displayed in the effect mode D, the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a (the notice image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, the advance notice image may be displayed on another image display device included in the gaming machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. .. Further, in addition to the image display device composed of a liquid crystal display device, other effect display means (effect display device) such as a dot display device and a drum display device are provided, and the display mode is used in the effect mode D described above. The notice effect corresponding to the display of the notice image may be configured to be executable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the front surface of the front frame 51 (pachinko gaming machine 1), of which the second image display device 71 is the front frame 51. Although the third image display device 72 is also rotatable in the same manner, the initial state (first state) and the tilted state in which the third image display device 72 is tilted toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51) ( Second state) may be adopted. In this way, the relationship with the hall equipment (CR unit, ball renting machine, and other equipment between pedestrians) adjacent to the right side of the game machine and the relationship with the game machine (opening the frame) should not be hindered. Is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). Although two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) are provided as the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) in (), the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) may be provided on the game board 2 side. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the board side display means and the main liquid crystal (first image display device). It is provided on the left and right of the device 7), or one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (the left sub liquid crystal or the right sub liquid crystal) is replaced with one sub liquid crystal on the game board side. You can Alternatively, it is possible to further provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while having the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. Also by this, it is possible to perform various effect displays with a plurality of image display devices.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game region) and the display device (second image) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game region). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices each including a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Furthermore, different types of display devices may be mixed in the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display device. As a result, it is possible to display a variety of effects by a plurality of display devices having different display systems, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol 8 are basically performed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) located substantially in the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) (FIG. 54- 58, FIG. 67 to FIG. 73, FIG. 74(a), FIG. 75, and FIG. 76), at the time of executing the full rotation effect, the left design (effect design 8L) on the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal), The central display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is designed to display a middle pattern (effect design 8C), and the right display screen 72a (right sub liquid crystal) is displayed as a right design (production pattern 8R) (see the middle part of FIG. 77). .. That is, while the production design (stop production design) that is stopped and displayed after the variable display is displayed on the first image display device 7 in principle, in the full-rotation production, the middle image of the stop production designs is the first image. The display device 7 (display screen 7a) is displayed, and the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), respectively. On the other hand, in the variable effects other than the full rotation effect, a part of the stop effect symbol may be displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72.

For example, if the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) and reach is established on the screen after starting the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the first image display device 7, the reach state is configured. The left symbol and the right symbol (a part of the stop effect symbol) are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively. In that state, after the reach effect display is performed on the first image display device 7, the middle symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed on the first image display device 7, and then the second image display device 71 is used. And, the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the third image display device 72 are moved to the first image display device 7 and displayed side by side on the left and right of the middle symbol, and finally three effect symbols (stop effect symbol) Is confirmed. Further, for example, the first image display device 7 indicates whether or not the effect design 8 is a probability variation big hit depending on the design type when the performance design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) (for example, in a red design If there is a probability jackpot, chance jackpot if it is a pattern other than the red pattern), when a so-called "re-lottery effect" is displayed when a jackpot mode that is not a probability jackpot is displayed, the above-mentioned all Like the rotation effect, the middle symbol is displayed on the first image display device 7, the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively, and each of these three symbols is displayed. A re-lottery effect is performed by synchronizing and scrolling display on the device. By providing a production mode (variable production pattern) such as a reach production or a re-lottery production, the display variation of the production design 8 (stop production design) that is stopped and displayed after the variable display is increased, and the variation production is diversified It becomes possible to

In the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub display device) are liquid crystal display devices smaller than the first image display device 7 (main display device), The display screen had a substantially square shape (see FIG. 1). On the other hand, the sizes (screen sizes) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub display device) may be larger than those shown in the embodiment. Specifically, in the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 (main display device) has a length in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen. Is a vertically long rectangular image display device (liquid crystal display device) substantially the same as or longer than the vertical length (vertical direction) of the front frame 51, which is provided on the front surface of the front frame 51 on the left side and the right side of the viewing window 51a. May be. Even in this case, the image display device provided on the left side of the front surface of the front frame 51 is pivotally supported similarly to the above-described embodiment. By providing such a vertically long rectangular image display device on the gaming machine frame side (front frame) as a sub-display device, it is possible to perform dynamic effect display that gives an impact to the player. In particular, the vertical length (vertical direction) of the display screen of the sub display device provided on the gaming machine frame side is defined as the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the image display device (main display device) provided on the gaming board side. ) Is approximately the same as or longer than the length of ), and the sub-displays are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) of the main display device, so that the effect display developed on the display screen of the main display device is displayed. However, it is possible to perform effect display (wide display in the horizontal (horizontal) direction) by expanding (enlarging) one or both of the sub-display devices located on the left and right.

Specifically, for example, while the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol on the first image display device 7 (main display device) is being executed, the mode (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect being executed is In the case of a specific mode, the display area of the background image (background screen) displayed on the display screen of the main display device is gradually expanded to the display screen of the image display device (sub display device) on the frame side ( It is possible to perform an effect such as expansion (expansion) or expansion (expansion) at once in the entire display screen. Alternatively, when the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed through the variable display on the main display device, the production symbols are enlarged and displayed, and one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a left symbol and a right symbol. It is also possible to produce an effect such that all or all of the parts are displayed on the display screens of the left and right sub display devices, and the middle symbols are displayed on the display screen of the main display device.

Display contents from the main display device (board side display device) located in the approximate center of the game board (inside the game region) to the sub display device (frame side display device) located on the left and right of the main display device (board side display device) In order to obtain the effect of the effect of enlarging (expanding) the (display area), the vertical length (vertical direction) of the display screen of the sub display device must be at least the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the main display device. The length is preferably 1/2 or more, more preferably 2/3 or more.

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that includes display means for performing variable display of identification information, and based on that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, a special game advantageous for a player can be executed. There is. In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to show (notify) the result of the variable display to the player depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

In the gaming machine having the above-mentioned display means, the player pays attention to the identification information displayed on the display means to proceed with the game. However, the player becomes tired of the game as the variable display of the identification information is repeated many times, and it becomes difficult to keep the interest in the game. The present Reference Invention 1 is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize a display in a new mode that attracts a player's interest regarding the display of identification information, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. It is to plan.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and notifying the result of the variable display by the display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped,
Equipped with a variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
The variable display means,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode,
The stop mode at the time of stopping the variable display can be different depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

According to such a gaming machine, while the variation display means performs the variation display of the identification information, when the variation display is stopped, the variation display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode. The stop mode can be changed depending on the display mode of the identification information that is displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and infer the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the reference invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 1-1 described above,
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of identification information, at least a first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop order, and a stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first A second stop mode in which the second stop order is different from the stop order,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode that triggers execution of a predetermined special game and a second display that triggers execution of another special game different from the predetermined special game. And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
The variable display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the variable display of the identification information is performed by the variable display of these symbols. In such a configuration, as a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, that is, a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order. Has a first stop mode and a second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the first stop order (first stop mode), and identification information when the variable display is stopped. As a display mode of (plurality of symbols), at least a first display mode that triggers execution of a predetermined special game, a second display mode that triggers execution of another special game different from the special game, and a special game And a third display mode that does not serve as an execution trigger of. When the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (deriving display) when the variable display is stopped is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is displayed in the first stop order ( It is possible to stop in the first stop mode), in the case of the second display mode or the third display mode, to stop the variable display of a plurality of symbols in the second stop order (second stop mode) Is possible. Therefore, the player can infer the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it is executed, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and fuel the expectation for the special game thereafter.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 described above,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, a fourth display mode which does not trigger the execution of the special game is further provided,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, further, there is a third stop mode in which the stop times of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same,
The variable display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display of the identification information (plural symbols), further execution of a special game If the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) that has the fourth display mode that does not serve as a trigger and is displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped is the fourth display mode, In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same, the variable display of the plurality of symbols can be stopped. Therefore, when the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed, the stop mode of the variable display should include a mode (third stop mode) that can immediately recognize that there is no possibility of executing the special game. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the execution of the special game from being overwhelmed, while varying the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3 described above,
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, a predetermined effect display is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (deriving display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. In the case of, the predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize and indicate to the player that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is executed. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above.
Equipped with state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second game state is characterized in that the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is frequently the first display mode, as compared with the first game state. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. In comparison with the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is frequently the first display mode. That is, the second game state has a higher frequency of execution of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the display of the first display mode as compared with the first display mode. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the variable display of the identification information is frequently stopped in the first stop mode. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the player is focused on whether or not the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is given. Can be fueled.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 described above,
As the types of symbols constituting the identification information, at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type,
The first display mode is composed of a symbol of a second symbol type of the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
At least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is a second symbol type in the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, as the types of symbols constituting the identification information, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type, among these first symbol type and the second symbol type, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is the second symbol type in the second gaming state. It has become a thing. Therefore, in the first game state, the symbol that cannot be configured in the first display mode because it is the symbol of the first symbol type is changed to the symbol that can be configured in the first display mode by becoming the second game state. Will be done. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped but also to the symbol type.

According to the reference invention 1 described above, regarding the display of the identification information, it is possible to realize the display of a new mode that attracts the interest of the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entrance (for example, the special winning opening), and the game ball enters the variable ball entrance. There is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) is given to a player based on. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit to be given according to the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entrance, that is, the amount of game profit to be acquired by the player (acquired profit amount) is predetermined. Is known in the display area (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-35664).

However, the display of the amount of earned profit as described above has already been adopted by many gaming machines, resulting in a lack of freshness. This Reference Invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize a new aspect of the production as a production for displaying the earned profit amount and to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can not enter and a state where it can enter,
Profit granting means capable of granting a predetermined game profit based on the entrance into the variable entrance,
Profit production execution means capable of executing a profit production for displaying an amount of profit obtained when a game profit is provided by the profit providing means,
And a state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The state control means can control the game state to a specific game state based on the establishment of the control condition,
The profit effect execution means, at least, a first profit effect that additionally displays the amount of profit to be obtained based on the entrance into the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the specific period in the specific game state. It is possible to execute a second profit effect that additionally displays the amount of profit to be obtained based on the entrance into the variable entrance.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entrance while being controlled to the specific gaming state, and a predetermined gaming profit is given to the player in accordance with this, At least two types of effects, a first profit effect and a second profit effect, can be executed as effects (profit effects) for displaying the amount of game profit (gain profit amount) to be given. Regarding, it is supposed to be executed during a specific period during the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the profit effect executed based on the entrance into the variable entrance in the specific game state and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above,
The profit effect execution means can execute the first profit effect on the predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect in a period other than the specific period, and the first profit in the specific period. It is possible to execute the second profit effect on a predetermined second display unit without executing the effect.
After the end of the specific period, an effect of displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period in addition to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being executable.

According to such a gaming machine, during the specific game state, during the period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the entrance into the variable entrance, and during the specific period, The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the entrance into the variable entrance. Further, when the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed by using the acquired profit amount (the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit) additionally displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. The effect of adding (displaying) the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of profit effect by changing the display mode of the amount of profit acquired during the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above,
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing the acquisition information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition;
Identification information display means capable of performing variable display of identification information based on the acquired information,
A prior determination means capable of performing a prior determination of whether or not the acquired information is specific acquired information before performing the variable display,
It is possible to enter the variable entrance based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result,
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as the display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquired information is stored in the acquired information storage means as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific game state. It is what

According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to execution of the variable display, it is possible to perform a pre-determination as to whether the acquired information is the specific acquired information. If the acquired information is the specific acquired information, the variable display based on the specific acquired information is displayed. As a result, a specific display result is derived, which allows the player to enter the variable entrance. Then, the specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started in a situation where a predetermined number of pieces of specific acquisition information are stored. In other words, it is a period that can be started in the situation where it has been determined that a predetermined number of pieces of specific acquisition information can be used to enter the variable entrance. As a result, during the specific game state, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the second profit effect accompanying the start of the specific period, and enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
The specific time period is characterized by ending after the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means at the time of the start thereof becomes possible to enter the variable entrance. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the variable entrance is entered. The specific period will end after it becomes possible. This makes it possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect is executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4 described above,
The preliminary determination means can perform the preliminary determination during the specific period,
It is characterized in that the specific period is extended based on a new determination result indicating that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination during the specific period.

According to such a gaming machine, the pre-determination can be executed even during the specific period, the pre-determination is executed for the newly acquired acquisition information during the specific period, and the acquisition information is the specific acquisition information. The specific period is extended if the determination result to that effect is obtained. As a result, the period in which the second profit effect is executed is extended, so that it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above,
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the determination result indicating that it is the specific acquisition information by the preliminary determination,
When a predetermined effect is executed, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed is different depending on the number of pieces of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination that the acquired information is the specific acquired information in the specific game state. The manner of effect differs depending on the number of pieces of storage of the specific acquisition information when executing the predetermined effect. As a result, it is possible to produce the effect effect by the profit effect and the predetermined effect during the specific game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the specific game state.

According to the reference invention 2 described above, it is possible to realize an effect in a new mode as an effect for displaying the amount of earned profit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is widely known in which identification information is variably displayed and a special game can be executed based on a display result of the variably display being a specific display result. Some gaming machines of this type are configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). As the time when the production mode can be selected, for example, it is possible to set various times such as during the variable display of the identification information, during the display of the standby screen (demo screen), during the special game (for example, during the big hit game), etc. It is possible. Further, in a configuration in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, there is one in which the effect mode after the special game is selected (see, for example, JP 2006-174956 A).

However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the occurrence mode of the selectable time period and the notification mode indicating the occurrence are uniform, and there is a problem that it lacks freshness. there were. This Reference Invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the enjoyment of the game by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a novel mode. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can not enter and a state where it can enter,
And a special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured to be able to enter the variable entrance in the round game,
Having a plurality of effect modes as effect modes when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
At a predetermined time after the start of the special game, a selection period generation means capable of generating a selection period in which a production mode after the special game is finished can be selected from the plurality of production modes,
When the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game, the first notification means for performing a notification before the start of the selection period in the round game before the predetermined round game is provided. To do.

According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the special game is finished can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. If the selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the special game, the notification before the start of the selection period is performed in the round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, after notifying in advance in the round game before that that the production mode can be selected in the predetermined round game during the special game (a selection period occurs), the production mode selection period It is possible to select an effect mode in a new mode, such as when it occurs (starts). As a result, it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the selection of the effect mode after the special game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The selection of the effect mode in the selection period includes, for example, a manual selection in which the player selectively inputs any one of a plurality of effect modes using a predetermined input means provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes. An automatic selection in which any of them is automatically selected is included.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
Second informing means for informing during the selection period in the predetermined round game when the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game,
When the predetermined round game is finished and the next round game is started, a third notifying means for notifying before the end of the selection period is provided,
The selection period is terminated during a round game in which the notification by the third notification means is performed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the effect mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game, the notification during the selection period is given in the predetermined round game, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game When is started, the notification before the end of the selection period is performed in the round game (the next round game of the predetermined round game). Then, the selection period ends during the round game in which the notification before the end of the selection period is performed (during the round game next to the predetermined round game). Therefore, when a selection mode of the effect mode occurs in a predetermined round game, notification before the start of the selection period (notification by the first notification means) performed in the round game before the predetermined round game, and the predetermined Special game by notification during the selection period performed in the round game (notification by the second notification means) and notification before the end of the selection period performed in the next round game of the predetermined round game (notification by the third notification means) It is possible to prompt the player to select a later effect mode. In this way, by adopting a new notification mode in which the player is prompted to select the effect mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. .. In addition, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and since the above-mentioned notification is performed from the start of the selection period to the end, the player selects the production mode. It is possible to avoid losing the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
Equipped with state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
In the first game state, the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the special game is executed, and in the second game state, the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. The generation time of the selection period is different from that when the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display in the first game state becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed, and the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In the state, the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed, and the generation time of the selection period of the effect mode is different. As a result, it becomes possible to select an effect mode in a new mode, such as changing the subsequent effect mode selectable time depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, and preventing the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous. Is possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 described above,
When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, the selection period occurs after all round games constituting the special game are finished. Notification will be given during the selection period,
When the display result of the variable display is a specific display result in the second game state and the special game is executed, the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the special game is executed in the first game state, all the round games constituting the special game are finished. After that, a production mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the special game is executed in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game in the special game is executed. In this case, a notification period by the above-mentioned first notification means (a notification before the start of the selection period), a notification by the second notification means (a notification during the selection period) and a 3 The notification by the notification means (the notification before the end of the selection period) is performed. Therefore, when the specific display result is derived in the first game state and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the end of all round games, and the second game state is set. When the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode by the time all round games are completed. Thereby, depending on whether the game state when the specific display result is derived is the first game state or the second game state, it is possible to make the mode of the effect mode selection different, and the impression different to the player. Can be given.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
Having a plurality of types of special games as the special game,
The generation time of the selection period varies depending on the type of special game to be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the generation time of the selection period of the effect mode is different depending on the type of special game executed based on the display result of the variable display being the specific display result. As a result, it is possible to select a new effect mode such as changing the effect mode selectable time depending on the type of special game to be executed, and prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 described above,
As the plurality of types of special games, at least a first special game and a second special game in which the number of round games is larger than that of the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period occurs and the notification during the selection period is performed after all round games constituting the first special game are finished,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively small is executed, all of the round games constituting the first special game are finished. After that, a production mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the second special game having a relatively large number of round games constituting the special game is executed, the effect mode selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, the notification by the above-mentioned first notification means (the notification before the start of the selection period), the notification by the second notification means (the notification during the selection period), and the notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period) Notification) will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the first special game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively small) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode after the end of all round games. When a game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively large) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode by the end of all round games. As a result, the mode of effect mode selection can be made different between when the first special game is executed and when the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give the player a different impression. Become.

According to the reference invention 3 described above, by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a novel mode, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 4)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, and the frequency of ball entry is low in the low base state, and the frequency of ball entry is high in the high base state. In the low base state, there is a game that aims at the first starting opening, and in the high base state, that aims at the second starting opening. In addition, when there is a big hit game or a high base state, there is a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right side area of the game area. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once an advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the advantageous state game is sharpened. Met.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is difficult to say that the various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and that an efficient game can be progressed. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional game machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it becomes possible to diversify the game characteristics and improve the game efficiency. Also, to provide a gaming machine that enhances the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
With a specific starting port where game balls can enter,
A variable start opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific starting opening,
Identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port,
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable start opening is in the second state,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter,
A gaming machine provided with the above, wherein a specific starting opening, a first variable entrance, a variable starting opening, and a second variable entrance are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific starting opening, a first variable entrance, a variable starting opening, and a second variable entrance are provided at predetermined locations in the gaming area, and these are located upstream of the gaming area. A specific starting port, a first variable ball inlet, a variable starting port, and a second variable ball inlet are arranged in this order downstream from. This enables an efficient game progression.

Specifically, in order to progress the game smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable start port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state). It is placed at the top of the mouth. Thereby, first, the possibility that the variable starting port will be in the second state (open state) is increased. In addition, by making the game ball that has entered (passed) the specific starting opening flow down the game area after that (gate 28), the subsequent game will proceed smoothly. In addition, by arranging the first variable ball inlet downstream of the specific starting port, the ball can be quickly entered when the special game is executed, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable ball inlet upstream of the variable start port, the game ball enters the variable start port that is in the second state during the special game, and the first variable ball inlet It is also possible to prevent a situation in which entry is blocked.

In addition, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable entrance port, the variable start port is in the second state except when the first variable entrance port is in the enterable state in the special game. , It becomes possible to enter the flowing down game ball with priority over the other entrances. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the variable starting port does not enter the variable starting port even though the variable starting port is in the second state. In addition, by arranging the second variable ball inlet downstream of the variable start port, the game ball enters the second variable ball inlet based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable start port. Since the frequency changes, it becomes possible to add various game playability. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
As the special mode, there are a first special mode and a second special mode,
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed,
The first special game is supposed to have more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game,
It is characterized in that the first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a first special mode and a second special mode as modes of stop display of the identification information for executing the special game, and the special games are the first special game and the second special mode. It has 2 special games. Then, the first special game is a special game that has more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is set in the enterable state (open state), and the second special game. Then, the second variable entrance is made ready for entry.

Specifically, first, in order to bring the variable starting port into the second state (open state), the specific starting port relating to this is arranged in the most upstream of these ball entrances. Next, by arranging the first variable ball inlet port downstream of the specific start port, the ball can be swiftly entered when the first special game with a large amount of game profit is executed, and a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. Enables acquisition. In addition, next, by arranging the variable start port downstream of the first variable ball inlet, the second variable state is changed unless the first variable ball inlet is ready for ball entry in the special game. It is possible to enter the flowing down game ball into the starting port with priority over the other entrance ports. In addition, the second variable game entrance which is in a ball enterable state in the second special game with a small amount of game profit is arranged downstream of the variable start opening, and various game characteristics can be added. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability while providing smooth progress of the game.

As the first special aspect and the second special aspect, different stop symbols can be exemplified. Further, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games with different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, profit that can be obtained, variable entrance for opening) can be exemplified.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
A first game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. Equipped with a game state setting means that can be set,
In the second game state, a game ball is inserted into the variable starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball inlet port is arranged on the downstream side of the variable starting port. By making it difficult to enter,
The possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable ball inlet when the second special game occurs is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set the first gaming state in which the gaming ball enters the variable starting port at a low frequency and the second gaming state in which the gaming frequency is higher than the first gaming state. Since the variable start port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the first game state is the second variable ball inlet than the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the game frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the game playability and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3.
The game profit obtained by entering the second variable entrance is larger than the game profit obtained by entering the variable start opening.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming profit that can be obtained by the entry of the gaming ball (for example, the prize ball that is awarded by the entry of one gaming ball) is second from the variable start opening. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable start port is unlikely to be in the second state, the game ball that has flowed down easily enters the second variable ball inlet port on the downstream side. In the second game state in which the variable starting port is likely to be in the second state, it is easy to enter the variable starting port on the upstream side. As a result, the player expects to enter the second variable entrance, which has more game profits than the variable start opening, and expects that the second special game will occur in the first gaming state. , Enhance the fun of the game. Further, as a result, in the first game state and the second game state, when the same second special game occurs, the game profits that can be obtained are made different, and it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game enjoyment. Becomes

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4.
The game state is not changed based on the execution of the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. As a result, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the second special game is executed in the first game state. By generating a game, it is possible to obtain more game profit.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-6.
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening,
It is characterized in that the first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variably displayed based on the entry into the first starting opening and the identification information that is variably displayed based on the entry into the variable starting opening are concurrently provided. (At the same time) variable display is possible. Thereby, in the simultaneous variation gaming machine (simultaneous variation machine) capable of displaying the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously), it is possible to diversify the game nature while providing smooth progress of the game. To do.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game while enabling the smooth progress of the game.

(Reference invention 5)
In addition, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), a plurality of game states are provided as game states, and when a jackpot game is executed, the normal state is changed to a probability variation state or a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It has become an amusement machine to shift. Further, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are variably displayed a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is set. In such a gaming machine, a certain effect of preventing the game from getting tired by the transition of the gaming state has been exhibited.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the state of transition of the game state and the state of the game after the transition are uniform, and the interest in the game has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies game play and enhances amusement of a game by giving a feature to a game state transition mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, the special variable game entrance or the second variable game entrance is put into a state in which a special game is executed. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result. A gaming machine,
As the identification result, there is a first identification result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the special game is finished is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. When the gaming state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state is high. When the specific number of times is reached, the game state changes from the high probability and second game state to the high probability and first game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
As the identification result, there is a second identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first probability and the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and when the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state By performing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the number of times of variable display of and reaches a specific number, the game state changes from the predetermined probability and the second game state to the predetermined probability and the first game state. In addition, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with a predetermined probability and second game state and a high probability and second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game. Further, as a result, the player can expect that the game state will change to the high probability and the second game state when the specific number of times has passed during the execution of the common effect, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
The high probability and the first game state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the high-probability and first gaming state is in a gaming state in which there is more gaming profit that can be acquired than in the high-probability and second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability over a certain number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined with the high probability and the second possibility. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the second variable ball entrance frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the game playability and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game, it is possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
It is characterized in that the first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are achieved, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating it, it is possible to obtain more gaming profit.

According to the gaming machine of the present Reference Invention 5, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, the special variable game entrance or the second variable game entrance is put into a state in which a special game is executed. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the identification result,
A gaming machine comprising: a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area at a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area into which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
The second starting opening is provided in a second game area in which a game ball shot at a second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter.
As the identification result, there is a first identification result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the special game is finished is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
As a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting opening, the first identification result is not included,
It is characterized by having the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Further, the first starting opening is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first launch strength, and the second starting opening is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second launch strength. .. Then, when the first identification result is reached, when the gaming state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of fluctuation display of and reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game. The variable display result of the first identification information does not have the first identification result, and the variable display result of the second identification information has the first identification result. As a result, different game qualities can be provided depending on whether the game ball is inserted into the first starting port and when the game ball is inserted into the second starting port. It is possible to raise it.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
As the identification result, there is a second identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first probability and the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and when the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state,
It is characterized in that it has the second specifying result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting opening.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming machine has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information is set in the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the specified number of times is reached, the game state changes from the predetermined probability and second game state to the predetermined probability and first game state. In addition, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with a predetermined probability and second game state and a high probability and second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game play and enhance the fun of the game. Further, as a result, the player can expect that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability when the specific number of times has passed during the execution of the common effect, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game. ..

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
As the identification result, there is a third identification result,
When the third specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first gaming state, and in the gaming state, the gaming state does not change until the next specific result is obtained. And
It is characterized in that it has the third identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port.

According to such a gaming machine, it has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. Then, when the game state after the special game ends as the third identification result is set to the high probability and the first game state, the game state is maintained at the high probability and the first game state until the next specific result is obtained. It is supposed to do. Thereby, as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, there is no one that changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state based on the variable display of the specific number of times, and the special game ends. It has a high probability and guarantees the gaming state of the first gaming state until the specific result is obtained next time. Further, as a result, in the game accompanied by the variable display of the first identification information, it becomes possible to play the game with a sense of security, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3.
The high probability and the first game state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the high-probability and first gaming state is in a gaming state in which there is more gaming profit that can be acquired than in the high-probability and second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability over a certain number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-4,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined with the high probability and the second possibility. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the second variable ball entrance frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the game playability and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-5.
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game, it is possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
It is characterized in that the first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are achieved, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating it, it is possible to obtain more gaming profit.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 7)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, the special variable game entrance or the second variable game entrance is put into a state in which a special game is executed. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result. A gaming machine,
The identification result includes a first identification result and a fourth identification result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the special game is finished is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
When the fourth identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the display count reaches the second count, the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Then, as a result of the first identification, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variable display with and becomes the first number, the game state changes from the high probability and second game state to the high probability and first game state. Also, when the fourth identification result is reached and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variable display with and becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest of the game for a long time. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the game playability and enhance the fun of the game.

In the present mode, when the number of times of variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state has a high probability and the second state. It is supposed to change to one gaming state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of variable display of the first identification information, when the number of times of variable display of the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state. It is possible to change from a high probability to the first game state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times the second identification information is fluctuated and displayed, when the number of times the first identification information is fluctuated and displayed becomes the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second game. The state may be changed to a high probability and the first gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
As the identification result, a second identification result and a fifth identification result are included,
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state. When the display count reaches the first count, the game state changes to the first probability and the predetermined probability,
When the fifth identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, it is assumed that the gaming state changes to the first probability and the predetermined probability.
When the game state after the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and when the game state after the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state By performing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, if the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the second identification result, the first probability is set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of variation display of the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, when the fifth identification result is reached and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the variable display of and becomes the second number, the game state changes from the predetermined probability and the second game state to the predetermined probability and the first game state. In addition, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with a predetermined probability and second game state and a high probability and second game state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest of the game for a long time. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the game playability and enhance the fun of the game. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the first number of times has elapsed and the second number of times has passed during execution of the common effect, It is possible to enhance the interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is greater than the first number,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the high probability and the first gaming state when the gaming state changes at the second number of times than when the gaming state changes at the first number of times. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to be a number larger than the first number, and the gaming state is higher at the second number of times than when the change timing of the gaming state is at the first number. It is highly probable that the probability of changing to the first game state is high. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, he/she expects that the game state will be maintained without being changed, and reaches the second number of times while the game state remains in the second game state. In this case, a player is expected to play with a high probability and a high expectation of changing to the first gaming state. As a result, in the second gaming state, there is a point of increasing expectation multiple times. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the game playability and enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is greater than the first number,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the high probability and the first gaming state when the gaming state changes at the first number of times than when the gaming state changes at the second number of times. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to be a number larger than the first number, and the gaming state is higher when the game state change timing is the first number than when it is the second number. It is highly probable that the probability of changing to the first game state is high. Thus, when the player reaches the first number of times, he/she expects that the game state will change and plays the game, and when the game state reaches the second number of times while remaining in the second game state, Although the sex is lower than that of the first time, the game is performed with the expectation that it will change to the first game state with a high probability. As a result, in the second gaming state, there is a point of increasing expectation multiple times. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the game playability and enhance the fun of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
The high probability and the first game state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the high-probability and first gaming state is in a gaming state in which there is more gaming profit that can be acquired than in the high-probability and second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability over a certain number of times, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined with the high probability and the second possibility. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the second variable ball entrance frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the game playability and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game, it is possible to change the game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game shall not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
It is characterized in that the first variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball entrance is in a ball enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. Further, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are achieved, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed a plurality of times. By generating it, it is possible to obtain more gaming profit.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 8)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, the special variable game entrance or the second variable game entrance is put into a state in which a special game is executed. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the identification result,
A first condition state in which a variable display time of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition, and a second condition state in which a variable display time of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition, And a second identification information variation time determining means capable of setting
In the second condition state, the average time of the variable display of the determined second identification information is shorter than that in the first condition state,
As the game state, the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the first It is characterized by having two condition states, the high probability, the second game state and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability, a first condition state and a first condition state. The second identification information variation time determining means capable of setting the second condition state in which the average time of the variation display time of the two identification information is shorter than the first condition state. Further, as the gaming state, a predetermined probability and a first gaming state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability, a first gaming state and a second condition state, and a high probability. And, in the game state in which the second game state and the second condition state are set, and the first condition state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition is set. In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game play, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
The case where the variable display result of the second identification information is the identification result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is the identification result. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, it is more likely that the player is more advantageous than the first identification information when the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the identification result. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by a special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing the profit, or increase the possibility of becoming an advantageous state after the end of the special game. is there. As a result, the player expects to be set in a state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in a large amount, that is, the second condition state in which the variable display time of the second identification information is relatively short. You will be playing a game. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that it is possible to diversify the game state and diversify the game playability and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
Equipped with a third starting port into which game balls can enter,
It is characterized in that the second identification information is variably displayed based on a ball entering the third starting opening.

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the gaming machine is provided with a third starting opening in which the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the gaming ball. As a result, the second identification information is variably displayed by entering the variable second start opening or the third start opening, which makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area into which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
The second starting opening, the first variable ball entrance, and the second variable ball entrance, the second game in which the game ball shot at the second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter. Provided in the area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, by launching a game ball in the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed and a game is performed. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is shot in the second game area so that the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance and the second variable entrance are , Is provided in the second game area in which the ball can be entered with the second launch strength. When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state and the first condition state, a game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In addition, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game ball is shot in the second game area and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is displayed in the second game area. It is supposed that a game is performed by shooting and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game play, and enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the player expects that the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner is set, and the game is played. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that it is possible to diversify the game state and diversify the game playability and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area into which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
In the second starting opening, the third starting opening, the first variable ball entrance, and the second variable ball entrance, a game ball shot at a second launch strength different from the first launch strength enters. Provided in the possible second game area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, by launching a game ball in the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed and a game is performed. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is shot in the second game area so that the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area in which the ball can be entered with the first launch strength, and the second start opening, the third start opening, the first variable entrance and the second The variable ball entrance is provided in the second game area in which the ball can enter with the second launch strength. When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state and the first condition state, a game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In addition, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game ball is shot in the second game area and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is displayed in the second game area. It is supposed that a game is performed by shooting and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game play, and enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the player expects that the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner is set, and the game is played. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that it is possible to diversify the game state and diversify the game playability and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-5.
The high probability, the first game state and the second condition state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability, the second game state and the second condition state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, as a gaming state in which the probability of winning and the first gaming state and the second conditional state are higher than those of the high probability and the second gaming state and the second conditional state, the gaming profit that can be acquired is large. There is. As a result, the player advances the game with the expectation that the game state is set to the high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state, and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-6,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the second game area, and is more than the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the second variable entrance that is arranged on the downstream side, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is set to the high probability and the second game. It is characterized in that the high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state are set higher than the state and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the probability of being high and the first game state and the condition of the second being higher and the probability of being second It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is higher than in the game state and the second condition state. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the game playability and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 8, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 9)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first state,
A first variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
A second variable entrance which can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting opening;
A first game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port more frequently than the first game state. A game state setting means that can be set,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result, the special variable game entrance or the second variable game entrance is put into a state in which a special game is executed. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes the identification result. A gaming machine,
As a gaming state, the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, the high probability and the second gaming state, Then
The second variable ball entrance is characterized in that when the game state becomes the high probability and the first game state, the frequency of entering the game ball increases.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability are provided. Further, as the game state, there are a predetermined probability and first game state, a predetermined probability and second game state, a high probability and first game state, and a high probability and second game state, of which With a high probability and in the first game state, the frequency of entering the second variable entrance is increased. As a result, the player proceeds with the game with a high probability and expecting the occurrence of the first game state. Further, as a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game playability, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch strength,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area into which a game ball shot at a first launch strength can enter.
The second starting port, the first variable ball inlet, and the second variable ball inlet, the second game area in which a game ball shot with a second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter. Is provided in
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, by shooting a game ball in the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game.
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, or the high probability and the second game state, a game ball is shot in the second game area. By this, a gaming machine for playing a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
In a game state in which the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played by shooting a game ball in the second game area,
The frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the high probability and the first game state, which is higher than the high probability and the second game state. Is higher.

According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance and the second variable entrance are , Is provided in the second game area in which the ball can be entered with the second launch strength. Then, when the game state is a predetermined probability and the first game state, a game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Further, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state, a high probability and a first game state, or a high probability and a second game state, a game ball is shot in the second game area and the second identification information is given. It is supposed to play the game by displaying it in a variable manner. Further, in a game state in which a game ball is shot in the second game area to perform a game, that is, in a predetermined probability and a second game state, a high probability and a first game state, and a high probability and a second game state, The game state in which the game ball enters the variable ball entrance with the highest frequency is defined as a high probability and first game state.

As a result, when the player enters a game state in which a game ball is shot in the second game area to perform a game, the player expects that the game state is the high probability and the first game state to proceed with the game. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game play, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or 9-2.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball inlet is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and in the second game state, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second ball is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined with the high probability and the second possibility. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than those in the gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. Then, the second starting port arranged on the upstream side becomes in the second state (open state), which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable ball inlet port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the game balls enter the second variable ball entrance frequently. Further, as a result, it is possible to make the frequency of entering the second variable ball entrance different depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversifying the game playability and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9, it becomes possible to diversify the game playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Reference invention 10)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined profit can be given to a player is provided. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, while the identification information is being changed and displayed, various entertainments for increasing the player's expectation are performed to improve the enjoyment of the game. As such an effect, for example, information regarding the variable display of the identification information that is currently being executed, the variable display of the identification information that is subsequently executed, etc. An effect for displaying (notifying) a variation (effect) mode until the result is derived is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2002-239122).

However, the above-described effect that is performed during the variable display of the identification information is already adopted in many game machines, and the effect mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the entertainment of the game. The present reference invention 10 is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize an effect capable of attracting the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information. , The aim is to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
State control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
Special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
During the variable display of the identification information, an information display effect execution means capable of executing an information display effect that displays information about the game after the end of the variable display is provided,
The information includes at least first information, second information, and third information,
The first information indicates that a special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current gaming state continues even after the end of the variable display.
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes a more unfavorable gaming state after the end of the variable display,
The information display effect executing means is capable of displaying at least two pieces of information among the first to third information when starting the information display effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when executing the information display effect that displays the information about the game after the end of the variable display during the variable display of the identification information, when the information display effect is started, the variable display First information indicating that the special game is executed after the end, second information indicating that the current game state is continued after the end of the variable display, and the game state after the end of the variable display is It is possible to display at least two pieces of information out of the third information indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the subsequent game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It will be possible. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 described above,
The information display effect execution means may display the first information and the second information and may display the second information and the third information when starting the information display effect. It is what

According to such a gaming machine, when starting the information display effect, there are cases where the first information and the second information are displayed and cases where the second information and the third information are displayed. Therefore, when the player starts the information display effect, if the first information and the second information are displayed, it can be estimated that there is no possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous. When the information and the third information are displayed, it is impossible to exclude the possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous. As a result, it is possible to obtain a staging effect that excites the player's expectations and anxiety.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2 described above,
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
As the game state, at least a first game state and a second game state,
The second special game is a special game that has more game profit that can be given than the first special game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The state control means controls the game state after the end of the first special game to the first game state, and controls the game state after the end of the second special game to the second game state. ,
The information display effect execution means can execute the information display effect in the second game state,
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued after the end of the variable display.
The third information is characterized in that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the end of the variable display.

According to such a gaming machine, the special game has at least a first special game and a second special game, and the game state has at least a first game state and a second game state, and a second special game. The game is a special game in which there are more game profits that can be acquired than the first special game, and the second game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Also, the game state after the first special game is finished is the first game state, and the game state after the second special game is finished is the second game state. Then, the information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state), and of the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state. Therefore, by the information display effect, information (game development) on the subsequent game based on the game in the second game state (variable display of identification information) is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the second game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 described above,
Equipped with a fluctuating effect execution means capable of executing a fluctuating effect while changing the identification information is displayed,
The variation effect executing means is capable of executing a variation effect based on a predetermined variation effect pattern,
As the variation effect pattern, at least a first variation effect pattern, a second variation effect pattern, and a third variation effect pattern,
When the second special game can be executed because the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern can be executed during the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result so that the first special game can be executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern during the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result, it is possible to execute the variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern during the variable display.
The information display effect execution means,
The first information and the second information can be displayed when a variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and when a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed,
When the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the second information and the third information can be displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute the variation effect based on the predetermined variation effect pattern during the variation display of the identification information, and at least the first variation effect pattern and the second variation effect as the variation effect pattern. It has a pattern and a third variation effect pattern. When the second special game can be executed because the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the variable display of the identification information is displayed. When the first special game can be executed because the result is the specific display result, the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In this case, it is possible to execute the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display. Then, during the variable display of the identification information, when the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is executed and when the variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern is executed, the information display in the variable display is performed. The first information and the second information can be displayed at the time of starting the effect, and when the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information can be displayed at the time of starting the information display effect in the variable display. It is possible to display the second information and the third information. Therefore, when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. As a result, it is possible to match the information display effect and the fluctuation effect that are executed during the variable display of the identification information.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4 described above,
The information display effect execution means is capable of changing a display mode of information by the information display effect after the information display effect is started.

According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be, depending on the subsequent display mode of the information. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the information display effect is started.

According to the reference invention 10 described above, it is possible to realize an effect that can attract the player's interest as an effect that is performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference invention 11)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result, a special game capable of giving a predetermined game profit to a player can be executed. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, it is general to perform various effects along with progress of games such as variable display of identification information and special games. In such a gaming machine, there is one in which an effect (reach effect or the like) indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result is performed as the character effect by the predetermined character (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-154657).

However, the configuration for performing the character effect by the reach effect or the like has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the execution mode thereof is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the entertainment of the game. This reference invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the enjoyment of amusement of a game machine provided with a character effect by giving a feature to an execution mode of the character effect. Especially.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information,
Special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
A game machine provided with a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The effect execution means,
As the effect, it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit,
It is characterized in that there is a case where a character effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and a case where a character effect is executed along with a special game.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the character effect by the character displayed on the predetermined display unit is executed along with the variable display of the identification information and a case where it is executed along with the special game. As a result, it is possible to make the effect accompanying the variable display of the identification information and the effect associated with the special game relevant, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 described above,
Equipped with state control means that can control the game state,
The state control means can control the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed to a specific game state,
When the specific game state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display section,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific game state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state when the variable display of the identification information is performed becomes the specific gaming state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed in the variable display of the identification information. There is a case where it is executed in accordance with the above, and a case where it is executed in accordance with the special game. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above,
The specific display result includes a first specific display result and a second specific display result,
As the special game, there is a first special game and a second special game,
Based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the first specific display result, the first special game can be executed,
Based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the second specific display result, the second special game can be executed,
The first special game is supposed to have more game profits that can be given than the second special game,
The effect execution means,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game in which the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively large is executed. When it becomes possible, the character effect is executed along with the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the second special game to be executed becomes executable, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. As a result, when the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) is performed, or the second special game is performed, amusement of the game is achieved. It is possible to raise it.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 described above,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
The game ball is provided with a second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state in which it cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
In the first special game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the first variable ball entrance,
In the second special game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entrance,
In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball inlet associated with the second special game is higher than in the game states other than the specific game state,
The effect execution means,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the specific game state becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the specific game state becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the game ball enters the first variable ball entrance. In the second special game which becomes possible and the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second variable entrance. In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance associated with the second special game is higher than in the game states other than the specific game state. As a result, in a situation in which the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) can be executed, the second variable input accompanying the second special game is performed. It is possible to attract the player's interest in entering the game ball into the ball opening and executing the character effect, and enhance the interest of the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the entertainment appeal of the gaming machine provided with the big hit game and the small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-3 to Reference Invention 11-5 described above,
As a probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, a predetermined probability, and a probability setting means capable of setting a high probability higher than the predetermined probability are provided,
The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, as a probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result (execution probability of the first special game), a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability, The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result (execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. Therefore, the possibility that the second special game will be executed is increased, and accordingly, the possibility that the character effect associated with the second special game will be executed is also increased. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game when the second special game is played.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 described above,
In the specific game state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, in the specific game state, there is a high probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the first specific display result, and therefore the possibility of performing the character effect accompanying the second special game is high. It is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the character effect accompanied by the variable display of the identification information under a high condition. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-7 described above,
As a character displayed on the predetermined display unit, a first character and a second character are provided,
As the character effects, there are a first character effect and a second character effect,
The first character effect is an effect including a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is an effect produced by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect,
The effect execution means,
When performing the character effect along with the variable display of the identification information, execute the first character effect,
When the character effect is executed in association with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effects include a first character effect and a second character effect, and the first character effect is a first effect by the first character and the second character and a first character and a second character after the first effect. The second character effect is an effect including the second effect, and the second character effect is an effect which is an effect by the first character and the second character but does not include the second effect. Then, the first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the special game. As a result, the character effect can be executed in a mode suitable for the game situation, and the player's interest in the character effect can be attracted.

According to the reference invention 11 described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine provided with the character effect by giving the feature to the execution mode of the character effect.

(Reference invention 12)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the display result of the variation display being a specific display result, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player is provided. Are known. Some gaming machines of this type include a plurality of display means for performing variable display of identification information and other displays (for example, see JP 2013-240381 A).

In the gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means as described above, the player advances the game by paying attention to the display contents of each display means. However, a configuration including a plurality of display means has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the display mode by the plurality of display means is becoming uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to enhance the entertainment appeal of this type of gaming machine. This Reference Invention 12 is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a plurality of display means, which is characterized by a display mode by a plurality of display means. It is to improve.

A gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
A first display means,
Second display means,
Fluctuation display starting means capable of starting fluctuation display of identification information on the first display means based on satisfaction of a predetermined fluctuation start condition;
And a suggestion display execution means capable of executing a suggestion display indicating that the display result of the variable display of the identification information may be the specific display result,
The suggestion display execution means is capable of executing suggestion display by at least one of the first display means and the second display means.

According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information is started on the first display means, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information may be the specific display result. The suggestion display can be executed by at least one of the first display means and the second display means. Thereby, in addition to the variable display of the identification information on the first display means, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the suggestion display by the first display means and the second display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 described above,
Equipped with a game board with a game area formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

According to such a game machine, the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board, and the second display means is provided outside the game area. Therefore, a wide display is provided inside and outside the game area. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to make a suggestion display with an impact.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 described above,
The second display means comprises a left display means located on the left game area side of the game area and a right display means located on the right game area side of the game area,
The suggestion display executing means is capable of performing suggestion display by at least one of the left display means and the right display means when executing the suggestion display by the second display means.

According to such a gaming machine, first display means provided inside the game area, left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the left game area side, and the game area The suggestion display can be executed by at least one of the three display means, which is the right display means (second display means) provided on the outside of the right game area. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion display and enhance the interest when the suggestion display is performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 described above,
The suggestion display executing means is capable of executing suggestion display in different modes between the left display means and the right display means when executing the suggestion display by the second display means.

According to such a gaming machine, since the different display suggestion display can be executed by the left display means and the right display means, the suggestion display executed by the left display means and the suggestion display executed by the right display means It becomes possible to draw the player's attention to each of. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's expectation.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-4 described above,
When the suggestion display execution means does not execute the suggestion display on the second display means, the second display means is provided with a predetermined display execution means capable of executing another predetermined display.

According to such a gaming machine, when the suggestion display is not executed on the second display means, another predetermined display can be executed on the second display means. This makes it possible to effectively use the second display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to 12-5 described above,
After the variable display of the identification information is started, a specific display execution means capable of executing a specific display indicating whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result is provided,
The specific display execution means may be one in which the specific display is executed by the first display means and the other in which the specific display is executed by the first display means and the second display means. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, the specific display indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is the first display means. In some cases, and in some cases, by the first display means and the second display means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the specific display and enhance the interest in performing the specific display.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-7 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-6 described above,
A stop display executing means capable of executing the stop identification information when the variable display of the identification information is stopped,
The stop display execution means may display the stop identification information on the first display means or may display the stop identification information on the first display means and the second display means. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, the display of the stop identification information when the variable display is stopped is executed by the first display means. , The first display means and the second display means may be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the variation of the display of the stop identification information when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to enhance the interest when the stop identification information is displayed.

According to Reference Invention 12 described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means by giving the display mode of a plurality of display means a feature.

(Reference invention 13)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 for solving the problems related to Reference Invention 12 described above,
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result,
A first display means,
Second display means,
Fluctuation display starting means capable of starting fluctuation display of identification information on the first display means based on satisfaction of a predetermined fluctuation start condition;
And a production display execution means capable of executing a production display related to the variable display of the identification information,
The effect display execution means may be one in which the effect display is executed by the first display means and the other is in which the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information is started on the first display means, and the effect display related to the variable display of the identification information is executed on the first display means. There is a case where it is performed and a case where it is performed by the first display means and the second display means. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the effect display by the first display means and the second display means, triggered by the start of the variable display of the identification information on the first display means.

The "display effect related to the variable display" is, for example, an effect display for changing the background when performing the variable display of the identification information, or an effect indicating whether or not the result of the variable display is the specific display result. It refers to various display effects related to the variable display of the identification information, such as display and effect display that suggests the possibility that the result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 described above,
As a mode in which the effect display is executed by the first display unit and the second display unit, a first mode in which the first display unit and the second display unit are executed from the beginning, and the first mode A second mode in which it is executed by one display means and then also executed by the second display means,
When the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, the effect display execution means and the effect display based on the first aspect are completed before the variable display of the identification information ends. It is characterized in that either one of the effect display based on the aspect can be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, as the mode in which the effect display related to the variable display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, the effect display is performed by the first display means and the second display means from the beginning. And a second mode in which the effect display is initially executed by the first display means and then the effect display is also executed by the second display means. When the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, either the effect display based on the first aspect or the effect display based on the second aspect is completed before the variable display of the identification information ends. Either one can be executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the case where the effect display related to the variable display is performed by preventing the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display from becoming uniform.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 described above,
The effect display based on the second aspect is an effect display in which the display area of the effect display executed by the first display means gradually expands to the second display means. is there.

According to such a gaming machine, when the effect display related to the variable display is executed based on the second aspect, that is, the effect display is initially executed by the first display means and then also by the second display means. When the effect display is executed, the effect display has a mode in which the display area of the effect display on the first display means gradually expands to the second display means. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect such that the display area of the effect display is gradually expanded from the first display means to the second display means, and it is possible to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed. Become.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 13-1 to Reference Invention 13-3 described above,
Equipped with a game board with a game area formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

According to such a game machine, the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board, and the second display means is provided outside the game area. Therefore, a wide display is provided inside and outside the game area. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to display an effect with high impact.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 described above,
The second display means comprises a left display means located on the left game area side of the game area and a right display means located on the right game area side of the game area,
When the effect display is executed by the second display means, the effect display executing means is capable of executing effect display by at least one of the left display means and the right display means.

According to such a gaming machine, first display means provided inside the game area, left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the left game area side, and the game area The effect display can be executed by any one of the three display means, that is, the right display means (second display means) provided on the outer side of the right game area. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display and enhance the interest in performing the effect display.

According to the reference invention 13 described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means by giving a feature to the display mode of the plurality of display means.

(Reference invention 14)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the display result of the variation display being a specific display result, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player is provided. Are known. In this type of gaming machine, a frame (front frame) forming the outer contour of the gaming machine is provided with effect means such as a movable accessory (gimmick), an LED, a speaker, and an effect display device, and these effect means are used to advance the game. There is a device in which the effect is enhanced by driving it together (see, for example, JP-A-2016-195934).

However, in providing the effect means on the frame of the gaming machine, for example, the island facility (CR unit, data display, etc.) on which the gaming machine is installed, the relationship with other adjacent gaming machines, the front surface, etc. Opening and closing of the frame must be taken into consideration, and there are usually restrictions due to them. For this reason, in the gaming machine in which the effect means is provided in the frame body, the installation mode of the effect means is likely to be uniform, and the reality is that it lacks novelty. This Reference Invention 14 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which has a feature in the installation mode of the production means and can make the player feel a novelty. It is in.

A gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
A game board with a game area formed on the front,
A front frame that covers the front surface of the game board and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front,
The front frame is provided such that one end side thereof is pivotally supported and can be opened and closed.
A first frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the one end side of the front surface of the front frame so as to be rotatable with respect to the viewing window side. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, the front frame that covers the front surface of the gaming board is provided so as to be openable and closable (rotatably) around the shaft on the one side end side by pivotally supporting the one side end side. .. Then, a first frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is rotatable on the one side end of the front surface of the front frame on which the front frame is pivotally supported, between the first frame side display means and the viewing window side of the front frame. It is provided in. The viewing window of the front frame that allows the player to visually recognize the game area formed on the front surface of the game board is located on the inner side (center side) of the front frame rather than the one side end that is the pivotally supported side of the front frame By rotating the first frame side display means to the viewing window side when the front frame is opened, the first frame side display means can be housed in the viewing window side (inside the front frame). Further, when the front frame is closed, the first frame side display means is rotated by rotating the first frame side display means in the opposite direction (one side end side of the front frame) when opening the front frame. Can be returned to the original state. For this reason, even if the display means (first frame side display means) is provided on one side of the front surface of the front frame on which the front frame is pivotally supported, opening and closing of the front frame will be hindered. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a novel arrangement mode in which the display means (first frame side display means) is provided on one end side which is the side of which the front frame is pivotally supported. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to feel a novelty that has not existed in the past.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 described above,
The first frame side display means is configured such that, when in an initial state in which the display means is not rotated to the viewing window side, the display surface is in a state of being inclined toward the viewing window side while being visible from the front,
It is characterized by comprising a maintaining means capable of maintaining the first frame side display means in the initial state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first frame side display means is in the initial state in which it is not rotated to the viewing window side, the display surface thereof is visible from the front and is inclined to the viewing window side. The first frame side display means can be maintained in this state (initial state). Since the display surface of the first frame side display means is inclined toward the viewing window side, a player who plays a game while viewing the game area through the viewing window can display the first frame side display means with less movement of the line of sight. It becomes possible to visually recognize the surface (display content), and by keeping the first frame side display means in such a state (initial state), it is possible to close the front frame and play the game. It becomes possible to secure good visibility of the display surface (display content) of the frame side display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 described above,
The maintenance means is constituted by a biasing means for biasing the first frame side display means to the one side end side.

According to such a gaming machine, the maintaining means capable of maintaining the first frame side display means in the initial state urges the first frame side display means to one side end side (the side where the front frame is pivotally supported). It is composed of a biasing means. Therefore, by rotating the first frame side display means to the viewing window side, the initial state of the first frame side display means is released, and by releasing the rotation to the viewing window side, the first frame side display means becomes By the action of the urging means (maintaining means), the urging means is urged toward one end of the front frame to return to the initial state. Accordingly, when the first frame side display means is not rotated to the viewing window side, the first frame side display means can be automatically set to the initial state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-3 described above,
A second frame side display unit capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the other end side of the front surface of the front frame which faces the one end side.

According to such a gaming machine, of the front surface of the front frame, the second frame side display capable of displaying a predetermined image on the other side end side facing the one side end side where the first frame side display means is provided. Means are provided. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a novel frame body (front frame) in which the display means is arranged on both sides of the one end and the other end of the front frame.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 described above,
The second frame side display means is configured such that its display surface is visible from the front and is inclined toward the viewing window side.

According to such a gaming machine, the second frame side display means is configured such that the display surface thereof is visible from the front and is inclined toward the viewing window side. As a result, a player who plays a game while viewing the game area through the viewing window can view the display surface (display contents) of the second frame side display means with a small amount of line-of-sight movement, as with the first frame side display means. It becomes possible to do.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-5 described above,
On the back side of the game board, board side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image and visually recognized from the front through the viewing window is provided.

According to such a game machine, the board side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the back side of the game board, and the board side display means can be visually recognized from the front through the viewing window of the front frame. It is said that. This enables various displays using the frame side display means provided on the front surface of the front frame (outside the game area) and the board side display means provided on the back side of the game board (inside the game area). It is possible to enhance the interest in playing games.

According to the reference invention 14 described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a feature in the installation mode of the rendering means and can make the player feel a novelty.

(Reference invention 15)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on the ball entering the starting opening, the winning/judging determination is performed with a predetermined jackpot probability, and the symbol is variably displayed, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol. There was a big hit game that opened the winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the variable display of the symbol, and the result of the hit/miss determination may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol and is stopped and displayed. Was showing the possibility of doing. In addition, as a big hit, there are a plurality of big hits, a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player and a big hit that is relatively disadvantageous. Further, as game effects (reach effects, character effects, etc.), a plurality of game effects having different execution modes (effect modes) are provided, and different jackpot reliability is shown depending on the game effects to be executed. As a result, the game interest of the player when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed is enhanced, and when the advantageous jackpot is achieved, the game interest is further enhanced.

In the conventional gaming machine, while the gaming performance is enhanced when the game performance with high jackpot reliability is executed, the gaming performance is enhanced when the game performance is a jackpot relatively unfavorable to the player. There was a risk of a drop. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game production that enhances a sense of security in the game and enhances the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
A game effect executing means capable of executing a game effect along with the variable display of the identification information,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is allowed to enter,
Game state setting means capable of setting the game state after the end of the special game to a first game state and a second game state,
Equipped with
A gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
As the game effect, there is a first special game effect and a second special game effect different in effect mode from the first special game effect,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
As a production mode that suggests a predetermined game state, a first production mode that suggests the first game state and a second production mode that suggests the second game state,
When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the first effect mode is continued without executing the special game, and the special game is executed and after the special game ends. There is a case where the effect mode is set to the second effect mode,
When the second special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game is executed to set the effect mode after the end of the special game to the first effect mode, and the special game is executed. There is a case where the first effect mode is continued without being performed, and there is no case where the special game is executed and the effect mode after the special game is set to the second effect mode. It is what

According to such a gaming machine, as a production mode suggesting a game state, a first production mode suggesting a first game state and a second production mode suggesting a second game state are provided, The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Also, as the game effects that can be executed in the first effect mode, there are a first special game effect in which a specific character appears and a second special game effect that is different in effect mode from the first special game effect. Then, in the first effect mode, when the first special game effect is executed along with the variation display of the identification information, when the first effect mode is continued without executing the special game and when the special game is executed, There are times when the effect mode after the end of the special game is set to the second effect mode. Further, when the second special game effect is executed in association with the variation display of the identification information in the first effect mode, when the special game is executed and the effect mode after the special game is finished is set to the first effect mode. In some cases, the first game mode is continued without executing the special game, and the effect mode is not set to the second effect mode.

Thereby, in the first effect mode that suggests a relatively advantageous first game state to the player, when the second special game effect is executed, the effect mode does not shift to the second effect mode. The player can play the game with a sense of security. Further, when the second special game effect is executed, the special game is executed and then the first effect mode is continued, or even when the special game is not executed, the first effect mode is continued. The player can play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, even when the first special game effect that may shift to the second effect mode is executed, the special game is not executed, but the first effect mode may continue, so the player's expectation It is possible to maintain the feeling and prevent the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game as much as possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1.
Executing the first special game effect in the first effect mode is a condition for the effect mode to shift from the first effect mode to the second effect mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the effect mode is set to the first effect mode that suggests the first game state advantageous to the player, the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode. That is the condition for shifting to the second effect mode. Thereby, since the effect mode does not shift from the first effect mode to the second effect mode without going through the first special game effect, the player when a game effect other than the first special game effect is executed It is possible to increase the sense of security and increase the tension when the first special game effect is executed, and to provide a clear game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 or Reference Invention 15-2,
The specific result includes a first specific result and a second specific result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific result,
There is a third game state as the game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the third gaming state,
As the effect mode, there is a third effect mode that suggests the third game state,
In the first special game effect, a specific character appears,
As the game effect, there is a third special game effect in which the specific character appears,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the identification result is the It is characterized in that one identification result is obtained.

According to such a gaming machine, as the specific result for executing the special game, the first specific result and the second specific result, which is disadvantageous to the first specific result, are provided, and the second gaming state is set. It has a third gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the gaming state. Further, as the effect mode, there is a third effect mode that suggests the third game state, and as the game effect that can be executed in the third effect mode, a specific character that is common to the character that appears in the first special game effect appears. It has a third special game effect. When the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the identification result is the first identification result advantageous to the player. ..

As a result, in the first effect mode, the first special game effect that causes a specific character that is a disadvantageous result to appear in the first effect mode is the third special game that causes a similar specific character to appear in the third effect mode. When the effect is a specific result, it is set to a game effect that gives an advantageous result. In other words, depending on the effect mode, the game effects in which the same specific character appears are the game effects having different values for the player. Further, as a result, the expectation for the game effect in which the same specific character appears can be made different depending on the effect mode, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-3,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result, after the special game is finished. The gaming state is set to the first gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result, the game state after the special game ends is the first. It shall be set to the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the value of the third special game effect in the third effect mode and increase the expectation of the player when the third special game effect in which the specific character appears in the third effect mode is executed. Becomes Further, as a result, the sense of expectation for the game effect in which the same specific character appears can be further made different depending on the effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting tired and enhance the enjoyment of the game. Further, the effect mode after the end of the special game may be set to the first effect mode that suggests the first game state.

When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game may be executed to set the effect mode after the end of the special game to the first effect mode. Further, when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the predetermined game effect that does not shift the effect mode after the special game is executed to the second effect mode when the special game is executed. It is also possible to have a plurality of types. Further, "when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game is not executed and the effect mode after the special game is finished is not shifted to the second effect mode. The number of "is a certain number of times when the predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game may be executed and the effect mode after the special game may be shifted to the second effect mode. There may be more than the number of “game production”.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances a player's sense of security and executes a game effect that enhances the entertainment of the game.

(Reference invention 16)
In the conventional gaming machine, although the amount of prize balls obtained during the condominium is shown, it is difficult for the player to easily grasp the amount of game profit obtained in different periods. As a result, there is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily showing the amount of game profit obtained by a player and preventing a decrease in the degree of interest in the game. Is.

A gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
An identification information display unit that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game capable of obtaining a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
A first profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in the first period;
A second profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in the second period, which is longer than the first period,
A first display device capable of displaying predetermined game information regarding a game, and (sub liquid crystal)
A second display device, which is provided separately from the first display device and is capable of displaying predetermined game information about a game, (main liquid crystal)
The first display device is provided with the first profit information display unit, and the second display device is provided with the second profit information display unit.

According to such a gaming machine, the first profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in the first period, and the game profit obtained in the second period longer than the first period A second profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount, the first profit information display unit is provided in the first display device, and the second display device is provided in the second display device separately from the first display device. Providing a profit information display section. As a result, it is possible to display the game profits acquired in different length periods on different display devices. Thereby, the player confirms the first display device when he/she wants to confirm the game profit obtained in the first period, and the second display device when he/she wants to confirm the game profit obtained in the second period. Since it suffices to confirm, it becomes easy to grasp the game profit obtained in the desired period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1.
A gaming machine that shoots a game ball into a game area to execute a game,
The first display device is provided outside the game area,
The second display device is provided inside the game area,
In a predetermined game situation, the first display device is provided with the first profit information display unit, and the second display device is provided with the second profit information display unit and the identification information display unit. To do.

According to such a gaming machine, in a predetermined gaming situation, the first display device provided with the first profit information display unit is provided outside the game area, and the second profit information display unit and the identification information display unit are provided. The second display device is provided inside the game area. Thereby, the player plays the game while confirming the identification information and the game profit obtained in the second period on the second display device provided in the inner region of the game region, and confirms the game profit obtained in the first period. In this case, it is possible to see and confirm the first display device provided in the area outside the game area. Further, as a result, the first display device and the second display device are clearly separated from each other in the inner and outer regions of the game region, so that the player obtains the desired period (first period or second period). It is possible to easily and surely grasp the game profit.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 or 16-2.
When a special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period,
The first period is a period including one special game,
The second period is characterized by being a period including the plurality of special games.

According to such a gaming machine, when a special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, the first period is a period configured to include the special game only once, and the second period is the plurality of times. It is a period that includes all special games. As a result, when the special game is generated a plurality of times in the second period, the second profit information display unit displays profit information including the total amount of game profit acquired in the plurality of special games, In the 1 profit information display portion, profit information including the game profit obtained in one special game is displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp the game profit obtained in the desired period (first period or second period).

In addition, "the period including one special game" may be the execution period of one special game only as the first period, or in addition to the execution period of one special game, after the end of the special game. The first period may include a predetermined game state (excluding special games). Similarly, the "period including a plurality of special games" may be the second period, which is a period during which a special game is performed a plurality of times. The second period may include the game state during the special game and a predetermined game state (excluding the special game) after the last special game of the plurality of special games is finished.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 to Reference Invention 16-3.
As a game state, there is a first game state (high-accuracy low base state), a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, and a (low-accuracy low base state),
The second period starts when the special game is executed, and ends when the game state is set to the second game state in a period other than the special game,
When the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, a plurality of the first profit information display units are provided.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a relatively advantageous first gaming state and a relatively unfavorable second gaming state, and when the special game is executed during the second period. It is started and then ended when the game state is set to the second game state in a period other than the special game. When the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, a plurality of first profit information display units for displaying the profit information acquired during the period including one special game are provided. That is, when the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, it is possible to provide the first profit information display unit corresponding to each special game. As a result, the player can grasp the total amount of the game profit obtained in the second period and also the amount of the game profit obtained in the first period including each special game. .. Note that only one second profit information display unit may be provided to display the profit information acquired during the second period.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 to Reference Invention 16-4,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information is the second specific result, the second special game executing means capable of executing the second special game capable of obtaining the game profit is provided (small hitting game executing means).
The first game state is a game state in which a game profit can be obtained by executing the second special game,
The first period is a period until the end of the first special game and the first game state set after the end of the first special game,
In the first profit information display portion, it is possible to display profit information indicating a game profit obtained in the first special game and a game profit obtained in the second special game in the first game state. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming state is a gaming state in which a gaming profit can be obtained by executing the second special game. Further, the first period is a period until the end of the first special game and the first game state set after the end of the first special game. Then, in the first profit information display portion, the profit information obtained by adding the game profit obtained in the first special game to the game profit obtained in the second special game in the first game state following the first special game is displayed. It shall be. As a result, when looking at the first profit information display unit, it is possible to confirm the profit information indicating the amount of game profit acquired in one special game and the first game state set thereafter.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of first profit information display units are provided when a plurality of special games occur in the second period, each first profit information display unit has each special game and the first game thereafter. Since it is possible to display the profit information in which the states are combined, it is possible to easily and surely grasp how the profit information shown in the second profit information display section has been acquired. Becomes

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-5,
It is characterized in that period information indicating an execution period of the first gaming state is added to the first profit information display section.

According to such a gaming machine, period information indicating the execution period of the first gaming state is added to the first profit information display section. This makes it possible to grasp how long the execution period of the first game state following the special game was for the profit information displayed on the first profit information display section. Thereby, the profit information displayed on the first profit information display unit, that is, the profit information indicating the game profit obtained in one special game and the first game state after the end of the special game, is what process It is possible to easily and surely grasp whether the profit information has been obtained through the above.

For example, when the profit information displayed on a predetermined first profit information display unit indicates a larger (or smaller) amount than the profit information displayed on another first profit information display unit, the first profit information display unit displays By looking at the added period information, it is possible to infer that it is due to the length of the period of the first gaming state in which the gaming profit can be obtained by the second special game. Further, when a special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, it is possible to understand how long the first game state between special games lasts and how much game profit can be obtained. Become.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents the game from becoming less attractive by allowing the player to easily understand the amount of gaming profit obtained.

Incidentally, in the "special game execution means capable of executing a special game that can obtain a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result", the specific result is a big hit (stop of the big hit symbol), and the special game is a big hit. It can be a game, and the special game executing means can be a big hit game executing means. In addition, in the "second special game execution means capable of executing the second special game that can obtain a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second special result", the second specific result is a small hit (small hit. It is possible to make the second special game a small hit game and the second special game execution means a small hit game execution means.

Further, the first gaming state can be a high-accuracy low base state, and the second gaming state can be a low-accuracy low base state (normal state). Then, the second period is started based on the execution of the big hit game in the second game state, and then ends when the game state is set to the second game state (low accurate low base state) in a period other than the big hit game. It may be done. Further, a third gaming state (low accurate high base state) or a fourth gaming state may be provided (high accurate high base state). In this case also, when the third gaming state or the fourth gaming state is entered after the second period starts, the second period is continued, and the gaming state is the second gaming state (a low-probability low base state during periods other than the jackpot game). ), it ends. That is, this second period is also referred to as a “resort period (special period)”.

Further, the second profit information display unit displays the total amount of game profit obtained in the big hit game and the small hit game that have occurred in the second period, and the first profit information display unit displays the big hit game in the second period. And, the game profit obtained in the small hit game can be displayed until the next big hit game of the big hit game occurs. Further, from the game profit displayed in the first profit information display unit and/or the second profit information display unit, the game profit obtained in the specific big hit game is not displayed (not added), that is, the game profit is obtained in the specific big hit game. The gaming profit may be excluded. For example, a big hit game (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, 2R eighth big hit game of this embodiment) with a small amount of game profit that can be obtained is set as the first profit information display section and It may be excluded from the display target of the second profit information display unit. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that such a big hit game that is relatively disadvantageous to the player has occurred.

Further, in a predetermined game situation (for example, a high-accuracy low base state, during a small hit game), a first profit information display unit is provided on the first display device outside the game area, and a second display device is provided on the second display device inside the game area. 2 Profit information display part may be provided. In other game situations (big hit game), the first profit information display unit is provided on the first display device outside the game region, and the first profit information display unit and the second profit are provided on the second display device inside the game region. An information display part may be provided. Moreover, in still another game situation (during the reach effect and the character effect), the first profit information display section and/or the second profit that have been displayed on the first display device and/or the second display device until then. In some cases, the information display unit may be erased and neither the first profit information display unit nor the second profit information display unit may be displayed on the first display device and the second display device. This makes it easy for the player to see the reach effect and the like (specific effect), and to easily inform the player of the determination result. Incidentally, it is possible to apply a situation different from these as the game situation.

(Reference invention 17)
In the conventional gaming machine, while the gaming performance is enhanced when the game performance with high jackpot reliability is executed, the gaming performance is enhanced when the game performance is a jackpot relatively unfavorable to the player. There was a risk of a drop.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game effect that enhances amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
A game effect executing means capable of executing a game effect along with the variable display of the identification information,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is allowed to enter,
A gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the predetermined identification information is set to the reach mode during the variable display of the identification information, and then the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit mode, and the identification information is displayed. If the result of the variable display is not a specific result, the predetermined identification information is set as the reach mode during the variable display of the identification information, and then the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the out mode.
As the game effect, there are a plurality of game effects including a first game effect,
As the identification information, a plurality of identification information including the first identification information,
When the first game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, the reach mode is assumed to be the first identification information in the variable display of the identification information,
When the variation display result of the identification information is the identification result, the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and when the variation display result of the identification information is not the identification result, the first identification information is displayed. It is characterized in that the reach mode is stopped and displayed in the disengagement mode.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a plurality of identification information including the first identification information as the identification information, and a plurality of games including the first game effect as the game effect executed with the variable display of the identification information. Has a performance. Then, when the first game effect is executed and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the effect which constitutes the reach mode is executed by the first identification information, and then the first identification information. Shall be stopped and displayed in a hit manner. As a result, when the first game effect is executed and the specific result is obtained, the first identification information becomes the winning mode. Further, as a result, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of security when the first game effect is executed, and enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1,
As the identification result, a first identification result and a second identification result are included,
The first specific result is more advantageous to the player than the second specific result,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, the variable display result of the identification information is the first identification result.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific result has the first specific result relatively advantageous to the player and the second specific result less favorable than the first specific result. When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit mode, that is, when the first game effect is executed, the first identification result is relatively advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can expect the execution of the first game effect, and when the first game effect is executed, it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2,
As the game effect, there is a second game effect,
As the identification information, second identification information is included,
In the case where the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, the result of the variable display of the identification information may be the second identification result.
When the second game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, in the variable display of the identification information, when the reach mode is the first identification information and when the reach mode is the second identification information. And when,
When the reach mode is reached in the first identification information and the variation display result of the identification information is the identification result, the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and the variation of the identification information is performed. If the display result is not a specific result, the reach mode of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the disengagement mode,
When the reach mode is achieved by the second identification information, and the variation display result of the identification information is the identification result, the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and the variation of the identification information is performed. If the display result is not a specific result, the reach mode of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the out mode.

According to such a gaming machine, the game effect includes a first game effect and a second game effect, and the identification information includes first identification information and second identification information. Then, when the second game effect is executed and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the effect that constitutes the reach mode is executed by the first identification information, and then the first identification is performed. There are a time when the information is stopped and displayed in a hit manner, and a time when an effect forming a reach manner is executed by the second identification information, and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit manner. Further, when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, the second identification result is relatively disadvantageous to the player. As a result, when the second game effect is executed, there are times when the specific result is the first specific result and when it is the second specific result, even when the specific result is obtained. As a result, the player expects that the first game effect will be executed, and when the second game effect is executed, expects that the result is the first specified result, and the game is executed. It becomes possible to raise.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 to Reference Invention 17-3,
In the case of executing the first game effect along with the variable display of the identification information, in the variable display of the identification information, when the reach mode is the second identification information,
It is characterized in that a change effect for changing the second identification information to the first identification information is executed, and the reach mode is set by the first identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second identification information reaches the reach mode during the execution of the first game effect, the change effect of changing the second identification information to the first identification information is executed. , The reach mode based on the first identification information is changed. As a result, when the first game effect is executed, even if the reach mode based on the second identification information occurs, the change effect enhances the interest of the game and the player's sense of security regarding the first game effect. Is possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-4,
The change effect is executed at a second display position different from the first display position at which the second identification information is displayed,
It is characterized in that the first identification information is displayed in the reach mode at the first display position after the previous period change effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the change effect is executed by moving from the first display position where the second identification information is displayed in the reach mode to the second display position. Then, the first identification information changed from the second identification information to the first identification information by the change effect is moved to the first display position and is displayed in the reach mode. Accordingly, by moving the change effect from the first display position and executing the change effect, the player can easily notice the occurrence of the change effect. Further, this allows the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5,
In the identification information display area for displaying the identification information, the second display position is closer to the center position of the identification information display area than the first display position.

According to such a gaming machine, the second display position where the change effect is executed is closer to the center position of the identification information display area than the first display position. As a result, the change effect can be made conspicuous and the player can easily notice the occurrence of the change effect. Further, this allows the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect and enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5 or Reference Invention 17-6,
In the change effect, the first identification information displayed at the second display position is larger than the second identification information displayed at the first display position before the change.

According to such a gaming machine, the changed first identification information displayed in the second display position in the change effect is displayed larger than the second identification information displayed in the first display position before the change effect is executed. As a result, the change effect can be made conspicuous and the player can easily notice the occurrence of the change effect. Further, this allows the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect and enhance the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the interest of the game.

(Reference invention 18)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on the ball entering the starting opening, the winning/judging determination is performed with a predetermined jackpot probability, and the symbol is variably displayed, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol. There was a big hit game that opened the winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the variable display of the symbol, and the result of the hit/miss determination may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol and is stopped and displayed. Was showing the possibility of doing. In addition, by displaying the amount of prize balls obtained by the big hit game, when a condominium in which a plurality of big hit games are executed in a short period occurs, how much prize ball amount was won in the condominium. There was a gaming machine that produced the effect. As a result, the expectation for the big hit occurrence is increased by the game production, and the amusement of the game is enhanced by grasping the prize ball amount obtained in the big hit game.

In the gaming machine as described above, the amount of award balls obtained by the big hit game is shown, but it is difficult to know whether the amount of the award is relatively large or small. As a result, there is a risk of distrust of the game and a decrease in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in amusement of a game while showing the amount of game profit obtained.

A gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
Special game executing means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
Along with the variable display of the identification information, a game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined game effect,
And a profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of gaming profit acquired,
As the game effect, there is a first game effect and a second game effect,
The first game effect is more likely to be executed as the special game than the second game effect,
A specific character is displayed in the first game effect,
The specific character is displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit reaches a specific amount.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming machine is executed in association with the variable display of the identification information, and has the first game effect and the second game effect indicating the possibility of executing the special game. In addition, the first game effect is a game effect that has a higher possibility of executing a special game than the second game effect, and is a game effect that displays a specific character. Further, a profit information display section for displaying profit information indicating the amount of the acquired game profit is provided, and the specific character is displayed even when the profit information displayed on the profit information display section is a specific amount. To do. As a result, when the profit information reaches the specific amount, by displaying the specific character used in the first game effect showing the relatively high possibility of executing the special game, it is possible to obtain a large amount of game profit for the player. By notifying that, the player can easily recognize that many game profits have been obtained.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1.
The profit information display unit is incapable of displaying the profit information of the specific amount based on the game profit obtained by one time of the special game, and the specific amount based on the game profit obtained by the special game of plural times. It is characterized in that profit information of can be displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, the profit information of a specific amount is not displayed only by the game profit obtained by one special game, and if the game profit obtained by a plurality of special games is the specific amount. Profit information can be displayed. As a result, the specific amount of profit information is set to an amount exceeding the game profit that can be obtained in one special game, and when the profit information is displayed in the profit information display section, the specific character is displayed. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game of the player when played.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 or Reference Invention 18-2,
The specific character displayed in the first game effect and the specific character displayed when the profit information displayed in the profit information display unit has a specific amount are configured to include characters of the same shape. It is characterized by being done.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific character indicating the executability of the special game displayed in the first game effect and a specific character indicating that the profit information displayed based on the acquired game profit has reached a specific amount The character and the character are configured to include the same shape. That is, the specific characters displayed in both of these scenes are not only the same character, but also have the same display mode. Further, as a result, the player can easily understand that the specific characters appearing in both scenes are the same specific character and that the situation that is advantageous to the player similarly occurs in any scene (intuition). It becomes possible to recognize.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 to Reference Invention 18-3.
The specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during execution of variable display of the identification information,
The specific character displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit reaches a specific amount is displayed during execution of the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during execution of the variable display of the identification information, and the specific character displayed when the profit information reaches the specific amount is the special game. Is displayed during execution of. As a result, the specific character can appear and the appearance time of the specific character can be increased during both the variable display of the identification information and the execution of the special game. Further, as a result, the specific character can appear even in different game situations, and it becomes possible to maintain the entertainment of the game for a long time.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decrease in the interest of the game while showing the amount of the game profit obtained.

(Reference invention 19)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-1 is
A win/fail judgment means capable of executing a win/fail judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
A game state setting means capable of setting a predetermined game state,
In a predetermined game state, a production mode setting means capable of setting a production mode of a predetermined production mode,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the hit determination is a specific result,
As the game state, there is a first game state (low accurate low base state) and a second game state (high accurate low base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
As the effect mode, a first effect mode is executed (and does not suggest that the game state is advantageous to the player), and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. Along with, a second specific effect mode that suggests that the player is in a game state advantageous (the second game state),
In any of the case where the special game is executed with the specific result in the first game state, and the special game is executed with the specific result in the second game state, In the game state after the end of the special game, the effect mode can be set to the first specific effect mode,
When the effect mode is set to the first specific effect mode, it is possible to shift to another effect mode (without a special game) based on the variable display of the identification information being executed a specific number of times. ,
The possibility that the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game shifts to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times,
The special result is executed in the second game state and the special game is executed, and the special result is set in the first game state when the special game mode is set after the special game is finished. The special game is executed as a result, which is higher than the case where the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is finished.

According to such a gaming machine, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of a predetermined effect mode in a predetermined game state is provided. Further, as a game state, at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state are provided, and at least a first production mode is executed as a production mode. It has one specific effect mode and a second specific effect mode that executes the second effect mode and suggests that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the second game state).

Then, in the first gaming state, if the result of the hit determination is the specific result and the special game is executed, and in the second gaming state, the result of the hit determination is the specific result and the special game is executed, In either case, the first specific effect mode can be set in the game state after the special game ends. Further, in the first specific effect mode, when the variable display of the identification information is executed a specific number of times, it is possible to shift to another effect mode.

Then, the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game executed as the specific result in the second game state can shift to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times. As for the sex, the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game executed as the specific result in the first game state shifts to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times. Higher than possible.

As a result, even in the same first specific effect mode, the effect modes to be transferred after that are different depending on the transfer process, and it is possible to diversify the mode of effect mode transition and enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, since the first specific effect mode that has been changed from the second game state can be expected more than the first specific effect mode that has been changed from the first game state, even with the same first specific effect mode, different expectation It is possible to play games with.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-1
As the effect mode, there is a third specific effect mode that executes a third effect mode different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode,
The third specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that the game state is the first game state,
The second specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that the game state is the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, by executing the third specific effect mode of the third effect mode, it is suggested that the game state is the first game state, and the second specific effect mode of the second effect mode is set. The execution suggests that the game state is the second game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. As a result, when the second specific effect mode is executed as the effect mode, the player can increase the sense of expectation and the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-1 or Reference Invention 19-2,
As the gaming state, a third gaming state (low accurate high base state) and a fourth gaming state (high accurate high base state),
The third gaming state is to be shifted to the first gaming state when the specified number of times of the variation display of the identification information is performed in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state is the fourth gaming state. In the state, when the variation display of the identification information of the specific number of times is performed, it is supposed to shift to the second gaming state,
In any game state of the third game state and the fourth game state, the first specific effect mode can be executed as the effect mode,
When the first specific effect mode is being executed in the fourth game state, the second specific effect mode is shifted to based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times, and in the third game state. When the first specific effect mode is being executed, the second specific effect mode is not shifted based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a third gaming state and a fourth gaming state. Then, in the third gaming state, the gaming state is changed from the third gaming state to the first gaming state on the basis of the variation display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state. In the fourth gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the fourth gaming state to the second gaming state on the basis of the variable display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times. Further, in the fourth game state in which the first specific effect mode is executed, the effect mode is changed from the first specific effect mode to the second specific effect mode based on performing the variable display of the identification information a specific number of times. In addition, in the third game state in which the first specific effect mode is executed, the effect mode is not shifted from the first specific effect mode to the second specific effect mode based on performing the variable display of the identification information a specific number of times. ..

That is, in the case of the fourth game state and the first specific effect mode, the second specific effect indicating that the effect mode is the second game state advantageous to the player based on performing the variable display of the identification information a specific number of times. Although it is possible to shift to the mode, in the case of the third game state and the first specific effect mode, the effect mode cannot be shifted to the second specific effect mode based on performing the variable display of the identification information a specific number of times. Thereby, even when the same first specific effect mode is executed, depending on whether the game state in which the first specific effect mode is being executed is the third game state or the fourth game state, an effect mode that can be shifted to thereafter is selected. Different. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the effect mode and enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-3,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed to a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that of the first mode,
Ball entry frequency setting means that can be set to a predetermined frequency state (low base state) and a high frequency state (high base state) in which the frequency of entering the variable ball entrance is higher than the predetermined frequency state,
Probability determining means, the probability of determining the determination result as the specific result, a predetermined probability, high probability higher than the predetermined probability, and probability setting means, capable of setting
The first game state is a game state set to the predetermined frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the second game state is a game state set to the predetermined frequency state and the high probability. It is what

According to such a gaming machine, a variable ball entrance, a ball entrance frequency setting unit that can change the ball entrance frequency of the game ball into the variable ball entrance, and a probability setting unit that can change the probability of win/fail judgment. , Are provided. Then, the first gaming state is a gaming normal state set to a predetermined frequency state and a predetermined probability, and the second gaming state is a gaming state set to a predetermined frequency state and a high probability. As a result, the second game state is determined to be a specific result with a high probability when the hit determination is executed, so that the special game is more likely to be executed than the first game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the special game and enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-4,
The third gaming state is a gaming state that is set to the high-frequency state and the predetermined probability (low-probability-high base state), and the fourth gaming state is the high-frequency state and the high probability (high-probability). The game state is set to the base state).

According to such a gaming machine, the third gaming state is set to the high-frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the fourth gaming state is set to the high-frequency state and the high-probability. That is, the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state are both high-frequency states, and the gaming states are different in probability of winning/deciding. As a result, if the game state when the first specific effect mode is executed is the fourth game state, a transition is made to the second game state in which the second specific effect mode is executed based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times. Then, the game state becomes advantageous to the player. Further, this makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As another aspect, the special game is executed with a specific result in the second game state, and the first specific effect mode set after the special game is finished is based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times (special. It is possible to shift to the second specific effect mode (without playing games),
The special game is executed as a specific result in the first game state, and the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game is based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times (without the special game). It is also possible not to shift to the second specific effect mode.

Further, as another aspect, the special game is executed in the second game state, and the possibility of shifting from the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game to the second specific effect mode is special in the first game state. It may be higher than the possibility of shifting from the first specific effect mode to the second specific effect mode set after the game is executed and the special game ends.

Further, the second gaming state can be said to be a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the first gaming state, the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state. In addition, in the second game state in which the result of the hit determination is highly likely to be the specific result (set to a high probability), the result of the hit determination is unlikely to be the specific result (set to the predetermined probability). It can be said that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the third game state.

Further, when the result of the hit determination is the second specific result (small hit), the second special game (small hit game) can be executed, and the second game state is the first game state, the third game state, and Compared to the fourth gaming state, the small hitting game execution frequency (small hitting occurrence frequency) may be high.

(Reference invention 20)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-1 is
First win/fail judgment means capable of executing the first win/fail judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A second win/fail judgment means capable of executing a second win/fail judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information displaying means for variably displaying the identification information based on the result of the first hit determination or the second hit determination;
A game state setting means capable of setting a predetermined game state,
In a predetermined game state, a production mode setting means capable of setting a production mode of a predetermined production mode,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A game machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the first win/fail judgment or the second win/fail judgment is a specific result,
As the effect mode, a first effect mode is executed (and does not suggest that the game state is advantageous to the player), and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. Along with, a second specific effect mode that suggests that the player is in a game state advantageous (the second game state),
Whichever of the case where the result of the first hit determination is the specific result and the special game is executed, and the result of the second hit determination is the specific result and the special game is executed. Also in the case of, in the game state after the end of the special game, the effect mode can be set to the first specific effect mode,
When the effect mode is set to the first specific effect mode, it is possible to shift to another effect mode (without a special game) based on the variable display of the identification information being executed a specific number of times. ,
The possibility that the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game shifts to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times,
The result of the second winning/unwinning determination is the specific result, the special game is executed, and the result of the first winning/non-winning determination is the one when the special game is set to the first specific effect mode after the special game is finished. It is characterized by being higher than in the case where the special game is executed with a specific result and the first special effect mode is set after the special game is finished.

Thereby, even in the same first specific effect mode, there is a different possibility that the second specific effect mode will be subsequently transferred depending on the process in which the first specific effect mode is set. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, when the first specific effect mode is set by the result of the second winning/disabling judgment, the setting of the second specific effect mode is performed more than when the first specific effect mode is set by the result of the first winning/disabling judgment. You can expect a transition. Therefore, even in the same first specific effect mode, it is possible to play a game with different expectations.

Further, as the "identification information display means", the first identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the result of the first hit determination (first special symbol hit determination), and the second hit determination (second special symbol). Second identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the result of (judgment). Further, as the game state, there may be a first game state (low accurate low base state) and a second game state (high accurate low base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. ..

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-1,
As the effect mode, there is a third specific effect mode that executes a third effect mode different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode,
When the effect mode is set to the first specific effect mode, the effect mode shifts to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information being executed the specified number of times. , A case of shifting to the third specific effect mode,
The game state when executing the second specific effect mode is a game state which is more advantageous to the player than the game state when executing the third specific effect mode.

Thereby, when playing a game in the first specific effect mode, the player expects that the special game will be executed or the effect mode will shift to the second specific effect mode, It is possible to diversify the mode of transition of the effect mode and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-2,
As the game state, a first game state (low-probability low base state), a second game state (high-probability low base state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and higher than the first game state It has a third game state advantageous to the player (low-probability high base state) and a fourth game state advantageous to the player more than the first game state (high-probability high base state),
The first specific effect mode is an effect mode executed when the game state is the third game state or the fourth game state,
The second specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that the game state is the second game state,
The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the third specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that the game state is the first game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-3,
The third gaming state is to be shifted to the first gaming state when the specified number of times of the variation display of the identification information is performed in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state is the fourth gaming state. In the state, when the variation display of the identification information of the specific number of times is performed, it is supposed to shift to the second gaming state,
In any game state of the third game state and the fourth game state, the first specific effect mode can be executed as the effect mode,
When the first specific effect mode is being executed in the fourth game state, the second specific effect mode is shifted to based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times, and in the third game state. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein when the first specific effect mode is being executed, the second specific effect mode is not shifted based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-3 or Reference Invention 20-4.
A variable ball entrance that can be changed to a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that of the first mode,
A predetermined frequency state, a high-frequency state in which the frequency of entering the variable ball entrance is higher than the predetermined frequency state, and a entering frequency setting means that can be set,
Probability determining means, the probability of determining the determination result as the specific result, a predetermined probability, high probability higher than the predetermined probability, and probability setting means, which can be set,
The first game state is a game state set to the predetermined frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the second game state is a game state set to the predetermined frequency state and the high probability. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or claim 4.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-5,
The third gaming state is a gaming state set to the high frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the fourth gaming state is a gaming state set to the high frequency state and the high probability. The gaming machine according to claim 5.

Further, as another aspect, when the result of the second hit determination is the specific result, the special game is executed, and when the first specific effect mode is set after the special game ends, the special game ends. The first specific effect mode set later can be shifted to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times,
When the result of the first hit determination is the specific result, the special game is executed, and when the first specific effect mode is set after the end of the special game, the first set after the end of the special game. The specific effect mode may not be able to shift to the second specific effect mode based on the variation display of the identification information of the specific number of times.

In addition, when the result of the first hit determination is the specific result, the special game is executed, and when the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is finished, the special game is set after the special game is finished. The first specific effect mode may be set to be incapable of transition to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times, and may be transitioned to the third specific effect mode.

Further, as the specific number, a plurality of times such as the first specific number (50 times), the second specific number (100 times), and the third specific number (150 times) may be set. Moreover, the names of the effect modes are different between the first specific effect mode and the second specific effect mode. In addition, the effect mode that can be shifted to the advantageous effect mode (second specific effect mode) and the effect mode that does not shift to the advantageous effect mode are the same-named effect modes (first specified effect mode).

(Reference invention 21)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on the ball entering the starting opening, the winning/judging determination is performed with a predetermined jackpot probability, and the symbol is variably displayed, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol. There was a big hit game that opened the winning opening. Further, as a game state, there are a plurality of game states in which the probability of winning/judgment determination and the frequency of entry into a predetermined starting opening are different, and there is one in which a game area is changed and a game area is changed to perform a game. (For example, patent document: 2014-161615).

Further, in such a gaming machine, in order to indicate the game area (launch area) to be shot by the player depending on the game state, the instruction of the launch area is given. For example, in a low-probability low-base state in which a game is progressed by so-called left-handing, when a big hit occurs, a notification such as "right-handedness!" is given, and the game is progressed by so-called right-handedness. The player can proceed with the game without being disadvantaged by changing the launch area in accordance with the instruction notification of "right hit!" If the gaming state set after the big hit game is to be left-right hit, the player will be informed again after the big hit that "right hit!" is instructed to continue the right hit game. Notify me. By proceeding with the game in accordance with these instruction notifications, the player does not get confused or disadvantaged even if it is a complicated gaming machine that changes the launch area depending on the game state. You can proceed with the game.

In the gaming machine as described above, the instruction of the launch area is notified every time the gaming state changes, so that the player can play the game according to the instruction, and even a beginner can easily play the game. However, since anyone can easily play the game, if the game is played for a long time, there is a possibility that the player may get bored with the game and the interest of the game may be deteriorated.

The present reference invention 21 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of diversifying instruction notification effects of a launch area and enhancing amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
As a launch area for launching a game ball, it has a first launch area and a second launch area,
Launch area instructing means for executing instruction effect for instructing the launch area of the game ball,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
A variable ball entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter
A game machine comprising: a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the variable entrance is allowed to enter when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
The special game includes a first special game (first bonus), a second special game (second bonus), and a third special game (fourth bonus),
As the instruction effects for instructing the same launch area (second launch area, right-handed area), a first instruction effect, a second instruction effect, and a third instruction effect are provided,
When the first special game is executed, the first instruction effect is executed, when the second special game is executed, the second instruction effect is executed, and when the third special game is executed Is characterized in that the third instruction effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a launch area of the game ball is provided with a first launch area and a second launch area, and is provided with launch area instructing means for executing an instruction effect for instructing the launch area of the game ball. ing. Further, as a special game, a first special game, a second special game, and a third special game, and the first instruction effect as an instruction effect for instructing the same launch area (for example, the second launch area). And, a second instruction effect, and a third instruction effect, the first instruction effect is executed when the first special game is executed, and the second instruction effect when the second special game is executed. And when the third special game is executed, the third instruction effect is executed. As a result, the instruction effect in different effect modes is executed depending on the type of special game to be executed, so that it is possible to diversify the game effect and enhance the interest of the game.

Moreover, it has a 1st specific result, a 2nd specific result, and a 3rd specific result as a specific result. When it is a 1st specific result, 1st instruction production is performed, and when it is a 2nd specific result, The second instruction effect may be executed, and the third instruction effect may be executed in the case of the third specific result. In addition, in the case of the first specific result, the first special game is executed, in the case of the second specific result, the second special game is executed, and in the case of the third specific result, the third special game is executed. Good.

In addition, after the first special game (first bonus) is over, the super effect mode is executed, and after the second special game (second bonus) is over, the super effect mode is executed and the first count effect mode is It may be executed, and the second count effect mode may be executed after the end of the third special game (fourth bonus). Further, the first special game, the second special game, and the third special game may have different effect modes after the end of the special game, or may have different game states after the end of the special game. The game profit that can be obtained in the special game may be different. Further, it is possible to predict the special game and the subsequent game state depending on the type of instruction effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-1,
In a predetermined game state, provided with a production mode setting means capable of setting a production mode of a predetermined production mode,
As the effect mode, a first specific effect mode that executes a first effect mode and a second effect mode that is different from the first effect mode are executed, and a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first specified effect mode. And a second specific effect mode that suggests that
After the end of the first special game, the second specific effect mode is set, and after the end of the second special game, the first specific effect mode is set and the second specific effect mode is set. There is, and after the end of the third special game, the first specific effect mode is set.

According to such a gaming machine, as the effect mode to be executed in the predetermined game state, the first specific effect mode for executing the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and more than the first specific effect mode are executed. And a second specific effect mode for suggesting that the game state is advantageous to the player. Then, there are a case where the second specific effect mode is set after the end of the first special game and a case where the first specific effect mode is set and a case where the second specific effect mode is set after the end of the second special game, After the end of the third special game, the second specific effect mode is set. That is, the player plays the game in the expectation that the second specific effect mode is executed rather than the first specific effect mode.

In addition, the special games are in the order in which the second specific effect mode is likely to be set, that is, the order of the first special game, the second special game, and the third special game (first special game>second special game> The third special game is a special game that has a high expectation (advantageous) for the player. Thereby, in the instruction effect, the first instruction effect executed in the first special game, the second instruction effect executed in the second special game, and the third instruction effect in the third special game. In the order of instruction effects (first instruction effect>second instruction effect>third instruction effect), the instruction effect is highly expected (advantageous) for the player. Further, by this, the player can predict the subsequent special game and effect mode depending on which instruction effect has been executed, diversify the game effect and provide a highly entertaining game property. It becomes possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-1 or Reference Invention 21-2,
A plurality of display units capable of displaying the instruction effect,
The first instruction effect is displayed on a larger number of display units than the second instruction effect, and the second instruction effect is displayed on a larger number of display units than the third instruction effect. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, a plurality of display units are provided as display units for displaying the instruction effect, and the first instruction effect is displayed using a larger number of display sections than the second instruction effect. The 2nd instruction effect is displayed using a larger number of display units than the 3rd instruction effect. That is, depending on the instruction effect, effects are produced using different numbers of display units. As a result, the player can clearly distinguish the instruction effect being executed, and can predict the subsequent special game or effect mode by the instruction effect being executed. In addition, by providing an instructional presentation with high expectations for the player using many display units, it is possible to fuel the expectations of the player and enhance the interest of the game.

The plurality of display units may be a plurality of display devices that are separately configured (separately arranged). Further, the display area of one display device may be divided into a plurality of display sections, each of which may serve as a display section.

Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 21-4 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 21-1 to the reference invention 21-3,
As the plurality of display units, a middle display unit provided at a substantially central portion of the game area, a left display unit provided on the left side of the middle display unit, and a right display unit provided on the right side of the middle display unit, Have,
Each of the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect is configured by combining a pictorial image showing a firing area and a character image showing a firing area,
The first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect all display a character image on the middle display unit.

According to such a gaming machine, the plurality of display units include a middle display unit, a left display unit and a right display unit provided on the left and right of the middle display unit. Further, each of the instruction effects (the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect) is configured by combining a pictorial image showing the firing area and a character image showing the firing area. Then, in each of the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect, among the images forming the instruction effect, a character image indicating the firing area is displayed on the middle display section of the substantially central part of the game area. .. That is, any instruction effect is displayed using the middle display unit.

As a result, even if the display mode of the instruction effect is different, the character images of all the game effects are commonly displayed on the middle display unit that is most noticeable to the player, and the player can easily and easily display the character images. It is possible to reliably grasp the character image. Further, when the number of display units to be used is changed depending on the instruction effect, the number of display sections for displaying a pictorial image or the like showing the firing area forming the instruction effect can be changed. The character image indicating the launch area may be displayed on other display units (left display unit and right display unit) in addition to the character image if it is displayed on at least the middle display unit.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-4,
The first instruction effect is displayed on the three display units, the left display unit, the middle display unit, and the right display unit,
The second instruction effect is displayed on two display sections, the middle display section and the right display section,
The third instruction effect is displayed on one display unit of the middle display unit.

According to such a gaming machine, the first instruction effect is displayed by using the three display sections of the left display section and the right display section in addition to the middle display section, and the second instruction effect is displayed by the middle display section. It is displayed using two display units of the right display unit, and the third instruction effect is displayed on one display unit of the middle display unit. As a result, the instruction effect is produced by using a different number of display units, and the player can clearly distinguish the instruction effect being executed. Further, it becomes possible to predict the subsequent special game or effect mode by the instruction effect to be executed.

According to the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 21, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that diversifies the instruction notification effect of the launch area and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, as another aspect, a fourth instruction effect is provided as an instruction effect for instructing a firing area (first firing area, left hitting area) different from the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect. Then
The first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect are instruction effects for instructing firing in the second firing area,
The fourth instruction effect may be an instruction effect for instructing the firing to the first firing area.

Further, the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect (the instruction to fire to the second firing area) (the game state when the action is performed) and the fourth instruction effect (when the action is performed) It is performed in a gaming state that is more advantageous than the gaming state. That is, it can be said that the state in which the game balls are shot in the second launch area to play the game is a more advantageous game state for the player than the state in which the game balls are shot in the first launch area to play the game.

There are three types of instruction effects with different display modes (effect modes) as instruction effects for instructing emission to the second emission area, and one type as instruction effects for instructing emission to the first emission area. .. That is, there are more types of instruction effects instructing the firing to the second firing area than there are types of instruction effects instructing the firing to the first firing area. This is because there are more types of game states when firing to the second firing region than there are types of game states when firing to the first firing region. By the way, there are three types of game state when shooting by launching to the second launch area (second game area), that is, low accurate high base state, high accurate high base state, and high accurate low base state. , And the number of instruction performances. In addition, as a game state when shooting a game in the first launch area (first game area), there is one type of low-probability low-base state, which matches the number of instruction effects.

Further, the fourth instruction effect is displayed using a plurality of display units. More specifically, the fourth instruction effect is displayed on three display units, that is, the left display unit, the middle display unit, and the right display unit. Further, the fourth instruction effect is configured by combining a pictorial image showing the firing area and a character image showing the firing area. In the fourth instruction effect, both the character image and the pictorial image are displayed on the left display portion and the middle display. Section and the right display section. It is necessary to change (return) the launch area from the second launch area (second game area) to the first launch area (first game area), that is, to change the launch direction from the previous launch area. Since it is necessary to specify the launch area more clearly to the player, such a display mode is adopted.

Further, the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect (the instruction to fire to the second firing area) (the game state when the action is performed) and the fourth instruction effect (when the action is performed) It is performed in a gaming state that is more advantageous than the gaming state. That is, it can be said that the state in which the game balls are shot in the second launch area to play the game is a more advantageous game state for the player than the state in which the game balls are shot in the first launch area to play the game. Therefore, the fourth instruction effect for instructing the firing to the first firing area is executed when the subsequent gaming state is more disadvantageous to the player (returning to the normal mode) than the previous gaming state. It

Therefore, in order not to lower the player's interest in playing the game, the character image forming the fourth instruction effect is formed by "instruction in polite words". Specifically, it says "Please return to the left." As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game as much as possible and to increase (not reduce) the desire to continue the game. In addition, since the number of display units used is large, it is possible to give instructions in a long and polite manner.

On the other hand, although the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect differ in the degree of advantage of the game state after these instruction effects, all of them are instructions for instructing to fire to the second firing area. It is an effect, and is more advantageous than a gaming state in which a game is shot by shooting it in the first shooting area. Therefore, in comparison with the fourth instruction effect, each of them is configured by “instruction by command words (tone)”. Specifically, it says "Right hit!" and "Aim right." As a result, it is possible to convey the instruction contents in a simple and accurate manner with short characters (sentences), and at the same time, the interest in the game is not reduced. In addition, as described above, even if the number of display units used is changed (even if the number is small) by the instruction effects of the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect, the instruction content (clearly). It is possible to convey the launch area) to the player.

Further, the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, the third instruction effect, and the fourth instruction effect may be different from each other in the color of the instruction effect. Further, the sizes of the instructional effects forming the instructional effects may be different from each other. Further, the orientations of the pictorial images showing the firing areas forming the instruction effects may be different from each other. The "direction of the picture image showing the launch area" is different from the direction of the arrow, for example, when the picture image is composed of arrows. Specifically, all of the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect indicate the rightward direction because they instruct the emission to the second emission area (second game area).

However, all of them have different directions (angles, shapes) due to different shapes, and with arrows, for example, you can instruct right-handing by sticking diagonally to the upper right or right-handing by sticking diagonally lower right. Instruct, right stab by piercing straight to the right, or bend right from the bottom to the upper right to instruct the right, or proceed from the lower left to the upper right to the lower right. , You can instruct right-handing with a semi-circular route. Further, these may be directed effects that allow the player to imagine the firing direction by advancing the light effects along the above-mentioned route, instead of the arrows.

In this way, the display modes (size, number of display units to be used, color, shape, effect, etc.) of the first instructive effect, the second instructive effect, the third instructive effect, and the fourth instructive effect are made different. Thus, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize which of these instruction effects has been executed. In addition, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the instruction effect and enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, by the instruction effect, it is possible to make the player grasp the subsequent game state and the degree of advantage of the big hit game and the like, and enhance the interest of the game.

(Reference invention 22)
In the conventional game machine (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-83536), the number to be displayed is subtracted each time the variable display of the symbol is executed in the production mode being executed, and the player can easily set the end time of the production mode. Can understand. However, when the effect mode is finished, the display of the remaining number display section is also finished, and it is difficult to grasp how long the variable display of the symbols is executed. Further, if a large number of game information is simply displayed at the same time, the visibility of game production such as reach production may be obstructed, which may lead to a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily grasping a game situation while ensuring the visibility of a game effect as much as possible.

A gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
Production mode setting means capable of setting a production mode of a predetermined production mode,
A game effect executing means for executing a predetermined game effect,
A game machine comprising: a special game executing means capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
A first display unit that displays at least the identification information, the effect mode of the effect mode set by the effect mode setting unit, and the game effect executed by the game effect executing unit;
A second display section for displaying at least the game effect executed by the game effect executing means,
As the effect mode, there is a special effect mode,
The special effect mode is set after the special game is finished, and is ended based on executing a variable display of the identification information a specific number of times,
A variation count display section for displaying the number of times of performing the variation display of the identification information,
A remaining variation number display section that displays the remaining number of variation displays of the identification information until the special effect mode ends,
The remaining variation number display section is displayed on the first display section, and the variation number display section is displayed on the second display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit that displays at least the identification information, the effect mode of the effect mode set by the effect mode setting unit, and the game effect executed by the game effect executing unit, and the game effect. It has a 2nd display part which displays at least the game production which an execution means performs. Further, it has a special effect mode which is set after the special game is ended and is ended based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times. In addition, it has a variation count display unit that displays the number of executions of the variation display of the identification information, and a residual variation count display unit that displays the remaining number of the variation display of the identification information until the special effect mode ends, The remaining variation count display section is displayed on the first display section, and the variation count display section is displayed on the second display section. As a result, it is possible to separately recognize the number of changes of the identification information and the remaining number of special effect modes, which can be recognized on different display units. Further, this enables the player to accurately and surely grasp the game situation (progress situation).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-1,
It is characterized in that the first display portion is provided at a substantially central portion of the game area, and the second display portion is provided at a predetermined position around the first display portion.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display for displaying the identification information, the effect mode of the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, the game effect executed by the game effect executing means, and the remaining variation number display. The section is provided in the approximate center of the game area that is easily recognized by the player. Further, a second display section for displaying the game effect executed by the game effect executing means and the number-of-changes display section is provided at a predetermined position around the first display section which is a sub position. As a result, the remaining period of the special effect mode being executed is displayed in a substantially central portion of the game area so that it can be easily recognized, and the number of times the identification information has changed by displaying the number-of-changes display section on the surrounding second display section. It becomes possible to recognize. Further, this enables the player to accurately and surely grasp the game situation (progress situation).

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-1 or Reference Invention 22-2,
When the special effect mode is ended based on executing the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times and shifts to another effect mode, the remaining variation number display unit finishes the display, and the variation number is changed. The display section is characterized in that the display of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the identification information is continued even after shifting to another effect mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the special effect mode ends and the other effect mode is entered, the remaining change number display section ends the display from the first display section, and the change number display section changes to the special effect mode. It will continue to display even after it is finished. Thereby, while the special effect mode is being executed, it is possible to grasp the number of changes in the identification information and the remaining period, and after the end of the special effect mode, from the predetermined timing including the number of changes in the special effect mode. It is possible to grasp the number of times the identification information fluctuates.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-1 to Reference Invention 22-3.
The number of times displayed on the number-of-changes display section is initialized based on the end of the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of times displayed on the number-of-variations display section is initialized based on the end of the special game. As a result, it is possible to display and grasp the variation display number of the identification information from the previous special game on the variation number display section. Further, since the special game is initialized based on the end, it is possible to grasp how many times the variable display of the identification information has been executed since the last special game during the execution of the special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-1 to Reference Invention 22-4.
As the game effect, having a specific game effect,
When the specific game effect is executed in the special effect mode, the specific game effect is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit,
In the first display unit, the specific game effect is preferentially displayed and the remaining variation number display unit is made non-display, and in the second display unit, the variation number display unit is preferentially displayed, and the specific game effect and It is characterized in that the fluctuation number display section is displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, when executing the specific game effect in the special effect mode, the specific game effect is displayed on both the first display section and the second display section. Further, in the special effect mode, the first display unit preferentially displays the specific game effect over the remaining variation number display unit, and the second display unit preferentially displays the variation number display unit over the specific game effect. As a result, in the first display section provided in the substantially central portion of the game area, the remaining variation number display section is made non-display to give priority to the specific game effect, thereby executing the game effect having a high degree of interest, and the game entertaining effect. It becomes possible to raise.

Further, in the second display section provided around the first display section, the specific game effect is displayed in the other display areas while the display of the variation number display section is being performed. As a result, the specific game effect can be executed by the display area of the first display unit and the display area of the second display unit with a high interest. In addition, by keeping the number-of-variations display unit displayed during execution of the specific game effect, it is possible to grasp the number of variations during execution of the specific game effect. Further, since the number-of-changes display section is displayed on the second display section provided around the first display section, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the specific game effect from being hindered as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 22, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily grasp the gaming status while ensuring the visibility of the gaming effect as much as possible.

(Reference invention 23)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 23-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a symbol display control unit that causes the symbol that indicates the result of the determination to be stopped and displayed after the symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display unit,
Special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
A holding means capable of holding the right of judgment to a predetermined number,
And a production control means for controlling execution of production,
The effect control means,
As an effect for notifying the determination result of the determination means, during the variable display of the symbols, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed, or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed Run and
When the loss notification effect is executed by a predetermined reach effect that is performed during the variable display of the symbol, and when the right to judge that the hit notification effect is executed is held by the holding means, It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an expected effect that expects the special game to be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the special notification is executed when the loss notification effect is executed by the predetermined reach effect and the right to judge that the hit notification effect is executed is suspended. There is a case where an expected production that makes the expectation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the expected effect when the loss notification effect is executed, and it is possible to reduce the expectation of the player for the execution of the special game. Can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 23-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 23-1,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a first reach effect and a second reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect.
It is characterized in that the second reach effect is executed as the predetermined reach effect.

By the way, when the first reach effect and the second reach effect are compared, since the hit notification effect is more easily executed in the second reach effect than in the first reach effect, the loss notification effect is executed in the second reach effect. In such a case, it is considered that the player's expectation for the special game being executed is likely to be lower than that in the first reach effect when the loss notification effect is executed. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the expected production is performed when the loss notification production is executed by the second reach production and the right to judge that the hit notification production is executed is reserved. May be performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the expected effect will be executed, and effectively suppress a significant decrease in the sense of expectation due to the execution of the loss notification effect by the second reach effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 23-3,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a symbol display control unit that causes the symbol that indicates the result of the determination to be stopped and displayed after the symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display unit,
Special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
A holding means capable of holding the right of judgment to a predetermined number,
And a production control means for controlling execution of production,
The effect control means,
As an effect for notifying the determination result of the determination means, during the variable display of the symbols, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed, or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed Run and
It is possible to execute suggestive effect suggesting that the special game is relatively likely to be executed during variable display of the symbol,
By the predetermined reach effect performed during the variable display of the symbol, the loss notification effect is executed, and when the determination is made, the suggestion effect is executed. When it is, it is possible to execute an expected effect that expects the special game to be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, if the loss notification effect is executed by a predetermined reach effect, and the right of the determination that the suggestion effect is executed when the determination is performed is reserved, the special game is executed. There is a case in which an expected effect that makes the user expect to be executed is executed. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the expected effect when the loss notification effect is executed, and it is possible to reduce the expectation of the player for the execution of the special game. Can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 23-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 23-3,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a first reach effect and a second reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect.
It is characterized in that the first reach effect is executed as the predetermined reach effect.

By the way, when the first reach effect and the second reach effect are compared, the second reach effect is easier to execute the hit notification effect than the first reach effect, and thus even if the first reach effect is executed, A player is unlikely to expect a special game to be played. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the expected production is performed when the loss notification production is executed by the first reach production and the right to judge that the suggestive production is executed is reserved. It may be executed. Therefore, by executing the expected effect, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the special game will be executed.

Two or more arbitrary inventions of the above-mentioned reference inventions 1 to 23 may be combined.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 7b production symbol display area (production symbol display section), 8 production symbol, 20 first starting opening, 21 second starting opening, 30 first big winning opening, 35 second big winning opening, 39 specific area , 41a 1st special symbol display device (1st special symbol display part), 41b 2nd special symbol display device (2nd special symbol display part), 80 main control board (main control part), 90 sub control board (sub control) Part), 100 image control board (image control part), 103a third effect hold indicator, 103b fourth effect hold indicator.

Claims (4)

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a symbol display control unit that causes the symbol that indicates the result of the determination to be stopped and displayed after the symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display unit,
Special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
A holding means capable of holding the right of judgment to a predetermined number,
And a production control means for controlling execution of production,
The effect control means,
As an effect for notifying the determination result of the determination means, during the variable display of the symbols, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed, or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed Run and
Reach effects that can be executed by the effect control unit during the variable display of the symbols include a first reach effect and a second reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect.
The effect control means,
When the losing notification effect by the second reach demonstration is executed, the condition that is being held by the judgment on the right is the holding means so that the contact notification effect is performed, the special game is executed A gaming machine characterized by not executing the expected effect when the lost notification effect is executed by the first reach effect while executing the expected effect that is expected to be performed. The effect control means,
During the variable display of the symbols, it is possible to further execute the third reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect,
Even when the loss notification effect is executed by the third reach effect, the expected effect is executed,
If the expected effect is executed after the loss notification effect is executed by the second reach effect, the hit notification effect is always executed after that.
When the expected effect is executed after the loss notification effect is executed by the third reach effect, there may be a time when the hit notification effect is executed and a time when the loss notification effect is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a symbol display control unit that causes the symbol that indicates the result of the determination to be stopped and displayed after the symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display unit,
Special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
A holding means capable of holding the right of judgment to a predetermined number,
And a production control means for controlling execution of production,
The effect control means,
As an effect for notifying the determination result of the determination means, during the variable display of the symbols, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed, or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed Run and
Reach effects that can be executed by the effect control unit during the variable display of the symbols include a first reach effect and a second reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect.
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute suggestive effect suggesting that the special game is relatively likely to be executed during variable display of the symbol,
On condition that the right to make a decision that the suggestion effect will be executed when the determination is made when the loss notification effect is executed by the second reach effect is held by the holding means, A gaming machine characterized by executing the expected effect that expects the special game to be executed , while not executing the expected effect when the loss notification effect is executed by the first reach effect . The effect control means,
During the variable display of the symbols, it is possible to further execute the third reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect,
Even when the loss notification effect is executed by the third reach effect, the expected effect is executed,
When the expected effect is executed after the loss notification effect is executed by the third reach effect, the hit notification effect is always executed after that.
When the expected effect is executed after the loss notification effect is executed by the second reach effect, there may be a time when the hit notification effect is executed and a time when the loss notification effect is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein:

Images